Basics of…(Bold indicates NEW for 10-11) Page Page # Basics of…(Bold indicates NEW for 10-11) Page Page #
Tab 1 Tab 6
Drills 4 5 Toggle & Pneumatic/Hydraulic Clamping 37 1169
High Performance Drills 5 77 Spring-Loaded Devices 38 1232
Spade Drills & Indexable Drilling 6 159 Eyebolts and Hoist Rings 39 1250
Spotting Drills & Countersinks 7 190 Magnets 40 1260
Reamers 8 220 Coil Spring 41 1320
Counterbores 9 248 Belleville Disc Springs 42 1334
Light Industrial Cutting Tools 10 254 Tab 7
Tab 2 Small Calipers 44 1342
11 272
Taps & 12 & 273 IP Standards 43 1342
Thread Forming Taps 13 308 Statistical Process Control-SPC 45 1354
High Performance Taps 14 322 Outside Micrometers 46 1354
Pipe Taps 15 358 Specialty Micrometers 47 1355
External Threading 16 371 Indicators 48 1401
Thread Milling 17 391 Gage Block Specifications 49 1432
Thread Repair 18 400 Go/No-Go Measuring 50 1452
Tab 3 Tape Measures 51 1487
End Mills 19 428 Tab 8
Routing End Mill Technical Information 20 506 Vises 52 1595
Broaches 21 529 Lathe Chucks 53 1618
End Mills 22 544 Centers 54 1646
Routing End Mills 23 652 Drill Chucks 55 1697
Tab 4 Vibration Pads, Mounts & Hangers 56 1745
Chipbreaker Cross Reference &
ANSI Insert Nomenclature 24 677 Knurls 57 1762
Indexable Tool Holder Nomenclature 25 809 Tab 9
Carbide Threading System Nomenclature 26 850 Flat Stock & Drill Rod 58 1815
Boring Bars 27 905 Aluminum Alloys 59 1841
Tab 5 Brass, Bronze, Copper, Nickel & Iron 60 1845
Grinding Wheels 28 926 Stainless Steels 61 1855
Cut-off & Depressed Center Grinding Wheels 29 946 Polyurethane 62 1880
Coated Quick Change Discs 30 985 Rubber Sheeting 63 1883
Deburring Wheels 31 1011 Wire Cloth 64 1896
32 1033
Hand Files & 33 & 1034
Hand Deburring 34 1053
Abrasive Brushes 35 1063
Abrasive Blasting Media 36 1091
Page 1
Big Book Big Book
Basics of…(Bold indicates NEW for 10-11) Page Page # Basics of…(Bold indicates NEW for 10-11) Page Page #
Tab 10 Tab 13
Socket Head Fasteners 65 1902 Eye Protection 102 2718
Nylon Fasteners 66 2014 Head Protection 103 2750
Electronic Hardware 67 2049 Hearing Protection 104 2756
Dowel Pins 68 2066 Respiratory Protection 105 2769
Blind Rivets 69 2080 Gloves 106 2787
Concrete Anchoring 70 2093 Cut Protection Gloves 107 2805
Padlock Keying Options 71 2124 Lineman's Gloves 108 2819
ANSI 107-2004 High Visibility Safety Apparel 109 2833
Cleanrooms 110 2843
Emergency Eyewash Stations & Drench Shwrs 111 2868
Tab 11 Fire Extinguishers 112 2875
Sockets 72 2190 Fall Protection 113 2881
Insulated Hand Tools 82 2359 Batteries 114 2907
Hex, Ball End Hex & Torx Tools 73 2231 Identification 115 2932
Torque Conversions 74 2241 Lockout / Tagout 116 2965
Torque Wrenches 75 2242 Matting 117 2975
Wrenches 76 2249 Sorbents 118 2990
Screwdrivers & Bits 77 2267 Safety Cans 119 2998
Nut Drivers 78 2282 Safety Cabinets 120 3002
Pliers 79 2298 Secondary Spill Containment 121 3006
Chisels & Punches 80 2324 Can Liners 122 3075
Hammers 81 2343 Wet Mops 123 3079
Non-Sparking Tools 83 2367 Tab 14
Utility Knives 84 2370 Shelving 124 3102
Pocket Knives 85 2376 Storage Racks 125 3111
Titanium Bonded Scissors & Snips 86 2382 Storage Bins 126 3123
Snips 87 2388 Tool Roller Cabinets, Workstations & Chest 127 3148
Handsaws 88 2390 Casters 128 3205
Battery Packs for Cordless Power Tools 89 2468 Caster Mounting Options & Terms 129 3206
Power Saws 90 2484 Caster Load Capacity by Duties & Definitions 130 3207
Pneumatic Grinder Safety 91 2532 Hydraulic Pumps, Cylinders & Fittings 131 3272
Pneumatic Tool Conversion Tables 92 2533 Mechanical Hand Lever Pullers/Hoists 132 3283
Pneumatic Impact Wrenches 93 2551 Mechanical / Hand Chain Hoists 133 3286
Screw Torque Guide 94 2562 Electric Hoists 134 3288
Tab 12 Air Hoists 135 3292
Foam Adhesives/Sealants/Void Fill 95 2604 Hoist Beam Trolleys 136 3294
Adhesives 97 2612 Slings 137 3301
Room Temperature Vulcanizing Silicones 96 2608 Wire Rope 138 3320
Industrial Markers 98 2628 Fibrous Rope 139 3323
Steel Hand Stamps 99 2634 Choosing The Correct Ladder 140 3333
Labeling 100 2641 Choosing a Rolling Ladder 141 3341
Metalworking Fluids 101 2709 Carton & Water Activated Box Sealing Tape 142 3367
Page 2
Big Book Big Book
Basics of…(Bold indicates NEW for 10-11) Page Page # Basics of…(Bold indicates NEW for 10-11) Page Page #
Tab 15 Tab 16
Fluorescent Lamps 143 3390 Air Compressors 173 3838
Incandescent and Halogen Lamps 144 3397 Air System Components 174 3859
Conversion of Incandescent Lamps
to Compact Fluorescent Lamps 145 3403 Flexible Tubing 175 4018
High Intensity Discharge (HID) Lamps 146 3406 Tygon Physical Properties 176 4027
Electric Ballasts 147 3412 Compression Tube Fittings 177 4067
NEMA Configurations 148 3447 Connector & Coupler Interchange Chart 178 4149
Steel Box Bracket Designations 149 3459 Tab 17
NEMA (National Electrical Manufacturers 179 4166
Association) Enclosure Types 150 3477 Air Filters & 180 & 4167
National Electrical Code (NEC) Ratings 151 3502 Electric Heat 181 4210
Surge Suppression 152 3505 O-Rings 182 4274
Cords and Cables 153 3520 Mechanical Pump Seals 183 4330
Cable Connectors 154 3529 Technical/Informational Charts
Page 3
DRILL TECHNICAL INFORMATION
Basics of...Drills
Drills are used in a variety of operations, from maintenance and repair to high volume precision hole-making. When selecting a drill, it is important to keep the following steps in mind: Choose the
right Drill Style, Grade and Length for the job, match the Tool Material to the workpiece material and select the best Drill Point for your application. For improved tool performance and tool life, add
a Coating or surface treatment.
With all the choices in the market, choosing the right drill can be difficult. If you know the In today’s competitive environment, getting the most out of your tooling is vital.
diameter and depth of the hole, amount of holes you need to make and the type of job, you Selecting the right tool material is a big step toward maximizing productivity and
are already halfway there. reducing cost per hole.
Styles:
High Speed Steel (HSS: M1, M2, M7, M50):
Straight Shank Drills are the most common style in the world. Shank size always matches the • Combines good tool life and productivity with minimal cost
cutting diameter. • Works well in free cutting and carbon steels, as well as soft, non-ferrous materials like
aluminum, brass, bronze and copper
• Twist Drills are the most widely used style in the world. For use in the widest application in • Able to handle less than ideal set-ups
ferrous and non-ferrous materials Cobalt (M-35, M-42):
• Parabolic Drills are for deep-hole drilling, reducing the need to peck • Provides better wear resistance, higher hardness and toughness than HSS
• Slow Spiral Drills are used for long chipping materials, such as aluminum and copper • Very little chipping or microchipping under severe cutting conditions, allowing the tool to
• Fast Spiral Drills are used for small chipping materials like stainless steel run 10% faster than HSS
• Half-Round Drills are used for deep-hole drilling of very soft materials, like brass • With the right point angle and helix, cobalt is the most cost-effective for machining cast
and rubber iron, heat-treated steels and titanium alloys
• Straight Flute Drills are designed to drill the hardest steels • Able to handle less than ideal set-ups
• Core Drills are used to enlarge existing holes
Powdered Metal (PM) Cobalt (ASP-30, ASP-60):
• A cost effective alternative to solid carbide, powdered metal is tougher and less prone
Reduced Shank Drills are a popular choice for maintenance and repair. Because the shank to breakage
size is smaller than the drill diameter, they can drill holes larger than the typical drill chuck • Tools perform well in materials <30HRC, as well as highly abrasive materials like high-
capacity. silicon aluminums
• 3⁄8w Reduced Shank drills holes up to 1⁄2w with a standard 3⁄8w chuck Solid Carbide:
• Silver and Deming (1⁄2w Reduced Shank) drills holes up to 11⁄2w with a 1⁄2w drill chuck • For high-performance applications; Carbide can run faster and withstand higher
• 3⁄4w Reduced Shank drills holes up to 2w with a 3⁄4w drill chuck temperatures, while providing good wear resistance
• Provides better rigidity than HSS, yielding a higher degree of dimensional accuracy, often
Taper Shank Drills are long length drills that are fitted with a special shank called a Morse eliminating the need to ream
Taper. These drills are made specifically for spindles that can hold Morse Taper shank drills. • Carbide is brittle, and tends to chip when conditions are not ideal; heavy feed rates are
more suitable for HSS and Cobalt tools
• Taper Shank Drills come in many styles: Stub Length, Extra Long, Core Drills, Hi-Helix, • Carbide is used in abrasive and tough-to-machine materials: cast iron, non-ferrous alloys,
Slow-Helix and Coolant-Fed glass, plastics and composites
• Carbide-Tipped tooling offers many of the advantages of solid carbide tooling at a reduced
cost, especially larger diameter tools
Grades:
• • General Purpose is a perfect choice for maintenance and repair or short production runs
in soft ferrous and non-ferrous materials (Refer to Drill Selection Chart on pages 2 & 3)
• • Heavy-Duty drills typically combine a split point to prevent walking, and stronger flutes Coatings
for better rigidity. They are an excellent choice when drilling harder materials
• • High Performance drills are typically designed for application specific operations where One of the best methods to improve the productivity or tool life of a drill is to add a coating or
productivity and cost per hole is a concern. Maximizing speeds/feeds is essential, so surface treatment. Coatings and surface treatments build a barrier between the drill and the
always review published manufacturer’s recommendations workpiece. Different coatings provide different results, so select carefully.
Cobalt Parabolic Drill Material Specific Color Band Drill Carbide Jobber Drill
Drill Points
Styles
• 130° Point is common on high performance parabolic drills, disperses heat well and helps keep drill straight in deeper holes
• 135° Split Point is self-centering, it will not walk or slide when starting a hole
• 140° Point is common on high performance carbide drills, and helps get the cutting edge into tough materials quickly
Page 5 Page 77
77
SPADE & INDEXABLE DRILLING TECHNICAL INFORMATION
Spade Drill Spade Drill Insert Indexable Drill Indexable Drill Insert
Modular Drill
Spade Drills
• A drill bit, which contains a replaceable flat-end cutting blade with two cutting lips, used for deep hole drilling or larger holes ranging from 1” to 6” diameter
• Has special shanks called Holders and Blades (Inserts) may be quickly replaced which saves time during set-up
• Allows the user to drill many different diameter holes simply by changing the blade
• Types: Universal and High Performance
Straight Flute
• Recommended for horizontal machining center applications to maximize chip evacuation
Helical Flute
• Recommended for vertical machining center applications to break chips and enhance chip removal
Modular Drills
Indexable Drills
159
Page 6
DRILLS, COUNTERSINKS & REAMER TECHNICAL INFORMATION
Spotting Drill Countersink (Single Flute) Combined Drill & Countersink (Plain Type)
Holes are drilled in a workpiece for many different reasons. Often, the process begins with a spotting operation and ends with a countersinking operation.
Starting a hole with a spot drill provides a true center for more accurate drilling. As the name implies, these tools are designed to improve productivity by
Always choose a spot drill with an equal or greater angle than the drill that will performing the drill and countersink operation in one pass.
be used to make the finished hole.
TYPES
ANGLES
Plain
90° • Most common style
• Used to create a chamfer for the hole that is being produced • Standard flute clearance
• Always select a size larger than the drill to be used to create the hole
Radius
120° • Have increased flute clearance
• Used for preparing a hole for a 118° or 120° drill bit • Provide better productivity and more accurate holes than all other countersinks
190
Page 7
REAMERS TECHNICAL INFORMATION
Basics of ...Reamers
Straight Flute Chucking Reamer Spiral Flute Chucking Reamer
Spiral Flute Taper Shank Bridge Reamer Straight Flute Hand Expansion Reamer
As the complexity of manufactured products intensifies, so does the need to create consistent, highly tolerant holes. Reamers are the perfect solution for enlarging or
finishing an existing hole to a specific size and tolerance.
220
Page 8
COUNTERBORES
Basics of...Counterbores
Solid Pilot Counterbore for Fillister Head Screws Interchangeable Pilot Counterbore
Counterbores are used to enlarge a portion of an existing hole to hide the head of a screw or to provide a seat for a nut. They come with solid or interchangeable pilots,
and many are built for making holes for a specific type of fastener.
Types Use a Counterbore for:
Solid Pilot
• Manufactured with the pilot attached to the cutting end of the tool • Socket head cap screws
• Provide a very accurate hole • Machine screws
• Fillister head screws
Interchangeable Pilot • Spot facing
• Do not come with an attached pilot
• Separate pilot is attached by sliding the shank through a pilot-hole built
into the counterbore
• Better flexibility, as a single tool can be used in many different hole diameters
by switching the pilot Page 9
HSS & Cobalt 3 Flute Solid Pilot HSS Interchangeable Pilot Straight &
Straight Shank Counterbore Sets Taper Shank Counterbore Sets
Fractional, Wire & Metric Sizes • Complete with Pilots in fitted case
For Socket Head Cap Screws Each set includes: 13 counterbores - 26 pilots
Counterbores: 1⁄4w to 1w by 16ths
Tool Material: Pilots: 1⁄8w, 5⁄32w, 3⁄16w and 1⁄4w with 3⁄32w shanks.
HSS 3⁄16w, 7⁄32w, 1⁄4w, 9⁄32w and 5⁄16w with 5⁄32w shanks.
• Provides good wear resistance in mild steels 1⁄4w, 5⁄16w, 3⁄8w, 7⁄16w, and 1⁄2w with 3⁄16w shanks.
and nonferrous materials such as plastics, 5⁄16w, 3⁄8w, 7⁄16w, 1⁄2w, 9⁄16w and 5⁄8w with 1⁄4w shanks.
aluminum, copper, brass and bronze 3⁄8w, 7⁄16w, 1⁄2w, 9⁄16w, 5⁄8w and 3⁄4w with 5⁄16w shanks.
Cobalt Type Order # Price/Set
• Provides better wear resistance in hardness and
toughness compared to HSS Straight Shank Set 08794844 $522.23
• For use in high-tensile alloys, titanium, cast iron, Inconel Taper Shank Set 08784837 565.17
and high-nickel stainless steels
Made in USA - HSS
No. of Size Supplied Standard Pilot 1⁄64w Oversized Pilot 1⁄32w Oversized Pilot
HSS Interchangeable Pilot Straight
Pcs. Range with: Order # Order # Order # Price Ea. Shank Counterbore Sets
10 1⁄4, 5⁄16, 3⁄8, 7⁄16, 1⁄2w, Wood 08273047 08273039 08273021 $295.54
#4, #5 #6, #8, #10 Case
For Socket Head Cap Screws
• Short Series
Made in USA - HSS Pilots Sold Separately. Refer to Page No. 249 for Pilots.
No. of Size Supplied .5mm Oversized Pilot No. of Set Consists
Pcs. Range (mm) with: Order # Price Ea. Pieces of (In.) Order # Price/Set
8 M3, M4, M5, M6, M8, M10, M12, M14 Wood Case 08273054 $313.93 6 3⁄16, 1⁄4, 5⁄16, 3⁄8, 7⁄16, 1⁄2 08794018 $137.70
7 1⁄4, 3⁄8, 1⁄2, 5⁄8, 3⁄4, 7⁄8, 1 08794034 206.86
Keo - M-35 Cobalt 11 3⁄16, 7⁄32, 1⁄4, 9⁄32, 5⁄16, 11⁄32, 08794026 248.45
3⁄8, 13⁄32, 7⁄16, 15⁄32, 1⁄2
No. of Size Supplied Standard Pilot 1⁄64w Oversized Pilot 1⁄32w Oversized Pilot
248
LIGHT INDUSTRIAL CUTTING TOOLS TECHNICAL INFORMATION
Trinado™ HSS 135° Split Point 29 Pc. Cobalt Pilot Point Drill Bit Set
Mechanics’ Length Drill Bit Sets
• PILOT POINT® tip starts on contact for clean accurate holes and
• 3-Flat shank provides strong grip in cordless power tools reduces lock-up on breakthrough
• Convenient metal index • No-Spin shank eliminates the frustration of bit spinning in the chuck
• Finish: Bronze/black oxide • Size markings are located above the shank to prevent them from
Size Range (In.) No. of Pcs. Order # Price/Set wearing away
• Tapered web provides greater durability to reduce breaking
1⁄16- 1⁄4x64ths 13 09922352 $26.90 Mfr’s #DW1269 Set Includes:
1⁄16 - 1⁄2x32nds 15 09922360 74.79 • 1⁄16, 5⁄64, 3⁄32, 7⁄64, 1⁄8, 9⁄64, 5⁄32, 11⁄64, 3⁄16, 13⁄64, 7⁄32, 15⁄64, 1⁄4, 17⁄64, 9⁄32,
1⁄16 - 3⁄8x64ths 21 09922378 67.12 19⁄64, 5⁄16, 21⁄64, 11⁄32, 23⁄64, 3⁄8, 25⁄64, 13⁄32, 27⁄64, 7⁄16, 29⁄64, 15⁄32, 31⁄64 & 1⁄2w
1⁄16 - 1⁄2x64ths 29 09922386 139.46
Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea.
DW1269 71854269 $143.46
254
TAPS TECHNICAL INFORMATION
Basics of...Taps
A tap removes material from a pre-drilled or punched hole. The result of this cutting action produces threads within the drilled hole. These threads are used in
conjunction with screws or bolts to hold two pieces of material together. The cutting edges at the front of a tap remove material from the workpiece. The chips are
stored in the flutes, or pushed forward in front of the tap, or are drawn up along the flutes, removing the chips and cutting fluids from the hole.
272 CALL MSC TODAY 800-521-9520 FOR ALL YOUR INDUSTRIAL NEEDS
Page 11
TAPS TECHNICAL INFORMATION
The 1⁄4 represents the diameter of the thread in inches. The 20 represents the number of threads per inch or TPI. Standard taps are either standard coarse series
threads NC (1⁄4-20), fine series threads NF (1⁄4-28) or extra fine series NEF (1⁄4-32). There are other standard tap designations such as NPT or NPTF for tapered pipe
threads. Special taps are usually designated NS indicating a special thread size.
Technical Info
Inch - Tap & Drill Chart 75% Thread Metric - Tap & Drill Size 70-75%
Thread Size Drill Size Thread Size Drill Size Thread Size Drill Size Thread Size Drill Size Thread
Thread Size Drill Size Thread Size Drill Size Thread Size Drill Size
0-80 3⁄64 5-44 38 1⁄4-28 3 9⁄16-18 33⁄64 M1.6 x .35 1.25 M4.5 x .75 3.75 M12 x 1.75 Y
1-64 53 6-32 36 5⁄16-18 F 5⁄8-11 17⁄32 M2 x 0.4 1.6 M5 x .8 4.2 M14 x 2 12
1-72 53 6-40 33 5⁄16-24 I 5⁄8-18 37⁄64 M2.5 x .45 2.05 M6 x 1 5 M16 x 2 14
2-56 50 8-32 29 3⁄8-16 5⁄16 3⁄4-10 21⁄32 M3 x .5 2.5 M7 x 1 6 M18 x 2.5 15.5
2-64 50 8-36 29 3⁄8-24 Q 3⁄4-16 11⁄16 M3 x .6 2.9 M8 x 1.25 6.75 M20 x 2.5 17.5
3-48 47 10-24 25 7⁄16-14 U 7⁄8-9 49⁄64 M4 x .7 3.3 M10 x 1.5 8.5
3-56 46 10-32 21 7⁄16-20 W 7⁄8-14 13⁄16
273
Page 12
THREAD FORMING TAPS TECHNICAL INFORMATION
Materials particularly well suited for thread forming include aluminum, brass, copper, lead, stainless steel, carbon steel, cast steel, leaded steel and zinc. In general,
any material which produces a stringy chip is a good candidate for cold forming threads. If the chips are powdery, the material may be too brittle. Forming taps
generate threads without producing chips. The threads produced are much stronger than those created by cut taps because of the displacements of the grain of the
metal in the workpiece. Cutting taps produce chips which may interfere with the tapping process.
Thread forming taps are also known as: Fluteless Taps, Roll Taps & Cold Forming Taps.
Major Advantages to Thread Forming
1. Chipless Tapping – no chip removal problems in blind holes
2. Stronger Threads – the grain flow of formed threads follows the contour of the thread in steel and stainless steel, resulting in greater thread strength
3. Better Thread Gaging – forming taps create their own lead therefore the possibility of producing oversized threads is greatly reduced
4. Stronger Taps – the absence for the need for flutes results in a stronger more solid tap
5. Longer Tap Life – forming taps last 3 to 20 times longer because they have no cutting edge to dull
6. More Efficient Production – longer tap life, less tap breakage and faster tapping speeds (up to 2x faster than cutting taps)
7. Ideal for Non-Lead Screw Tappers – The ability to form their own lead makes forming taps well suited for NC machines or other machines without lead screws
Surface Treatments
308
HIGH PERFORMANCE TAPS TECHNICAL INFORMATION
Materials
Page 322
Page 14
322
PIPE TAPS TECHNICAL INFORMATION
Pipe Taps are used to cut internal threads in parts or fittings that will be mated with threaded pipe or fittings to make a pressure tight joint. Tapping pipe threads
requires higher cutting forces than regular machine thread tapping, because pipe threads require 100% thread depth versus approximately 75% thread depth for
machine threads, and all threads on tapered pipe taps are cutting, where as, only the chamfer threads on machine taps are cutting.
Types Styles
NPT – American National Standard Taper Pipe Threads
• For general use Regular Hook
• Assembly requires a thread sealant or Teflon® tape • General purpose for ferrous and non-ferrous materials producing small easily
broken chips
ANPT – Aeronautical National Form Taper Pipe Threads
• Same as NPT except closer gage tolerances required Low Hook
• Used for Cast Iron and Brass (materials with granular chips)
NPTF – Dryseal American National Standard Tapered Pipe Threads
• Assembly does not require a thread sealant. Seal is created by metal High Hook
to metal contact • Used for soft gummy material that tend to tear rather than cut clean and for
NPS - American National Standard Straight Pipe materials that produce stringy chips
• Threads in pipe couplings Spiral Flute
NPSC – American National Standard Straight Pipe • Draws chips out of a hole where chip disposal is a problem
• Threads in pipe couplings
NPSM – American National Standard Straight Pipe Forming
• Threads for free-fitting mechanical joints for fixtures • Forms internal threads by displacing the metal and produces no chips
NPSF – Dryseal American National Standard Fuel Internal Straight Pipe Threads Short Projection
BSPP – British Internal Straight Parallel Pipe Thread full form for mechanical joints • Designed for shallow hole applications
BSPT – British Internal Tapered Parallel Pipe Thread full form for pressure tight
joints Interrupted Threads
• Odd fluted tap with every other thread removed
Surface Treatments • Allows heavier chip to be cut, less drag and better coolant flow
• Requires less tapping torque
Oxide (Blue/Black)
• Prevents galling & welding Extension Taps
• Recommended for Ferrous Materials (Iron Based) • Allow greater reach in tapping parts
Chrome
• Increases tap life PTF-SAE Short
• Prevents galling • Dryseal form with short projection to be used where hole depth has restrictions
• Recommended for use in all non-chromium materials
Nitride
Guidelines for Using Pipe Taps
• A penetrating treatment giving a very hard thin shell or “case” on the tap’s
thread section which raises surface hardness appreciably • Proper hole size and depth, be it straight drilled or taper reamed
• Recommended where abrasive or premature wearing conditions exist • Rigid fixturing of part
TiN (Titanium Nitride) • Rigid machine spindle with enough torque to drive the tap
• Increases tool life • A generous and constant flow of cutting fluid
• Improves thread finish • Proper gages to check threads
• Allows for higher tapping speeds
• Recommended for use in free machining steels and irons, high tensile steels, NPT & NPS Pipe Tap Thread Lengths
tough machining steels and plastics
TiCN (Titanium Carbonitride)
Thread Size Thread Length (In.) Thread Size Thread Length (In.)
• Harder and more wear resistant than TiN under conditions of moderate
1⁄16-27 11⁄16 3⁄4-14 13⁄8
cutting temperatures 1⁄8-27S 3⁄4 1-11-1⁄2 13⁄4
• Provides the ability to run the job at higher speeds 1⁄8-27 3⁄4 11⁄4-111⁄2 13⁄4
• Recommended for use in tough machining steels, ductile cast iron, cast 1⁄4-18 11⁄16 11⁄2-111⁄2 13⁄4
aluminum, stainless steels, high temperature alloys, copper alloys and 3⁄18-18 11⁄16 2-11-1⁄2 13⁄4
1⁄2-14 13⁄8
titanium
Blue Diamond®
• A special electro chemical surface treatment designed to eliminate surface Tap Drill Size
welding and promote chip flow when tapping soft stringy materials and
stainless steel Thread Size NPT Drill Size NPS Drill Size Thread Size NPT Drill Size NPS Drill Size
elektraLUBE® 1⁄16-27 D 1⁄4 3⁄4-14 59⁄64 15⁄16
1⁄8-27 R S 1-11-1⁄2 15⁄32 13⁄16
• An industry exclusive introduced by OSG 1⁄4-18 7⁄16 29⁄64
• Reduces torque to prevent welding, loading and galling between the tap and 11⁄4-111⁄2 11⁄2 133⁄64
3⁄8-18 37⁄64 19⁄32 11⁄2-111⁄2 147⁄64 13⁄4
the workpiece 1⁄2-14 23⁄32 47⁄64 2-11-1⁄2 27⁄32 27⁄32
• Recommended for use in stainless steels, steel forgings, tool & die steels,
hot & cold rolled steels, high nickel alloys, beryllium, copper and some Verify findings with a "Machinery Handbook", MSC Order No. 64367915.
aluminum alloys
Materials
High Speed Steel (HSS) HSS Vanadium (HSSE)
• Combines good tool life and productivity with minimal cost • 3% Vanadium
• Works well in free cutting and carbon steels as well as soft, non-ferrous • Abrasive wear resistance for increased toughness & tool life
matertials like aluminum, brass, bronze and copper • In addition to general applications, provides long life when tapping materials
Cobalt like stainless steels & high silicon aluminums
• Provides better wear resistance, higher hardness and toughness than HSS Carbide Tipped
• Very little chipping or micro-chipping under severe cutting conditions, • Offers many of the advantages of solid carbide tooling at a reduced cost,
allowing the tool to run 10% faster than HSS especially on larger diameter tools
358
Page 15
EXTERNAL THREADING TECHNICAL INFORMATION
External threading is accomplished by using a variety of cutting tools design for cutting threads on the outside diameter of a workpiece.
Dies
Die Types:
Two Piece Die Blank Systems ( Little Giant® )
Round Adjustable Dies • Collet system designed for greater die adjustability for new threading or
• Originates a new thread thread repair
• Ideal for maintenance jobs • Consists of a cap and a guide(dies not included)
• Will cut external thread when held in a die stock
• Chamfered on both faces – one side has a 2-3 thread chamfer for threading, the Accessories:
other side has 1 – 1-1/2 thread chamfer for threading close to the shoulder • Die Stock - Holds round adjustable dies but specifically designed
• Standard in right hand Unified and American National Thread Form for holding open type adjustment dies
• Die Adapter - Converts a round die into a hex die. Good for jobs
Hex Rethreading Dies where die stocks can not be used due to lack of space
• Ideal for maintenance jobs • Die Holders - These tools have a straight shank and are used to
• Designed to repair a bruised or rusty thread hold round split adjustable dies
• Can be used in free machining materials
Die Materials
• Most cost effective rethreading tool available
• Can be used with a wrench instead of a die holder or die stock HSS – Used for cutting new threads in mild steels and non-ferrous materials
Carbon Steel – Used for rethreading and cleaning of threads
371
THREAD MILLING TECHNICAL INFORMATION
THREAD MILLING TECHNICAL INFORMATION
®
O.K. Jr. Tap & Round Adjustable Die Sets
Size Range No. of Pcs.1 1 Ea. Tap & Adj. Die Sizes Accessories Mfr’s # Order # Price/Set HSS Taps & Carbon Dies
0-80 to 10-24 18 0-80, 1-72, 2-56, 3-48, 4-40, Straight Tap Wrench & Die Stock B8 88435722 $286.56
NC, NF 6-32, 8-32, 10-24 Features:
4 -40 to 1⁄4 16 4-40, 6-32, 8-32, 10-24, 10-32, Straight Tap Wrench & Die Stock B7 88435714 285.20 • Contain the most popular sizes in the
NC, NF 12-24, 1⁄4-20 automotive and maintenance fields
4-40 to 12-28 22 4-40, 4-48, 6-32, 6-40, 8-32, 8-36, Straight Tap Wrench & Die Stock B10 88435730 268.34 • Round Dies are chamfered on both faces. One
NC, NF 10-24, 10-32, 12-24, 12-28 side of the die has a 2 to 3 thread chamfer for
threading, the other side has a 1 to 11⁄2 thread
1⁄4
to 1⁄2 12 1⁄4-20, 5⁄16-18, 3⁄8-16, 7⁄16-14, 1⁄2-13 Straight Tap Wrench & Die Stock C5 88435748 252.73 chamfer for threading close to a shoulder
NC • Steel case
1⁄4
to 1⁄2 24 1⁄4-20, 1⁄4-28, 5⁄16-18, 5⁄16-24, 3⁄8-16, 3⁄8-24, Straight Tap Wrench & Die Stock 3100 88435763 407.22
NC, NF, NPT 7⁄16-14, 7⁄16-20, 1⁄2-13, 1⁄2-20, 1⁄8-27 NPT
1⁄4
to 1 23 1⁄4-20, 5⁄16-18, 3⁄8-16, 7⁄16-14, 1⁄2-13, 5⁄8-11, 2 Tap Wrenches & 3 Die Stocks 407 88435755 911.41
NC 3⁄4-10, 7⁄8-9, 1-8
1⁄4
to 1 47 1⁄4-20, 1⁄4-28, 5⁄16-18, 5⁄16-24, 3⁄8-16, 3⁄8-24, 2 Tap Wrenches & 3 Die Stocks 4312 88435771 1469.65
NC, NF, NS, NPT 7⁄16-14, 7⁄16-20, 1⁄2-13, 1⁄2-20, 9⁄16-12, 9⁄16-18,
5⁄8-11, 5⁄16-18, 3⁄4-10, 3⁄4-16, 7⁄8-9, 7⁄8-14, 1-8,
Die Sizes
1⁄4-20, 1⁄4-28, 5⁄16-18, 5⁄16-24, 3⁄8-16, 3⁄8-24,
7⁄16-14, 7⁄16-20, 1⁄2-13, 1⁄2-20, 9⁄16-18, 5⁄8-18,
3⁄4-16, 7⁄8-14, 1-14 NS
1
All sets include screwdriver not reflected in No. of pieces.
391
Page 17
THREAD REPAIR TECHNICAL INFORMATION
Locking
Keys
External Internal
Thread Thread
Thread Repair Inserts are used to quickly and permanently restore tapped holes, which have been stripped or damaged due to wear, corrosion or over torque.
4 Easy Steps for Coil Type Inserts Tools
Hand Installation
Drill – Drill hole
• Used to install inserts in tapped holes
Tap – Tap the hole to a sufficient depth to accommodate the insert length and
• Thread size of the insert to be installed will determine the choice of tool:
bolt being used
To install coarse threads use a Mandrel
Install – Install the appropriate length insert. Use the installation tool and wind
To install fine threads use a Prewinder
the insert into the hole until the top coil is ¼ - ½” below the surface Hand Extraction
Tang Removal – Remove the tang by using a break-off rod or a punch that fits • Used to remove inserts from a tapped hole
inside the insert • Place tool inside hole with insert to be removed. Strike head of the tool
Coil Type Inserts with a light blow and turn counter clockwise, maintaining steady
downward pressure
Free Running Tang Break-Off
• Can be used to repair tapped holes, which have been stripped or • Removes tang after installation to prevent interference with the end of an
damaged due to wear, corrosion or over-torque assembled bolt
• Coil tension holds insert in place without placing tension on • Available for use with sizes up to ½” and M12 nominal diameter
surrounding material Power
• Vibration & impact resistant • Used for high volume production
• Can be hand held or mounted on a work station
Screw Locking
• Consists of an air motor, adapter and front end assembly
• Features a locking mechanism that grips the bolt and prevents it from
• Front end assembly consists of: Prewinder
loosening under vibration or impact
• Eliminates the need for thread locking mechanisms Mandrel
• Allows repeated assembly and disassembly without appreciable loss of self- Spacers
locking torque Screw Thread Insert (STI) Taps
Tanged • For use in tapping holes according to screw thread standards
• Tangs must be removed to eliminate interference with the end of the Materials
assembled bolt
• Operation is automatic and can be operated with one hand Carbon Steel
• Tang break off tool is required • Standard, general purpose material
Tangless Stainless Steel
• Eliminates the need for a tang break-off tool • Corrosion resistant
• Installs quickly and easily from either end • Ideal for original equipment applications, repair and overhaul
Titanium
Strip Feed Reels • Superior strength to weight ratio
• Bulk inserts mounted on plastic strips available in reels of 500 or 1000 • Corrosion resistant
• Increases installation rates by minimizing handling • Excellent low pressure stability
• Used with power installation tooling to support high volume production
requirements Nitronic 60™
• Compatible with stainless steel screws
Surface Treatments for Coil Type Inserts • Ideal for vacuum environments
• Particle-free, non-magnetic with excellent gall resistance
®
Primer Free II
• Contains no chromates; RoHS compliant Non-Coil Type Inserts
• Eliminates need for zinc primer Solid
• Prevents galvanic corrosion between insert and parent material • Designed to fill holes that are too large or relocated holes that have been
• Eliminates locking torque issues associated with primers drilled or tapped in the wrong location
• Improves installation productivity Self-Locking
• Provides additional lubrication facilitating insert installation • Repairs stripped or worn threads in jigs, fixtures, bolster plates, dies and
Gall Resistant machine tools
• Material: Nitronic 60™ • Features a locking element to hold insert securley in place and will not loosen
• Requires no additional coatings or plating under vibration
• Non-magnetic & particle free Keylocking
• Ideal for use in vacuum environments • Features 2 or 4 locking keys that provide superior holding power in a variety
Dry Film Lubricant of materials
• Provides additional lubrication in high friction applications • Inserts with internal threads of size M7 or larger are furnished with 4 locking
• Temperature resistant up to 400° F keys, sizes smaller than M7 are supplied with 2 locking keys
• Contains corrosion resistant properties
Solid Thread Insert Styles
Thread Repair Kits • Thin Wall – Designed for applications where wall thickness or weight
is not an issue
• A convenient way to quickly repair tapped holes which have been stripped • Heavy-Duty – Most commonly used insert, available with coarse and
or damaged fine threads
• Most kits (unless otherwise noted) contain: Drills, taps, installation tools, • Extra Heavy-Duty – Designed with increased wall thickness and greater
tang break-off tools and a quantity of inserts external thread area for superior pull-out strength and holding power.
• Available in Inch, Metric, Spark Plug or Pipe Thread series In high sheer strength materials: provides comparable holding power
to heavy inserts. In low sheer strength materials: provides maximum
holding power and pull-out strength
400
Page 18
END MILLS TECHNICAL INFORMATION
Flute Types
Two Flute: The two-flute end mill has the greatest amount of flute space allowing for more chip
carrying capacity. Used primarily in slotting and pocketing of non-ferrous materials where chip
removal is a concern.
Three Flute: While this tool has the same flute space as two flutes, it has a larger cross sectional
area providing for greater strength and the ability to pocket and slot both ferrous and non-
ferrous materials.
Four/Multiple Flute: Ideal for peripheral and finish milling. The additional flutes allow faster feed
rates, but due to the reduced flute space, chip removal may be a problem. Produces a much
finer finish than two and three flute tools.
Milling Formulas
RPM = SFM x 3.82 ÷ Tool Diameter Revolutions per Minute (RPM): How many revolutions the cutter has in one minute
IPM = RPM x # of Flutes x Chip Load Inches per Minute (IPM): Number of inches the cutter passes through the workpiece in one minute
Chip Load = IPM ÷ RPM x # of Flutes Chip Load: The amount that each flute cuts during a single revolution of a cutting tool
SFM = .262 x Tool Diameter x RPM Surface Feet per Minute (SFM): This is the cutting speed of the end mill in the United States. It is the
number of feet per minute that a given point on the circumference of a cutter travels per minute
428 CALL MSC TODAY 800-521-9520 FOR ALL YOUR INDUSTRIAL NEEDS
Page 19
END MILL SETS, ARBORS & ROUTING END MILLS
Corner Rounding HSS End Mill Set End Mill Dispensers
• Ideal for Bridgeport type machines Model #13350: Fractional
• 8 Pieces, 1 each size: 1⁄16, 3⁄32, 1⁄8, 5⁄32, 3⁄16, 1⁄4, 5⁄16 & 3⁄8w • Color: Gray
• Sizes 1⁄16 thru 3⁄32w have 3⁄8w shank • 30 Prelabeled compartments
• Sizes 1⁄8 thru 3⁄8w have 1⁄2w shank • Holds 1⁄8, 3⁄16, 1⁄4, 5⁄16, 3⁄8, 7⁄16, 1⁄2, 9⁄16, 5⁄8, 3⁄4, 7⁄8 & 1w
• Complete with wood stand • Dimensions: 145⁄8wL x 73⁄8wW x 73⁄4wH
Order # Price Ea. Model Nos. 13300 & 13325: Fractional
All steel cabinet with plastic dividers to help protect and
85610392 $485.46 separate end mill sizes. Top drawer holds single end Model #13350
fractional end mills in the following sizes: 6 each 1⁄8, 3⁄16, 1⁄4,
5⁄16, 3⁄8, 7⁄16, & 1⁄2w; 3 each 5⁄8, 3⁄4, 7⁄8, & 1w with 6 extra
506
BROACHES
Basics of...Broaches
A broach is a bar-shaped cutting tool that contains a series of teeth, which get Internal: Shapes a round-drilled hole into any configuration. This broaching can
progressively larger and/or differ in shape from the starting end. Each tooth be done with either a push or a pull broach. Most broaches are push broaches.
removes a small amount of material as the tool moves through the work piece in Pull broaches (AF Stock) offer longer lengths of cut when broaching square and
a one-pass operation. hexagon shapes. Examples include: tooling fixtures, gear and pulley keyways,
keyways, rifling and all hole configurations.
Please note: Broach types correspond to specific bushings i.e. a B-1 broach will External (Surface): Used in place of milling or shaping operations because it can
need a B-1 Collared Type bushing. produce exact dimensions at a much faster rate. Examples include: flats,
notches, keyways, contoured surfaces, external gear teeth and serrations.
Types of Broaches Accessories
Keyway: Slides through a bushing to produce a keyway. Shims are often Bushings: A metal slotted liner that supports and guides the broach. Available in
required to accomplish desired depth of cut. Plain or Collared types. Collared bushings are for ease of use in smaller holes.
Square: Have an oversized pilot leaving drill marks in the flats (to provide Shims: A thin piece of metal used to achieve a given depth of keyway in a bore.
relief) while establishing four corners. Longer lengths of cut are possible
with standard square broaches. Factors Affecting Broaching
Full Square: Leaves no radius in the flats of the broached piece. The pilot
diameter will equal the finished square size. Material to be Broached: Materials with hardness up to HRC 38 are best suited
Hexagon: Produces hexagonal holes. for broaching. Harder materials are not recommended.
Production Keyway Construction: Offers maximum speed and accuracy in Tool Alignment: Proper tool alignment is necessary to avoid tool breakage or
production runs of identical bores. Production keyway broaches require no drifting. To avoid producing a part outside of the required tolerance make sure at
shims or bushings and can cut standard depth of 1/8w to 1/4w keyways in least 2 teeth are engaged at all times and use bushings to provide support for
one pass. the broach.
One-Pass Keyway: Designed for smaller production runs (several hundred) of Lubrication: Proper lubrication reduces friction and helps with chip removal.
identical keyways. Chip Removal: Clear chips with a stiff brush from the cutting section of broach
AF Stock: Is a pull broach featuring superior tooth design for precision following each pass.
keyway tolerances.
529
END MILLS TECHNICAL INFORMATION
Flute Types
Two Flute: The two-flute end mill has the greatest amount of flute space allowing for more chip
carrying capacity. Used primarily in slotting and pocketing of non-ferrous materials where chip
removal is a concern.
Three Flute: While this tool has the same flute space as two flutes, it has a larger cross sectional
area providing for greater strength and the ability to pocket and slot both ferrous and non-
ferrous materials.
Four/Multiple Flute: Ideal for peripheral and finish milling. The additional flutes allow faster feed
rates, but due to the reduced flute space, chip removal may be a problem. Produces a much
finer finish than two and three flute tools.
Milling Formulas
RPM = SFM x 3.82 ÷ Tool Diameter Revolutions per Minute (RPM): How many revolutions the cutter has in one minute
IPM = RPM x # of Flutes x Chip Load Inches per Minute (IPM): Number of inches the cutter passes through the workpiece in one minute
Chip Load = IPM ÷ RPM x # of Flutes Chip Load: The amount that each flute cuts during a single revolution of a cutting tool
SFM = .262 x Tool Diameter x RPM Surface Feet per Minute (SFM): This is the cutting speed of the end mill in the United States. It is the
number of feet per minute that a given point on the circumference of a cutter travels per minute
544 CALL MSC TODAY 800-521-9520 FOR ALL YOUR INDUSTRIAL NEEDS
Page 22
ROUGHING END MILLS, SETS & ROUTING END MILLS
4 Flute Centercutting Chipbreaker End Mills
Solid Micrograin Carbide & AITiN Coated Surface Treatment: AlTiN (Aluminum Titanium Nitride)
• Recommended for difficult to machine materials
30° Helix • Used for aggressive machining of aircraft/aerospace materials, stainless
• Chipbreaker geometry permits extremely high feed steels, high alloy carbon steels, nickel-based high-temperature alloys
rates in roughing operation and titanium alloys. Also used in dry machining of cast irons, nodular iron and selected carbon steel
• Chipbreakers are designed to minimize cutting forces, • Extremely hard, wear resistant
reduce or eliminate chatter and prolong tool life • Provides increase of 75 to 100% in machining speeds vs. uncoated tools
Mill Shk. Accupro M.A. Ford - List 114 Accupro Mill Shk. Accupro M.A. Ford - List 114 Accupro
Dia. Dia. OAL LOC Solid Carbide LOC Solid Carbide LOC AlTiN Coated Dia. Dia. OAL LOC Solid Carbide LOC Solid Carbide LOC AlTiN Coated
(In.) (In.) (In.) (In.) Order # Price Ea. (In.) Order # Price Ea. (In.) Order # Price Ea. (In.) (In.) (In.) (In.) Order # Price Ea. (In.) Order # Price Ea. (In.) Order # Price Ea.
1⁄8 1⁄8 11⁄2 1⁄4 67940163 $18.33 3⁄8 01946086 $21.07 1⁄4 00037804 $21.57 3⁄8 3⁄8 31⁄2 11⁄2 01952241 $81.90
1⁄8 1⁄8 11⁄2 1⁄2 67940155 19.25 1⁄2 73901944 14.16 3⁄8 3⁄8 4 13⁄4 67940312 $95.49 13⁄4 00037895 $112.34
1⁄8 1⁄8 21⁄4 3⁄4 67940171 18.63 7⁄16 7⁄16 23⁄4 1 67940320 79.02 1 73902025 48.19
1⁄8 1⁄8 21⁄2 1 01952084 29.23 3⁄4 00037812 33.81 7⁄16 7⁄16 4 2 67940338 87.81 13⁄4 01952282 106.11 2 00037903 103.30
3⁄16 3⁄16 2 3⁄8 67940197 24.06 3⁄8 73901951 13.34 1⁄2 1⁄2 21⁄2 5⁄8 67940353 66.33 5⁄8 73902033 49.63
3⁄16 3⁄16 2 5⁄8 67940189 25.33 9⁄16 01946128 29.48 5⁄8 00037820 29.80 1⁄2 1⁄2 3 1 67940346 73.67 1 01946326 96.95 1 00037911 86.67
3⁄16 3⁄16 21⁄2 3⁄4 67940205 27.86 3⁄4 73901969 21.62 1⁄2 1⁄2 4 2 67940361 135.27 2 01952324 134.19 2 00037929 159.14
3⁄16 3⁄16 3 11⁄8 67940213 25.33 11⁄8 01952126 40.76 11⁄8 00037838 29.80 5⁄8 5⁄8 3 7⁄8 67940387 148.79 7⁄8 73902058 95.51
1⁄4 1⁄4 2 3⁄8 67940239 26.76 3⁄8 73901977 17.08 5⁄8 5⁄8 31⁄2 11⁄4 67940379 163.68 11⁄4 73902041 100.16
1⁄4 1⁄4 21⁄2 3⁄4 67940221 29.73 3⁄4 01946169 36.01 3⁄4 00037846 34.98 5⁄8 5⁄8 45⁄8 21⁄2 01952407 263.38
1⁄4 1⁄4 3 11⁄8 67940247 42.93 11⁄4 01952167 49.79 11⁄8 00037853 50.50 3⁄4 3⁄4 4 11⁄2 67940395 180.05 11⁄2 73902066 138.42
5⁄16 5⁄16 2 1⁄2 67940262 35.05 1⁄2 73901985 23.04 3⁄4 3⁄4 5 21⁄4 67940403 198.02 21⁄4 73902074 190.56
5⁄16 5⁄16 21⁄2 3⁄4 67940254 38.94 13⁄16 01946201 49.29 3⁄4 00037861 45.81 3⁄4 3⁄4 6 3 67940411 217.85 3 73902082 290.80
5⁄16 5⁄16 3 11⁄8 67940270 53.19 11⁄8 00037879 62.58 3⁄4 3⁄4 51⁄4 3 01952480 387.54
5⁄16 5⁄16 31⁄4 13⁄8 01952209 68.23 1 1 4 13⁄4 67940429 239.63 13⁄4 73902090 251.42
3⁄8 3⁄8 2 5⁄8 67940296 39.70 5⁄8 73901993 27.79 1 1 5 21⁄4 67940437 263.60 21⁄4 73902108 357.20
3⁄8 3⁄8 21⁄2 7⁄8 67940288 44.11 7⁄8 01946243 59.20 7⁄8 00037887 51.89 1 1 6 3 01952647 591.96
3⁄8 3⁄8 3 11⁄8 67940304 48.52 11⁄8 73902017 43.67
• Soft plastics are routed by removing long curls from the surface of the material being machined, so they tend to respond best to “O” flutes
• Hard plastics require a routing tool to chip the material off in small individual chunks, so bits with a straight rake face geomtery usually do the job best
• Reinforced plastics such as polyester and epoxy can add extra rigidity to the material, making it extremely difficult to machine. This requires a router with either a
high rake angle and high clearance (to cut freely with less heat build-up) or a strong cutting edge with a low rake angle to reduce chipping (though it will increase
heat build-up). PCD tools are commonly used in reinforced plastics due to their high wear resistance.
• Mechanical plastics are specifically created so they meet an applications needs. This can be strength, resistance to chemicals, high heat applications etc. These
materals machine similar to a soft plastic and respond best to "O" flute tools. Page 652
Page 23
652
CHIPBREAKER & ANSI INSERT TECHNICAL INFORMATION
677
Page 24
INDEXABLE TOOLHOLDER TECHNICAL INFORMATION
* Valenite Standard
809
THREADING TECHNICAL INFORMATION
Page
850
Page 26
850
BORING BAR TECH INFO & INDEXABLE BORING BARS
3⁄8 .031
1⁄2
5⁄8 .046
3⁄4
Page 905
Page 27
Bar Shk. OAL Min. Bore Edge to Coolant Hole Insert Order # Spare Parts
Style Dia. (In.) (In.) Dia. (In.) Tip (In.) Thread Size Style Right Hand Left Hand Price Ea. Shim Lock Pin Clamp Clamp Screw • Boring bar internal boring and facing
A16MCLNR/L4 1 12 1.200 0.640 1⁄4-18 NPT CNMG 432 05695408 05695432 $221.73 — 03041068 03041498 03042090 • 5° Negative rake
A20UMCLNR/L4 11⁄4 14 1.470 0.765 1⁄4-18 NPT CNMG 432 05695416 05695440 247.20 08651275 03040987 03041498 03042116 • Use 80° diamond inserts
A24UMCLNR/L4 11⁄2 14 1.760 0.890 1⁄4-18 NPT CNMG 432 05695424 05695457 275.80 08651275 03040987 03041498 03042116 • Through-the-bar coolant
A28UMCLNR/L4 13⁄4 14 2.010 1.015 1⁄4-18 NPT CNMG 432 05695242 05695267 301.59 08651275 03040987 03041498 03042116 • 5° Reverse lead angle
A32MCLNR/L4 2 16 2.400 1.281 1⁄4-18 NPT CNMG 432 05695259 05695275 327.37 08651275 03040987 03041498 03042116
905
GRINDING WHEELS-TECHNICAL INFORMATION
Page 926
Page 28
926
CUT-OFF & DEPRESSED CENTER WHEELS-TECHNICAL INFORMATION
Cut-Off Wheels
Cut-off wheels are also known as Type 1 or straight wheels and are used strictly for cutting through most hard materials such as Iron, Aluminum and Stainless Steel.
Wheels can be either reinforced or non-reinforced. Reinforced wheels contain additional body strengthening fiberglass and are used with stationary or portable tools.
Non-reinforced wheels are used with stationary tools only.
Cut-Off Saws: Wheels measuring between 12” and 16” that are specially marked for high speeds can be used with High-Speed Saws,
powered either electrically or with gas. These wheels are made with either aluminum oxide for use on metal materials or with silicon
carbide for masonry work. Wheels used on these machines should ALWAYS be reinforced.
Type 27 wheels are made with flat grinding rims or faces and are designed for side grinding.
Type 28 wheels have saucer shaped rims and are designed for corner and side grinding.
Type 29 wheels have reversed saucer shaped grinding rims and are designed for blending (stock removal that leaves a smooth finish).
*Type 28 and 29 wheels should not be used for cutting-off or notching operations.
Depending upon the application for which the wheel was designed, either aluminum oxide or silicon carbide is used in the manufacturing process. Aluminum oxide
abrasive grain is used in wheels made for metalworking. For high performance metalworking applications, ceramic, aluminum oxide or zirconia alumina may also be
used. Silicon carbide is used in wheels made for masonry. In this category, the bond is usually resin, however, in some cases for non-reinforced wheels the bond is
rubber or shellac.
Machines that use Type 27, 28 and 29 Wheels
Right Angle Grinders: Several wheels can be used in conjunction with a right angle grinder. All depressed center wheels (Type 27, Type 28 and Type 29)
are designed for use with this type of machine.
Safety Tip: It is recommended that all users be equipped with the proper safety attire, including cut-resistant safety gloves, eye & face protection,
hearing and respiratory protection.
946
Page 29
COATED QUICK-CHANGE SANDING DISCS-TECHNICAL INFORMATION
985
TECHNICAL INFORMATION & DEBURRING WHEELS
1011
HAND FILES-TECHNICAL INFORMATION
Parts of a File
File Terminology:
Back: The convex side of a half-round or other similarly shaped file.
Edge and Safe Edge: The side surfaces of a file; may be smooth (safe edge) or have teeth.
Handle: A holder into which the tang of the file fits. If the file has an integral holder this is known as a solid handle file.
Pinning: Filings wedged between the file teeth.
Shelling: The breaking of file teeth, usually caused by using too much pressure, reverse filing, filing sharp corners or filing edges.
How a File Works: Tooth Type and Coarseness
Two different attributes determine how aggressively a file will remove material and how smooth a finish will result: the kind of teeth that have been cut into the file and
the coarseness of those teeth. The work to be accomplished – roughing or finishing – will determine the kind of teeth and grade of coarseness best for each
application.
Kinds of Teeth
Single-cut Teeth Double-cut Teeth Rasp-cut Teeth Curved-cut Teeth
Single-Cut Teeth: Has a single set of parallel, diagonal rows of teeth. Single-cut files are often used with light pressure to produce a smooth surface finish or to put a
keen edge on knives, shears or saws.
Double-Cut Teeth: Has two sets of teeth positioned diagonally on the file face at opposite angles to each other. The double-cut file is used with heavier pressure than
the single-cut for faster material removal.
Rasp-Cut Tooth: Commonly known as a rasp, has a series of individual teeth formed by a single-pointed tool. A rasp produces a rough cut and is used primarily on soft
materials such as wood, hooves, aluminum and lead.
Curved-Cut/Milled Tooth: Has its teeth arranged in curved contours across the file face. Curved-cut tooth files are often used in automotive body shops for smoothing
body panels.
Coarseness
Swiss Pattern Files are smaller in size and finer in coarseness than their American Pattern counterparts. Swiss Pattern Files are used for more precise and intricate work.
American Pattern
Bastard-cut Second-cut Smooth-cut
Most American pattern files are available in three grades of coarseness: bastard-cut, second-cut and smooth-cut. The degree of coarseness increases with longer file
length, but the differences between bastard, second and smooth-cut remain proportionate.
Swiss Pattern
00 0 1 2 3 4 6
Swiss pattern files are available in seven grades of coarseness: 00, 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, and 6. As with American pattern files, the degree of coarseness of Swiss pattern files
increases with length, but the difference between grades remains proportionate.
1033
Page 32
HAND FILES TECHNICAL INFORMATION (CONT.)
Type or shape describes the cross-section shape of the file, i.e., rectangular, square, round, half-round, triangular, etc. The area to be filed will determine the specific
type to be used. Type is further classified according to the contour of the file: blunt or taper.
A blunt file has a constant width with edges parallel from end to end. It is used when the item being filed is very uniform or consistent so only one size file is needed.
The cross-section of a taper file decreases from its heel to its point; it may taper in width, thickness or both. A taper file allows the user to vary the size of the file
contact area without actually changing files. It is useful when the workpiece is more complex, presenting different filing needs.
Standard Grip: For files needing two-handed operation, the handle should be grasped in one hand and the point of the file in the other hand. The file handle should be
rested in the palm with the thumb pointing along the top of the handle and the fingers gripping the underside. The point of the file should be grasped between the
thumb and the first two fingers with the thumb being on the top of the file.
Heavy Stroke Grip: When heavy filing strokes are required, the thumb on the point is normally in line with the file; the tip of the thumb pointed forward.
Light Stroke Grip: For lighter strokes, the thumb can be turned to as much as a right angle to the direction of the stroke.
If the file is being used one-handed for filing pins, dies or edged tools not being held in a vise, the forefinger, and not the thumb, is placed on top of the handle in line
with the file.
For normal flat filing, the file should be moved forward on an almost straight line of a single plane, changing its course only enough to prevent grooving.
On the reverse stroke, it is best to lift the file clear of the workpiece, except on very soft metals. Even then, the pressure should be very light – never more than the
weight of the file itself.
For normal filing, the vise should be about elbow height. When there is a great deal of heavy filing, it is better to have the work slightly lower. If the work is of a fine
and delicate nature, the work can be raised to eye level.
File Care
The teeth of the file should be protected when the file is not in use by hanging it on a rack or keeping it in a drawer with wooden divisions. Files should always be kept
clear of water or grease, since this impairs the filing action. It is advisable to wrap the file in a cloth for protection when it is carried in a toolbox.
The file teeth should be kept clean at all times by using a file card, or a wire file brush, to clear the grooves between the teeth.
Page
A file should never be used without a tight fitting handle. Serious accidents can result if the handle becomes detached exposing the sharp point of the tang. 1034
Page 33
Flat Files
American Pattern
• Flat files, which are of rectangular cross section and have double cut teeth, are commonly Save 10% on
used by machinists, machinery builders, ship and engine builders Pkg. Qty.
• Used wherever metal must be removed rapidly and finish is of secondary importance Must be same size
• Slightly tapered toward the points in both width and thickness; cut on both sides
Nicholson Import - Production Grade
Approx. Size Box Bastard Second Cut Smooth L Box Bastard Second Cut Smooth
L (In.) W (In.) Thick. (In.) Qty. Order # Price Ea. Order # Price Ea. Order # Price Ea. (In.) Qty. Order # Price Ea. Order # Price Ea. Order # Price Ea.
4 15⁄32 31⁄32 12 80757016 $8.34 80757032 $10.36 4 12 70574017 $5.42 70574025 $6.08 70574033 $6.26
6 39⁄64 1⁄8 12 80757115 8.77 80757156 $9.16 80757131 10.99 6 12 70574215 5.43 70574223 6.05 70574231 6.78
8 25⁄32 13⁄64 12 80757214 10.85 80757222 11.94 80757230 12.79 8 12 70574413 7.05 70574421 7.84 70574439 8.40
10 31⁄32 1⁄4 6 80757313 13.44 80757321 15.52 80757339 16.96 10 12 70574512 8.83 70574520 10.19 70574538 11.19
12 15⁄32 9⁄32 6 80757412 18.41 80757420 20.83 80757438 23.05 12 6 70574611 12.03 70574629 13.77 70574637 15.21
1
14 111⁄32 7⁄32 6 80757511 25.31 80757529 29.10 80757537 31.95 14 6 70574710 16.61 00574723 12.05 70574736 21.14
16 117⁄32 11⁄32 6 80757610 33.50 1
Shop Grade
1034
CARBIDE BURS & TECHNICAL INFORMATION
TiN Coated Carbide Burs
1⁄4w Shank, 23⁄4w Overall
A B C D E
Cut Dia. (In.) Cut L (In.) Order # Price Ea. Cut Dia. (In.) Cut L (In.) Order # Price Ea. Cut Dia. (In.) Cut L (In.) Order # Price Ea.
A. Round Tree C. Pointed Tree E. Cylindrical
3⁄8 3⁄4 00451104 $36.79 3⁄8 3⁄4 00451146 $36.79 3⁄8 3⁄4 00451187 $38.44
1⁄2 1 00451005 44.36 1⁄2 1 00451047 42.26 1⁄2 1 00451088 44.36
B. 14° Included Angle D. Egg Sets of Above
3⁄8 11⁄16 00451120 36.13 3⁄8 5⁄8 00451161 36.79 5 Pc.-3⁄8 Cut Dia. 00451195 153.51
1⁄2 11⁄2 00451021 44.36 1⁄2 7⁄8 00451062 43.55 5 Pc.-1⁄2 Cut Dia. 00451096 189.73
Slot/Keyway Outer Edge Flat Surface Sheets Straight Hole Edge Cross-Hole Hole Inner Inner Straight Hole
Edge Both Edges Surface Corners Back-Edge
Safety Tip: It is recommended that all users be equipped with the proper safety attire, including cut-resistant safety gloves and eye protection.
1053
Page 34
DEBURRING TOOLS, SCRAPERS & TECHNICAL INFORMATION
Fine Deburring Tools & Set Adjustable Scraper & Deburring Tool
• Ideal for deburring delicate parts MADE IN SWITZERLAND
• Six double end tools with revolving, hardened steel discs
• The 12 disc sizes range from .060w dia. to .208w dia.
• Knurled handle for comfortable grip
Size Wheel Dia. (In.) Order # Price Ea. Blade Specifications: Desc. Order # Price Ea.
• Accurately ground high speed steel
#1 0.060, 0.070 00572792 $18.35 • Has a triangular cross section and Complete Tool
#2 0.082, 0.092 00572784 18.35 finished on both ends Handle & 1 Straight Blade 05750013 $26.71
#3 0.106, 0.116 00572776 18.35 • Reversible for double life Extra Blades - 3w long
#4 0.134, 0.150 00572768 18.35 • Blades are used in hard to reach places Straight 05750104 11.53
#5 0.160, 0.185 00572750 18.35 • Handle is 41⁄2w long with a bullet nose 45? 05750450 11.53
#6 0.198, 0.208 00572800 18.35 collet face which serves as a non- 90? 05750906 11.53
6 Piece Set 0.060, 0.070, 0.082, 0.092, 0.106, 05753504 87.19 marring edge guide
• Furnished in
0.116, 0.134, 0.150, 0.160, 0.185, plastic pouch
0.198, 0.208
Wire Wheel Brush Wire Cup Brush Wire End Brush Wire Internal Brush
Wheel Brushes: The outer circumference or “face” of this circular style Brush Configuration by Application Type
brush performs the work. Wheel brushes are ideal for removal of Wheel Cup End Internal
material, flash, rust, paint, cleaning weld bead, deburring, deflashing, Brightening ✓ ✓
edge blending, skiving and buffing. Fill materials include both crimped Buffing ✓
and straight wires of steel and stainless steel, brass and other non- Cleaning ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
ferrous metals; treated and untreated natural fibers; and synthetics Deburring ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
such as nylon, plastic, and nylon/abrasive filaments for dry and wet Deflashing ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
abrasive action. Brush diameters range from 5/8w to 22w. Descaling ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Dusting ✓
Cup Brushes: Are made in three types: knotted wire in steel and stainless Edge Blending ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
steel for heavy duty, crimped wire for lighter surface preparation and Finishing ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
deburring service and abrasive nylon filaments for finishing work. Cup Hose Skiving ✓
brushes are easily mounted on CNC machines and portable tools, air-or Irregular Shapes ✓ ✓ ✓
Polishing ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
electric-powered. Standard brush diameters range from less than one inch
up to nine inches, with wire diameters from .006w to .035w. Roughening ✓
Spot Facing ✓
End Brushes: Are designed to have the ends of the fill strands do the Stripping ✓ ✓ ✓
Surface Prep ✓ ✓ ✓
bulk of the work, although the sides can also be used to finish vertical
surfaces that parallel the shaft. They are especially suitable for CNC Texturing ✓
Weld Prep ✓ ✓ ✓
machines, portable air and electric tools in tight spaces. End brushes
are made in knot, crimped, and straight wire of carbon steel, stainless Brush Type by Material Process
steel, brass, Nylon/Abrasive filaments and other non-metallics. End Workpiece Material
brush diameters range from 3/16w to 3w.
Brush Material Aluminum Brass Copper Iron Plastic Steel Stainless Steel Wood
Internal Finishing Brushes: Also known as a “side action” or twisted wire Crimped Wire
brush, this style is primarily used in CNC machines, portable tools and drill Steel OK OK OK BC NR BC NR OK
presses for cross hole deburring and fast cleaning and finishing of such Stainless VG OK OK OK NR OK BC OK
Nonferrous OK BC BC OK VG OK OK OK
inaccessible surfaces as small diameter bores and internally threaded
surfaces. Internal finishing brushes are made in steel, stainless steel, brass, Knotted Wire
Steel NR OK OK BC NR BC NR OK
nylon and Nylon/Abrasive filaments. A number of special purpose power Stainless NR OK OK OK NR OK BC OK
and manual styles are included in the internal finishing category: tube, tube Nonferrous VG BC BC OK VG OK OK OK
& flue and power tube brushes. Sizes range from .030w up to 10w. Encapsulated Wire
Pliant Polymer NR NR NR BC NR BC BC NR
Brushing Speed and Pressure: In most operations, a lower speed than the Rigid Polymer NR NR NR BC NR BC BC NR
Maximum Safe Free Speeds (MSFS) will prove more efficient for you.
Natural Fibers
Lower speeds and lighter pressure gives longer brush life, generates less Tampico-Untreated VG VG VG OK VG BC BC OK
heat in the work, and requires less power. With wire brushes, the tips of the Treated VG VG VG VG OK BC BC NR
filaments do the actual work. With Nylon/Abrasive brushes, the tips and Sisal VG VG VG OK OK OK BC NR
sides of the filaments do the work. Where high brush pressures and speeds Synthetics
are required, it is recommended that a more aggressive brush be used. Nylon OK OK OK NR OK OK OK OK
This may be done by increasing wire size and/or abrasive grit size,
decreasing trim length, or in some instances, changing to another brush BC Best Choice for the combination
type. To protect against hazard, before starting the brush, during rotation, VG Very Good for the combination
and until rotation stops, operators and others in the area must wear IMPORTANT NOTE: Never exceed the
OK Suitable for the combination
SAFETY GOGGLES or FULL FACE SHIELDS WORN OVER SAFETY GLASSES recommended MAXIMUM SAFE FREE SPEED
WITH SIDE SHIELDS ANSI Z87.1 “Occupational Eye and Face Protection”. NR Not Recommended for the combination RPM (MSFS/MAX. SFS) rating of the brush.
1063
Page 35
DUST COLLECTORS, PARTS & TECHNICAL INFORMATION
Model DC 1500 Model MS-1500 Media Separator
Inverted Bag Dust Collector
For Use with DC-1500 Dust Collector
• 21⁄4w Hose ends • 11⁄4w Adapter • 90 CFM • 11⁄2 HP motor • 6v Hose
• Comes with standard paper cartridge filter • Shipping weight: 22 Lbs. (1 box) The separator is hooked up between the blast cabinet and the
dust collection system. The cyclonic action spins the heavy
Constructed of thick wall plastic. particles (good media) down into the hopper, and the dust
Model Order # Price Ea. and fine particles are siphoned out into the dust collector.
DC 1500 09118878 $288.08 Dual Operational Options:
• Exhausts all materials from the cabinet from the bottom and feeds
Dust Collector Replacement Parts the gun system from the separator
Mfr’s # Desc. Order # Price Ea. • Exhausts the fine particles from the top and returns media to the
cabinet manually
DC15105 50 Micron Filter Bag 98754765 $35.41 • Dimensions: 61.5wH x 14wW x 14wD Ship Wt. (Lbs.) Order # Price Ea.
2055 50 Micron Cartridge Filter 75018325 24.85 • Hopper height: 28w
DC15400 Replacement Motor 65879009 79.46 • Inlet port: 2.5w 75 09258989 $329.21
Media Types
Glass Bead: is used in blast cabinets for honing, polishing, peening, finishing and removing light burrs. Produces a clean, bright, satin finish without dimensional
change of the part. Can also be used for peening without over stressing the metal.
Garnet: is a fine cutting abrasive used for quick removal of rust, corrosion and coatings from substrate. Also used for removing burrs and preparing metal for coating.
Crushed Glass: is an angular shaped blasting media for aggressive surface profiling, removal of paint, epoxy and other coatings. Crushed glass is free of heavy metals
such as lead, asbestos, titanium, etc.
Walnut Shell: is an angular shaped media for cleaning soft metals such as aluminum. This media will not affect the substrate.
Silicon Carbide: is the hardest blasting media available. The very fast cutting speed along with the material harshness will reduce blasting time. Contains no free silica
and does not create static. Can be recycled multiple times.
Aluminum Oxide: is a hard, fast cutting abrasive. Used in many applications such as, paint, rust, coating removal as well as deburring and preparing parts for plating
and welding.
Aluminum Oxide – Glass Bead Mix: 70 percent glass bead, 30 percent aluminum oxide for use when aluminum oxide results may be too harsh.
Media Efficiency Rating
Glass Crushed Walnut Silicon Aluminum Oxide
Bead Garnet Glass Shell Carbide Aluminum Oxide Glass Bead Mix
Cleaning Speed Med High High Med High Med/High High
Cleaning Metal Med Good Good Low Very Good Good Med
Blast Pressure 20-60 60-100 20-50 20-60 20-90 40-90 20-60
Metal Removal Very Low High Low/Med Low High Med/High Med
Hardness (MOH Scale) 5.5 7.5 5.5 1-4.5 9 9 5.5-9
Shape of Granule Spherical Granular Spherical Granules Angular Angular Spherical/Angular
Dust Level Low Med/High Low Low Med Med Med
Continued Use Ability Med/High Med Low Low Low/Med Med/High Med/High
1091
Page 36
TOGGLE CLAMP TECHNICAL INFORMATION
Hold-Down Clamps: Two Types: Vertical and horizontal Handle. Options Plier (Squeeze Action) Clamps: Available with 1 or 2 adjustable spindles.
include flanged, straight and weldable bases; Straight and T-handles; Trigger release allows for easy one-hand operation on most models.
solid bars and open or U-bars; carbon and stainless steel. Pneumatic Options include carbon and stainless steel, different jaw depths and
versions available for applications requiring automation. openings, depending on the requirements of the application.
1169
Page 37
SPRING-LOADED DEVICES TECHNICAL INFORMATION
1232
EYEBOLTS & HOIST RINGS TECHNICAL INFORMATION
Quick Release Pin Accessories
Flanged Pin Receptacles Flanged Pin Receptacles
Fits Depth Receptacle Flange Thick. Hole Width Mount Dia. Hex • Material: 303 Stainless Steel
Pin ± .010 Dia. ± .005 Thick Spacing ± .010 Hole ± .010 Size • Allow for proper mating holes with quick release
Dia. (In.) Style A (In.) B (In.) ± .005 C (In.) ± .010 D (In.) E (In.) Size F G (In.) (In.) Order # Price Ea. pins and can be mounted w/screws, rivets or bolts
1⁄4
• Great for blind hole applications
A 0.650 0.375 0.06 1.000 0.625 6-32 — 5⁄8 74759291 $21.79
5⁄16 A 0.783 0.469 0.06 1.000 0.625 6-32 — 3⁄4 74759093 23.16
3⁄8 A 0.913 0.562 0.06 1.000 0.625 6-32 — 15⁄16 74759192 23.46
1⁄2 A 1.195 0.750 0.10 1.125 0.875 10-32 — 11⁄8 74759218 29.36
1⁄4 B 0.650 0.375 0.06 1.000 0.625 6-32 — 5⁄8 74759234 21.79
5⁄16 B 0.783 0.469 0.06 1.000 0.625 6-32 — 3⁄4 74759259 23.16
3⁄8 B 0.913 0.562 0.06 1.000 0.625 6-32 — 15⁄16 74759275 23.46 A B C D
1⁄4 C 0.650 0.562 0.06 1.000 0.625 6-32 — 5⁄8 74759317 21.79
5⁄16 D 0.650 0.375 0.06 1.000 0.625 6-32 — 3⁄4 74759333 23.16
3⁄8 C 0.783 0.562 0.06 1.000 0.625 6-32 — 15⁄16 74759358 23.46
1⁄2 C 0.913 0.562 0.06 1.000 0.875 6-32 — 11⁄8 74759374 29.36
1⁄4 C 1.195 0.375 0.10 1.125 — 10-32 1.25 11⁄8 74759390 21.79
5⁄16 D 0.783 0.469 0.06 1.000 — 6-32 1.25 3⁄4 74759416 23.16
3⁄8 D 0.913 0.562 0.06 1.000 — 6-32 1.25 15⁄16 74759432 23.46
1⁄2 D 1.195 0.750 0.10 1.125 — 10-32 1.50 11⁄8 74759457 29.36
Receiver Caps
Fits Pin Dia. (In.) OAL A ± .010 (In.) OD B (In.) Order # Price Ea. Receiver Caps - Plain End
1⁄4
• Material: 303 Stainless Steel
0.58 0.375 59591321 $8.92 • Useful in applications where the receiving
5⁄16 0.65 0.469 59591339 9.34
3⁄8
hole is not within tolerance
0.73 0.562 59591347 10.61 • Caps fit over the end of the quick release pin
1⁄2 1.00 0.750 59591354 12.10 Receiver Caps
• Can replace cotter or hitch pins
1250
MAGNETS TECHNICAL INFORMATION
Basics of...Magnets
Selection Factors
When selecting a magnet for your application, consider the physical shape of the part (round, convex, concave, etc.) and the surface condition (rough, rusty, dirty,
oily). Both can result in *air gaps between the contact points on the magnet & the work material, thereby reducing the magnetic holding power. These factors and the
information in this section will aid in choosing the correct magnet for your application.
*Air gap: Space between the part and the magnet (paint, plating, galvinizing, protective film, etc...)
Applications:
• Holding metal sheets and parts in place • Die inserts • Shearing, punching and forming operations
• Safety shield/removable panel mounts • Paint and plating racks • Press and Burn Table feeding operations
• Overhead conveyor racks • Spot welding fixtures • Capturing or separating metal
• Separating stacks of sheet metal • Hand assembly fixtures • Cleaning or lifting metal from floors & more
Maximum Pull vs. Average Pull
Maximum pull and average pull are derived from the same magnet but differ in how you present the information. We have chosen to use average pull in our catalog.
The maximum pull value is obtained by pulling a new magnet in a perpendicular motion off of a newly machined, thick piece of steel (ideal conditions is a lab). The
pounds of pull it takes to break the magnet away from the steel surface is the “maximum” pull pounds. Average pull values are then derived by taking this maximum
pull pounds and cutting it in half (50%). The average pull pounds are stated for the benefit and safety of the user, due to the fact that ideal conditions rarely exist in the
field. Refer back the “magnet selection factors” for the part shape and surface conditions.
Materials
Flexible Magnetic Strips: made of a Ferro Magnetic powder with a polymer bonding. These low energy strips resist demagnetization and
will not chip, crack or shatter. Flexible magnets form to any contour, used in office, manufacturing and inventory labeling and
appliance, advertising applications. Flexible magnets can be cut drilled or shaped. Maximum temperature 160 F (70C).
Ceramic: made of Strontium Ferrite (SrFe) in a sintering process. Ceramic magnets are staples in the electronic, automotive, medical, mining, industrial, oil
industries, etc. Ceramic magnets are medium strength magnet material with a high resistance to demagnetization, long time stability (losses 0.5% of its
magnetic strength in 100 years), brittle material that has to be cut with diamond tipped blades. Maximum temperature 350 F (176 C).
Alnico: made of Aluminum, Nickel and Cobalt (AlNiCo) in either a casting or sintering process. Used in application environments that have high heat, Alnico
magnets offer medium strength and the best temperature characteristics of any standard magnet material. Alnico magnets have a medium resistance to
demagnetization and are very hard and brittle. Machining or drilling cannot be accomplished by ordinary means. Maximum temperature 800 F (427 C)
Rare Earth Neodymium-Iron-Boron (NdFeB) Magnets: made in a sintered as well as bonded forms. Commonly referred to as Neo, this magnet material provides
the highest magnetic strength of any magnet material, very high resistance to demagnetization and is ideal for applications requiring maximum strength in a
limited area. Because of its high iron content, Neo is usually coated or plated to prevent oxidization; avoid grinding. Maximum temperature 200 F (94 C).
Rare Earth Samarium Cobalt (SmCo): made the same as Neo. Samarium Cobalt has the highest magnetic strength combined with high temperature range
which makes it ideal for applications requiring very high strength in hot environments. Maximum temperature 392 F (200 C).
1260
COIL SPRINGS TECHNICAL INFORMATION
Extension
Basics of...Coil Springs Compression
Types
The most common type of spring is a Coil Spring or Helical Spring, used to store mechanical energy and subsequently release it. These Coil Springs can be close-
wound or open-wound and are made of hardened steel. The most common types are: Compression, Extension and Torsion.
COMPRESSION SPRINGS can be found in ballpoint pens and valve assemblies as well as thousands of other places. When you put a load on the spring, making
it shorter, it pushes back against the load and tries to get back to its original length. Compression Springs may be cylindrical, conical, tapered, concave or convex in
shape. The changing of spring ends, direction of the helix, material and finish allows a compression spring to meet a wide variety of special industrial needs; they are
the most common spring configuration and are usually placed over a rod or fitted inside a hole.
There are four basic types of compression spring ends, affecting the solid height, free length and other characteristics of the spring:
Open Ends, Not Ground: the ends of a compression spring are opened with a constant pitch for each coil
Open and Ground End: the ends of the spring are open and ground creating a flat surface
Square or Closed Ends (SQ): the ends of the spring are closed so that the end coils touch
Square (Closed) and Ground Ends (SG): the ends of the spring are closed so that the end coils touch & the end is ground to provide a flat plane
EXTENSION SPRINGS are found in garage door assemblies, vise-grip pliers, and carburetors as well as thousands of other places. When they are attached at both ends
and when the components they are attached to moves apart, the spring tries to bring them together again. Extension Springs are wound with initial tension known as
stored energy which holds the coils together and offers resistance to a pulling force. Extension Springs can have many different styles of ends, the most common
types of loops and hooks are “Machine” and “Crossover”. They can be closed (loops) or open (hooks).
Machine End: Wire comes directly off the body, then forming a circle across the center
Crossover End: Wire comes across the center of the spring
Double Loop: end consisting of two coils with no gap between the coils and the end of the wire
TORSION SPRINGS can be found on door hinges, door locks and clipboards as well as thousands of other places. When the ends of the torsion spring are attached to
the component, and when these components rotate around the center of the spring in the direction that winds the coil, the spring tries to push them back to their
original position. Torsion springs offer resistance to externally applied torque as the ends are rotated in angular deflection. Commonly used over an ardor or mandrel
for support. Torsion springs are subjected to bending stress rather than torsional. Normally close wound and are left hand or right hand wound.
Torsion springs are selected based on the Degree of Deflection required: usually 90, 180, 270 or 360° from the spring body.
Length of Leg: the length of the torsion spring leg is measured from the center of the body to the end of the leg or tip
Direction of Wind: torsion springs should be used in the direction that winds the coil
Coil Spring Materials, Finishes & Processes
HDMB Carbon Steel: Medium basic carbon cold drawn spring wire per ASTM 227, suitable for parts subjected to average stress and applications; also suited to static or
very low cycles
Music Wire: Spring wire, per ASTM-228, good for parts subjected to high stresses and requiring good thermal properties. For temperatures up to 250°F.
Type 302/304 Stainless Steel: Springs are manufactured to meet ASTM-A313, a high quality wire. For temperatures up to 550°F. Slightly magnetic. It is the most widely
used stainless spring wire because of high corrosion resistance properties and good tensile strength.
Black Oxide Coating (good) or Zinc Plating (better): improves the corrosion resistance of HDMB Carbon Steel and Music Wire
Passivation: an acid treatment performed on Stainless Steel Wire to remove contaminants and improve corrosion resistance
Nickel-coated Stainless Steel Springs: made from Suzuki™ Wire®, Nippon-Seisen wire and Sumiden® Type 302 nickel-coated stainless steel for superior corrosion
resistance particularly in marine environments. Nickel plating is used in electronics because it provides a good surface for soldering, prevents tarnishing, and conducts
electricity well.
Spring Terminology
Body Length: length from coil to coil, not including ends (hooks or loops)
Deflection at Load: the distance a spring compresses or extends when a given load is applied
Free Length (FL): the overall length of a spring in the unloaded position
Initial Tension (IT): the number of pounds of force it will take to overcome the tension holding the spring coils together before the spring will start to extend
Inside Dimension (ID): specified when the spring must fit over a rod or mandrel with enough clearance to operate freely
Load: the force applied to a spring that causes a deflection (i.e., movement)
Max Deflection: the difference between the overall length and maximum extension, measured on one side of spring
Maximum Extended Length: the length of an extension at full rated extension
Outside Dimension (OD): specified when the spring must fit into a circular hole (“Work in Hole Diameter) with enough clearance to operate freely or when there are
other housing issues)
Pitch: the distance from center to center of the wire in adjacent active coils
Solid Height: height of a compression spring under sufficient load to bring all coils into contact with adjacent coils
Spring Rate (stiffness): the change in load per unit deflection
Stress Relieve: a process that subjects the springs to low-temperature heat treatment to relieve residual stresses
Wire Size (WD): the diameter of the actual spring wire Page 1320
Page 41
1320
TORSION SPRINGS
Torsion Springs
Wire Leg No. Width @ Torque @ Carbon Steel Type 302 Stainless Steel Materials:
1 2
OD Dia. L of ID Torque 1⁄2 Leg L Pkg. Right Hand Left Hand Price/ Torque @ 1⁄2 Leg Right Hand Left Hand Price/ • Carbon Steel
(In.) (In.) (In.) Coils (In.) (In.) (In./Lbs.) Qty. Order # Order # Pkg. L (In./Lbs.) Order # Order # Pkg. • Type 302 Stainless Steel
90° Deflection Angle Product Features:
0.160 0.017 0.500 3.25 0.093 0.081 0.125 6 00042960 00043281 $5.67 • Right hand and left hand wound
0.235 0.025 0.750 3.25 0.140 0.096 0.402 6 00042978 00043299 5.67 • Offer resistance to externally applied torque as
0.281 0.030 1.000 3.25 0.172 0.116 0.670 6 00042986 00043307 5.67 the ends are rotated in angular deflection
0.288 0.032 1.000 3.25 0.172 0.152 0.879 6 00042994 00043315 5.67 Product Applications:
0.315 0.035 1.250 3.25 0.187 0.135 1.071 6 00043000 00043323 5.67 • Commonly used over an arbor or
0.309 0.040 1.250 4.25 0.187 0.198 1.473 6 00043018 00043331 5.67 mandrel for support
0.357 0.045 1.250 4.25 0.203 0.259 2.143 6 00043026 00043349 5.67
0.375 0.048 1.250 4.25 0.218 0.238 2.679 6 00043034 00043356 6.06
0.408 0.051 2.000 4.25 0.234 0.293 3.107 6 00043042 00043364 6.06
0.484 0.054 2.000 4.25 0.296 0.310 3.509 6 00043059 00043372 6.28
0.499 0.059 2.000 4.25 0.296 0.340 4.500 6 00043067 00043380 6.85
0.560 0.063 2.000 4.25 0.343 0.362 5.518 6 00043075 00043398 7.06
0.678 0.078 2.000 4.25 0.406 0.450 10.446 6 00043083 00043406 7.88
0.776 0.095 3.000 3.25 0.453 0.546 17.140 1 00043745 00043620 3.17 16.00 00043984 00043869 $4.42
0.848 0.106 3.500 3.25 0.500 0.604 22.470 1 00043752 00043638 4.36 20.97 00043992 00043877 6.12
0.989 0.125 4.000 4.25 0.591 0.844 34.290 1 00043778 00043653 7.41 32.00 00044016 00043893 10.36 90° Deflection Angle
1.102 0.135 4.000 4.25 0.666 0.911 42.860 1 00043794 00043679 7.52 40.00 00044032 00043919 10.58
180° Deflection Angle
0.109 0.012 0.375 5.00 0.067 0.086 0.050 6 00043091 00043414 5.67
0.133 0.014 0.500 5.00 0.078 0.150 0.075 6 00043109 00043422 5.67
0.130 0.015 0.500 5.00 0.078 0.107 0.100 6 00043117 00043430 5.67
0.183 0.015 0.750 4.00 0.109 0.075 0.100 6 00043125 00043448 5.67
0.216 0.018 0.750 4.00 0.140 0.109 0.150 6 00043133 00043455 5.67
0.224 0.025 0.750 6.00 0.140 0.206 0.402 6 00043141 00043463 5.67
0.249 0.028 1.000 6.00 0.140 0.238 0.552 6 00043158 00043471 5.67
0.450 0.035 1.250 4.00 0.281 0.212 1.071 6 00043166 00043489 5.67 180° Deflection Angle
0.404 0.048 1.250 7.00 0.250 0.450 2.679 6 00043174 00043497 6.06
0.526 0.059 2.000 7.00 0.328 0.560 4.500 6 00043182 00043505 6.85
0.767 0.063 2.000 5.00 0.500 0.475 5.518 6 00043190 00043513 8.05
0.803 0.078 2.000 6.00 0.500 0.660 10.446 6 00043208 00043521 8.47
0.982 0.106 3.500 7.00 0.609 0.998 22.500 1 00043786 00043661 4.04 21.00 00044024 00043901 5.67
1.082 0.125 4.000 9.00 0.666 1.438 34.280 1 00043802 00043687 6.57 32.00 00044040 00043927 9.17
1.189 0.135 4.000 9.00 0.735 1.553 42.860 1 00043810 00043695 7.52 40.00 00044057 00043935 10.58
1.356 0.125 4.000 7.00 0.885 1.188 34.290 1 00043828 00043703 7.52 32.00 00044065 00043943 10.58
270° Deflection Angle
0.259 0.017 0.750 4.75 0.156 0.123 0.125 6 00043216 00043539 5.67 270° Deflection Angle
0.184 0.021 0.750 9.75 0.109 0.266 0.234 6 00043224 00043547 5.67
0.187 0.023 0.750 9.75 0.109 0.282 0.330 6 00043232 00043554 5.67
0.353 0.038 1.250 9.75 0.218 0.465 1.275 6 00043240 00043562 5.67
0.556 0.045 2.000 6.75 0.359 0.415 2.143 1 00043257 00043570 5.67
0.826 0.070 2.000 7.75 0.531 0.717 7.500 1 00043265 00043588 8.05
1.342 0.106 3.500 7.75 0.891 1.076 22.500 1 00043836 00043711 4.36 21.00 00044073 00043950 6.12
1.666 0.135 4.000 9.75 1.112 1.654 42.860 1 00043729 00043604 7.52 40.00 00043968 00043844 10.58
360° Deflection Angle
0.271 0.021 1.000 8.50 0.187 0.242 0.234 6 00043273 00043596 5.67
0.798 0.063 2.000 10.50 0.516 0.820 5.520 1 00043760 00043646 2.40 5.15 00044008 00043885 3.32
1.755 0.135 4.000 12.50 1.188 2.025 42.860 1 00043737 00043612 7.52 40.00 00043976 00043851 10.58 360° Deflection Angle
1 2
OD = Cutout the spring will fit in and not impede spring ID = Max. rod dimension that will fit the spring
1334
Page 42
CALIPERS TECHNICAL INFORMATION
Standard Electronic Calipers are available with or without digital output. They
are used throughout industry due to their rugged design and their easy to read Vernier Calipers are available in inch, metric and inch/metric models. Smaller
display. vernier calipers have largely been supplanted by dial or electronic calipers.
Dial Calipers Waterproof Electronic Calipers
Dial Calipers are an extremely versatile measuring tool. They can measure OD, Waterproof Electronic Calipers are designed to be used in harsh fluid or dust
ID, steps, and normally have a depth rod for measuring deep recesses. They environments. They are available with or without digital output. They are
are easier to read than vernier calipers and are available in inch or metric currently available in IP65 to IP67 protection levels. IP67 has the greatest
models. waterproof rating and can be subjected to flood coolant.
Plastic Calipers
Solar Electronic Calipers
1342
CALIPERS TECHNICAL INFORMATION
Standard Electronic Calipers are available with or without digital output. They
are used throughout industry due to their rugged design and their easy to read Vernier Calipers are available in inch, metric and inch/metric models. Smaller
display. vernier calipers have largely been supplanted by dial or electronic calipers.
Dial Calipers Waterproof Electronic Calipers
Dial Calipers are an extremely versatile measuring tool. They can measure OD, Waterproof Electronic Calipers are designed to be used in harsh fluid or dust
ID, steps, and normally have a depth rod for measuring deep recesses. They environments. They are available with or without digital output. They are
are easier to read than vernier calipers and are available in inch or metric currently available in IP65 to IP67 protection levels. IP67 has the greatest
models. waterproof rating and can be subjected to flood coolant.
Plastic Calipers
Solar Electronic Calipers
1342
SPC & OUTSIDE MICROMETERS TECHNICAL INFORMATION
Micrometer standards are used to verify (not calibrate) the zero opening position on micrometers when the micrometer spindle doesn’t contact the micrometer anvil,
such as micrometers over 1w (25mm) and some specialty micrometers.
Micrometer Thimbles
Measuring Faces:
In order to ensure an accurate measurement, the measuring faces of a micrometer
must be both flat and parallel. Micrometer measuring faces (anvil and spindle) are
normally faced with carbide to reduce wear caused by repeated use. Hardened
steel is sometimes used as the measuring face to reduce manufacturing cost.
Anvil Spindle
1354
SPC & OUTSIDE MICROMETERS TECHNICAL INFORMATION
Micrometer standards are used to verify (not calibrate) the zero opening position on micrometers when the micrometer spindle doesn’t contact the micrometer anvil,
such as micrometers over 1w (25mm) and some specialty micrometers.
Micrometer Thimbles
Measuring Faces:
In order to ensure an accurate measurement, the measuring faces of a micrometer
must be both flat and parallel. Micrometer measuring faces (anvil and spindle) are
normally faced with carbide to reduce wear caused by repeated use. Hardened
steel is sometimes used as the measuring face to reduce manufacturing cost. Page
Page 46 Anvil Spindle 1354
1354
SPECIALTY MICROMETER TECHNICAL INFORMATION
1355
INDICATORS TECHNICAL INFORMATION
Continued from previous page
Basics of...Indicators
Dial and Electronic Indicators are used throughout industry on gage fixtures, indicator stands and on mag bases to measure both static and dynamic features.
Dial Indicators are available in several dial sizes, graduations and spindle travel. Electronic Indicators have a variety of functions such as Max/Min/TIR, and
outputs that can be used for remote access.
Dial Indicators
Dial Face Size: Dial Indicators are available in a variety of dial face sizes ranging Dial Indicator Accuracy: American Gage Design (AGD) Specifications require
from series 0 to series 4, with series two (2 to 23⁄8” diameter face) being the that a dial indicator be accurate to within ± one graduation in the first 21⁄3
most common size. revolutions of the dial face.
Mounting: Dial Indicators can be mounted by their mounting stem or by using Graduations and Range: Dial Indicator graduations range from .00002” to .010”
special mounting backs. The mounting stem is available in either 3⁄8” Ø or 8mm and spindle travel from .001” to 12”. Long range indicators (over one inch) are
Ø for full metric indicators. A hybrid metric indicator with a 3⁄8” stem is also subject to accuracy errors due to cosine error (a mounting problem) and gear
available to fit American gage fixtures. Indicator mounting backs are available train error (over the long distance).
in many different configurations, with the lug back being the most common.
Dial Indicator Points: The standard thread on an AGD style indicator point is Dial Face Styles: Dial Indicators are available in four general types of dial faces:
#4-48. Metric indicators use M2.5 x 0.45. Indicator points will normally Balanced, Continuous, Reversed (continuous), and Single Revolution
interchange between different brands of indicators. The dial face may also have a revolution counter. Balanced and single rev dial faces
Bearings and Jewels: Dial Indicators use either plain bearings, bushings or are normally used on gage fixtures for a run of parts or to check for TIR. A
jeweled bearings. Jeweled bearings are recommended for indicators subject to continuous dial face is normally used to measure the dimension of a feature.
high usage and indicators graduated in .0001”.
Electronic Indicators
Selecting an Electronic Indicator: Electronic Indicators are available in many different package sizes,
resolutions, spindle travel and features. Some electronic indicators can be controlled via remote controls or
cabled interfaces.When selecting an electronic indicator, you will need to define what your requirements are.
Start with resolution and stroke length. Will you need a single or multiple resolution indicator? What features
will you need, such as Max/Min/TIR, Preset, Go/NoGo, Analog/Digital display, battery or AC powered. Do you
need data output or does the indicator need to control a process via a PLC? Do you need the indicator to
perform internal calculations, or will the indicator replace the dial indicator on a dial bore gage?
Package Size: If package size or a remote display are the main considerations in choosing an electronic
indicator, most electronic indicators with output can be wired to a remote display. Separate “LVDT style”, or
small profile gages are available with remote displays. Top reading Electronic Indicators (similar to a back
plunger dial indicator) are another option if space is limited.
NOTE: caution when using Electronic Indicators. High static environments may cause erratic indicator
readings. If you must use an Electronic Indicator in a high static environment, insulate the indicator stem
and point, and ground the fixture.
1401
Page 48
SURFACE PLATES & GAGE BLOCK TECHNICAL INFORMATION
Black Granite Surface Plates Surface Plate Covers
Granite Surface Plates meet or exceed Federal Specification GGG-P-463c. Surface Plate Size
Size (In.) Thick. Unilateral Approx. L (In.) W (In.) Order # Price Ea.
L W (In.) Tolerance (In.) Wt. (Lbs.) Order # Price Ea. 12 18 00151019 $40.00
Toolroom Grade B No Ledge 18 18 00151027 55.00
9 12 2 .0002 30 00150003 $53.00 18 24 00151035 57.00
12 12 3 .0002 45 63324107 69.30 24 24 00151043 61.00
12 18 3 .0002 85 00150011 109.00 24 36 00151050 68.00
18 24 3 .0003 180 00150037 190.00 • Harder than steel 36 36 00151068 85.00
24 36 4 .0004 460 00150052 364.00 • Does not nick or burr 36 48 00151076 87.00 Designed to preserve and protect the
36 48 4 .0008 740 00150078 975.00 • Auto-collimator checked for 36 60 00151084 100.00 precise flatness and micro-finish from
Toolroom Grade B, with 2 Ledges overall accuracy 36 72 00151092 109.00 abrasive dust. Made of a strong vinyl
18 24 3 .0003 182 00468579 130.50 • Retains accuracy for years 48 72 00151100 128.00 material with soft cloth lining.
24 36 4 .0004 431 00468587 276.30 • Does not rust or corrode 48 96 00151118 149.00 • Color: Black
Inspection Grade A, No Ledge • Guaranteed repeat reading.
24 36 4 .0002 365 00468595 292.50 Prices include certificate of
inspection (not NIST traceable)
36 48 6 .0004 1140 00468603 528.30 Steel Stands for All Surface Plates
Inspection Grade A, with 2 Ledges
12 18 3 .0001 80 00150029 149.00 Ships carrier Freight Steel stands are fabricated from 2w x 2w x 1⁄4w thick angle iron, welded together for extra strength -
18 24 3 .00015 170 00150045 262.00 Class 50. easily support more than twice the weight of the surface plate. No assembly required; ready to
24 36 4 .0002 365 00150060 525.00 use. Gray enamel finish. Your choice of Rolling model with 4 non-locking swivel casters or
Stationary model. Approximate working height is 36w depending on surface plate. For exact
height, add stand height listed in chart to surface plate thickness.
1
Surface Plate Size Wt. Stand Rolling Stands Stationary Stands
Steel Surface Plates W. (In.) L (In.) (Lbs.) Ht. (In.) Order # Price Ea. Order # Price Ea.
12 18 80 33 00150706 $465.03 00150508 $387.89
Serrated to Accommodate Easy Movement on Plate 18 24 95 36 00150714 487.54 00150516 400.74
L (In.) W (In.) Thick. (In.) Wt. (Lbs.) Order # Price Ea. 24 36 125 36 00150748 564.69 00150540 455.39
8 8 2 10 00921205 $404.24 36 48 175 30 00150763 784.34 00150565 548.61
12 12 2 15 00921213 498.39 36 60 225 30 00150771 980.43 00150573 673.98
36 72 250 30 A43713114 969.07 A43713106 681.12
48 72 300 28 00150813 1257.95 00150615 1151.87
48 96 350 26 00150821 1698.35 00150623 1551.54
Surface Plate Cleaner 1
4w Casters included in calculation of height
Contains No Class 1 Ozone Depleting Chemicals
Contains no chlorides, fluorides or sulphates. Nonflammable. Free from strong odors - Rolling & Stationary Granite
excellent for cleaning surface plates, metals, ceramics, as well as other hard surfaces.
Spray pump design reduces overspray. Surface Plate Stands
Container Size Order # Price Ea. These handsome stands are the strongest, most durable surface plate supports available. They
are structurally engineered to support twice the weight of the plate with ample safety factor. Both
16 oz. Pump Spray 00152017 $7.07
stands keep the surface plate at a comfortable 34w working height.
1 Pint A00540088 6.06
Please specify the thickness of the plate to be used with the stand; legs of proper length will be
1 Qt. 00152025 10.10
1⁄2 Gal. supplied to achieve the 34w height. Stands have a long-wearing baked enamel finish and are
00152033 15.15
Very Low Evaporation provided with leveling screws for stationary use or with locking casters.
1 Gal. 00152041 19.19 Rate - Use Much Less • Stands come pre-assembled and are welded together
5 Gal. A01310523 60.60 Than Ordinary Cleaners Surface Plate Sz. Wt. Stationary Rolling
W (In.) L (In.) (Lbs.) Order # Price Ea. Order # Price Ea.
18 12 50 84371558 $451.00 84371616 $521.00
Surface Plate Cleaner 18 18 65 84371566 453.00 84371624 523.00
24 18 75 84371574 471.00 86434248 538.00
Contains No Class 1 Ozone Depleting Chemicals 24 24 85 73288219 484.00 84371632 568.00 Stationary
36 24 95 02437887 615.00 89296909 750.00
• Helps keep surface plates and other precision granite products in top condition 48 24 145 84371582 636.00 84371640 770.00
• Prevents abrasion of tools by dirt and other foreign particles
• The cleaner, which also acts as a degreaser and rust inhibitor, should be used 36 36 165 84371590 666.00 04199253 805.00
without water to minimize risk of rusting tools 36 48 116 86434164 675.00 84371657 813.00
1
36 60 124 86434172 715.00 62167564 846.00
Container Size Order # Price Ea. 72 36 235 84371608 746.00 84371665 906.00
55 Gallon Drum free 72 48 265 01223429 1136.00 84371673 1325.00
1 Gal. 86435542 $26.77 freight allowed within 2
1 Gal. (case of 4) 86435534 123.61 48 96 220 86434206 1200.00 84371681 1400.00
the limits of the United Rolling
55 Gal. Drum 86435518 640.53 States Mainland. 1
Wt.: 205 Lbs. 2Wt.: 345 Lbs.
1432
Page 49
PIN GAGE SETS & TECHNICAL INFORMATION
1452
TAPE MEASURES & TECHNICAL INFORMATION
Jack Screw Utility Sets Fault Finder
Use when setting up machinery and in other machine shop applications. Perfect for leveling work Locates cracks and defects in metal, glass, plastics, aircraft and automotive, railroads, foundry
on planer beds and upright drills. 11⁄4w diameter jack (at base). and manufacturing. Finds cracks and faults quickly with immediate results.
• Two extension bases: 2w and 1w high, respectively • Low in chlorine and sulfur bearing solvents • One of the least flammable systems available
• Use extensions separately or together • It’s portable, accurate, versatile, simple to use • Conforms to MIL-I-25135; meets chlorine
• When used together, a height of 63⁄8w may be obtained with the jack and sulfur requirements of Navships 250-1500 and MIL STD 271
• Complete kit contains 4 cans of cleaner, 2 cans of
Meas. Rge. (In.) Min. developer, 2 cans of penetrant and 1 carrying case
Min. Max. Cap. (Lbs.) Brand Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea.
Desc. Size Order # Price Ea.
21⁄4 33⁄8 1000 SPI 97-954-2 64914203 $26.00
Complete Kit Complete Kit 00050211 $103.47
21⁄4 33⁄8 1000 Brown & Sharpe 599-680 67385138 31.93
Inspection Cleaner 12 oz. 00050229 6.82
Inspection Penetrant 12 oz. 00050237 7.28
Inspection Developer 12 oz. 00050245 8.05
Tool & Instrument Oil
Contains No Class 1 Ozone Depleting Chemicals
Especially useful for lubricating and protecting fine instruments, micrometers and
other tools, guns, fishing tackle, light machinery, home appliances and countless
other applications. Special high-refining makes Starrett Tool and Instrument Oil
colorless; ensures thorough lubrication of close-fitting parts at high temperatures and
below zero; and provides a strong, lasting oil film over all areas requiring protection
against rust. This oil has not been adulterated by additives for color and odor.
Size Model # Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea.
4 oz. 1620 53216 86426756 $7.39
Tape measures are used to measure a variety of objects. Tapes can usually be grouped under four categories: Good-Better-Best-Premium. What makes one Tape better
than another? The type of features found on each Tape Measure.
Features to Consider when Choosing a Tape Measure
Stand-Out: Wider tapes can be bulkier than pocket tapes, but also have the distinct advantage of extending farther (Stand-Out) without support at the other end. (Note:
More economical tapes will not have a Stand-Out rating).
Typically range from 7’ to 11’ Stand-Out
Tape Case: A strong case will protect the blade and internal spring mechanism that controls the recoil. Look for a case that is made of high impact ABS plastic or die-
cast metals. Tapes with molded rubber bumpers or guards provide additional protection against impact and better gripping surface.
Two Types: Metal or Plastic
Blade Durability: Blades are typically made from high carbon steel that are concaved for strength, rigidity, and stand-out. Typically range from ½” and 11⁄4” wide. Look
for blade coatings (NYLON, Mylar®) and blade reinforcement (3M thermoplastic coatings) to extend the life of your tape.
Blade Readability: Color and markings play an important role in determining which tape best fits your needs.
- Look for a blade that has a high visibility background color that is baked onto the metal with markings that are easy to read.
- Wider tapes (11⁄4”) have larger graphics to make it easier and faster to read. Most tape measures have lines or inch marks that go across the entire face of the blade.
End Hook: The tip of the tape is riveted in place with two or three rivets and slides slightly; the length of the slide is the same as the thickness of the tip, to allow the
user to make accurate measurements. With a sliding tip you get the same measurement hooking the end of the tape over a piece of material or butting the tip into a
corner.
Blade Lock: Most tape measures longer than 10’ have blade locks that will secure the blade when taking a measurement. It is important to control retraction speed to
protect the blade for longer life.
Two Types: Forward locking - using the thumb, depress downward
Bottom locking - uses your other digits to engage the lock
Page 1487
Page 51
1487
VISES TECHNICAL INFORMATION & MACHINE VISES
Basics of...Vises
Vises are devices typically containing two
jaws that may be brought together or
separated via screw, lever, etc; used to
secure an object while it is worked on.
Bench Vise Drill Press Vise Machine Vise Machinist Vise
Types of Vises
Angle: contains marked adjustments which allows for clamping at different angles. Self-centering: facilitates accurate, automatic job centering. It is most handy
Bench: mounted on a table or workbench to secure work between two flat jaws; when applied to work pieces of varying sizes for which the same operation will
most often used in light-duty applications. be performed, as it requires just one machine setting.
Clamp: ideal for portable use; equipped with a combination fixed and portable vise Sine: uses solving triangles and gage blocks to set up high accuracy clamping at
featuring a bottom clamp which attaches easily to tables, sawhorses and desired angles.
workbenches. Toolmaker: useful in tool manufacturing, grinding, milling, engraving and jig
Drill Press: holds work while you are drilling, reaming or tapping on a drill press. boring machines for measurement and inspection, and in manufacturing
Machine: also known as Milling Machine vise-secures a work piece between a processes that requires accurate clamping. They are available in screw and
movable jaw and a stationary jaw; used in conventional machine tool applications screwless models.
such as milling, jig boring, grinding and shaping. Vacuum Base: features a lever-operated suction cup on the bottom that attaches
Machinist: mounted to a workbench and used for general clamping. to a tabletop or similar work surface; used in light-duty applications.
Pipe: made of iron yoke and base with hardened steel jaws; used to hold pipe to Woodworking: features wooden padded jaws used to secure work without
perform pipe fabrication operation. marring the work piece surface.
Types of Vise Jaws
Soft Jaws: plastic, aluminum, leather or lead jaw covers on jaws of a vise or pliers that prevent marking and damage to work.
Smooth Jaws: able to hold material of different shapes and prevent indentation in soft metals; versatile.
Grooved Jaws: vertical/horizontal grooves effectively hold cylindrical pieces parallel or perpendicular to vise.
Serrated Jaws: cross-hatch pattern permits firm gripping of piece in any position.
Safety Tips
Do’s Don’ts
• Wear safety glasses or a face shield when using striking or power tools on a work piece • Do not weld vise base to any metal
held by a vise • Do not repair vise by welding or brazing
• Always attach the vise securely. Place bolts in all holes in the base of the vise. Use lock • Do not try to bend a heavy rod in a light vise
washer under the nuts • Do not cut into the jaws
• Mount a vise so that the stationary jaw projects slightly beyond the edge of the workbench, • Do not apply heavy pressure at vise jaw corners
as this will allow long work to be clamped in the vise free of interference from the edge of • Do not use handle extension (i.e. pipe) for extra clamping pressure
the workbench • Do not hammer the handle to tighten beyond normal hand pressure
• Ensure workbench is firmly secured to its base • Do not use vise jaws as an anvil
• Always check vises for cracks or other damage before clamping a work piece • Do not operate vise with even the slightest crack
• Use a vise large enough to hold work without strain • Do not unscrew or open vise jaws wider than they were designed for use
• Place work piece in vise so that full clamping surface of the jaw supports the work piece
• Keep work piece in vise as close as possible to jaws to avoid vibration while operating
• Support end of extra long work with an adjustable stand, saw horse or box to avoid extra
strain on vise
• Keep all threaded and moving parts clean, oiled and free of chips and dirt
• Use vise jaw liners where work might be marked It is recommended that all users refer to manufacturer’s instructions for Page
• Replace bent handles and worn jaw inserts immediately
Page 52
specific safety guidelines. 1595
1595
LATHE CHUCKS TECHNICAL INFORMATION & LATHE CHUCKS
1618
CENTERS TECHNICAL INFORMATION & LIVE CENTERS
Basics of...Centers
Centers are used to accurately position a workpiece about its point or axis between a lathe chuck or head stock spindle and tail stock spindle. Enables the workpiece to
rotate or revolve and helps to ensure concentric work
Types of Centers
Live Centers
Live (Revolving) Centers: Revolve with their workpiece. They hold ball bearings inside that allow the center to prevent wearing to its ends. Live centers allow more force,
higher turning speeds (without separate lubrication) and tighter gripping on work than plain centers, further reducing sideways movement during turning operations.
1646
DRILL CHUCKS TECHNICAL INFORMATION
1697
Page 55
BAR PULLERS & VIBRATION MOUNTS TECHNICAL INFORMATION
Grippex Bar Pullers - Coolant Actuated Omni & Mini Omni Bar Pullers
MADE IN SWEDEN
• Clamping mechanism is activated by the machine’s
coolant system; opening and closing of jaws is
M-function controlled; coolant on/coolant off
• Grips from 1⁄8w to 3w diameter without any adjustment;
this not only eliminates time required to adjust bar
puller for different setups but also eliminates
adjustments required for variations in bar diameter
during run
• Directly fits any turret with through-tool coolant The Omni Puller is either coolant or air activated. The special adapter can be easily removed for
Here, the same Grippex unit grips a
systems; easily adapts to turrets with external 1⁄8w bar with no adjustment needed internally activated applications. The Omni Puller is mounted in two basic ways.
coolant nozzles Internally activated - Applications are very common and very easy to mount. Internally activated
• Will clamp very close to chuck, allowing for short applications require you to remove the coolant/air adapter. You must have a minimum of 15 P.S.I.
overhang of workpiece to activate the unit (maximum 80 P.S.I.).
• Compact - takes up very little room on machine turret; Externally activated - Applications are commonly used with a CNC Turret boring bar holder
adjacent turret tool position need not be vacated attachment, or with another style tool holder. These holders must have coolant access ports.
• Can perform a second clamp on a different diameter These ports can be connected with an external line to the threaded hole of the coolant/ air adaptor
• Gives accurate part length control since it positions bar (thread size 1⁄8w - 27 NPT). Your external outside coolant system must have a minimum of 15
stock using the machine’s NC control P.S.I. to actuated the Puller (15 P.S.I.= 107 lbs. clamping force).
• Will clamp hexagon bars without need for Desc. Shank Dia. (In.) Capacity (In.) OD (In.) L (In.) Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea.
spindle orientation
• Offers three ranges of gripping fingers to match Mini Omni .625 3⁄16-11⁄8 2.25 4 MP-001 04259842 $427.84
machine’s spindle capacity; fingers are easily changed Omni 1.0 3⁄16-3 3.750 6 OP-1000 04259859 561.66
• Eliminates possibility of a crash. If last piece of bar
stock is too short and is pulled completely out of chuck Fingers & Finger Sets For Mfr’s #MP-001 & OP-1000
or collet, a spring-powered puller or collet system will The Mini Omni Puller MP-001 & OP-1000 include a four piece set of hardened steel fingers to 50
retain bar end and at beginning of next cycle will try to RC coolant/air adapter with 1w diameter mounting shank, operating instructions and parts list.
load bar end back into collet or chuck
For MP-001 For OP-1000
GRIPPEX BAR PULLER - Fingers Included. Desc. Order # Price Ea. Order # Price Ea.
Desc. Order # Price Ea. Individual Hardened Steel 50 RC Finger 04259867 $22.50 04259941 $22.50
Typical spring-type puller about to Individual Soft Steel Finger (each) 04259875 19.21 04259958 19.21
Grippex with 1w Shank 00101527 $653.00 load bar end back into collet. If bar Individual Soft Aluminum Finger 04259883 19.21 04259966 19.21
Grippex with 11⁄4w Shank 00101543 653.00 end doesn’t line up, there is always Individual Soft Brass Finger (each) 04259891 19.21 04259974 19.21
Grippex with 11⁄2w Shank 00101568 653.00 a possibility of an expensive crash Hardened Steel 50 RC Fingers (4 pc. Set) 04259909 71.67 04259982 71.67
Soft Steel Fingers (4 Pc. Set) 04259917 62.77 04259990 62.77
Soft Aluminum Fingers (4 Pc. Set) 04259925 58.24 04260006 58.24
Soft Brass Fingers (4 Pc. Set) 04259933 58.24 04260014 58.24
Selection
To select the proper isolation for mechanical equipment you need to ask:
1. Is slowest equipment SPEED ABOVE 1200 RPM?
If NO, use spring mountings. If YES, see 2.
2. Is equipment LOCATED on a RIGID concrete building structure or a FLEXIBLE VIBRATION SENSITIVE structure?
If RIGID, use “double deflection” neoprene or springs. If FLEXIBLE, use springs only.
The key is to select isolators that are “softer” than the supporting building structure. Ideally isolator deflection should be more than three times greater than the deflection or “sag” of the support.
1745
Page 56
KNURLS TECHNICAL INFORMATION
Basics of...Knurls
A knurling die is used to create a pattern on a cylindrical blank (metal or hard plastic). These dies have V-shaped teeth that deform, displace or push the material rather
than cut it. The embossed patterns can be decorative, but more often act as hand grips and are commonly seen on handles, knobs or rollers. Diagonal, diamond and
straight are the three most common patterns generated by knurling dies.
Types of Knurls
Straight Tooth 30° Diagonal R.H. 30° Diagonal L.H. 30° Diamond Male 30° Diamond Female
GOOD: Sharp corners on leading BETTER: Beveled edge spreads out load, but BEST: Convex full form relief gives a “spread out”
edge of tool sees heavy loading, now the leading edge is a blunt surface loading on a sharp leading edge resulting in a
wear rapidly and can break off in requiring higher forces on tool and holder to smoother precision finish, longer tool life and lower
extreme conditions. deform material. forces on the holder and spindle bearings.
Basic Tips
• Make sure the knurl’s axis is parallel to the blank’s axis • Increase the feed rate in the 1st revolution. Forming a deeper, wider
• Use lots of lubricant impression the 1st time around helps to assure that the teeth will track Page
• Never over roll. Try to limit the pattern to only about 90% full Page 57 into the initial grooves for all subsequent revolutions 1762
1762
FLAT STOCK & DRILL ROD TECHNICAL INFORMATION
1815
Page 58
KEY STOCK & ALUMINUM ALLOYS TECHNICAL INFORMATION
Key & Mill Stock
12w Lengths - Available in Square or Rectangle Low Carbon Steel Key Stock
Mill Stock (Undersized Key Stock) • Provides driving torque between shafts and pulleys, gears, sprockets, etc. Additional uses
• Used in many key stock applications include new machinery, general maintenance and shop repairs
• For closer or undersized dimension tolerances • A necessity in all applications where rotating power devices are used
• Sizes larger than 1⁄8w are made from 12L14 low carbon steel • Sizes are clearly marked on each piece • Material is high quality, cold drawn, low carbon steel
• Size 1⁄8w made from 1018 low carbon steel • Most tolerances on dimensions are oversized to assure tight fits in keyways for positive, zero
• Meets ASTM A-108 backlash power transmission
• Rockwell Hardness: RB 80-90 • Meets ASTM A-108 • Rockwell Hardness: B80/100
Stainless Steel Key Stock High Carbon Steel Key Stock-Metric Sizes
• Excellent alternative to steel key • Conforms to metric keyway specification Tolerances:
stock when corrosion resistance • Material is high quality, cold drawn steel, C1020 to C1045 Type Size Tolerance
is a concern • Gold dichromate plating on most sizes makes product identification easy
• Made from 303/304 stainless steel • Sizes are clearly stamped on each piece Mill Stock
• Rockwell Hardness: RB 80-95 • All sizes meet ISO R773, and BS 423504964664 1018 Carbon Steel 1⁄8w +0.002/-0.0
Low Carbon Steel Zinc-Plated Square Key Stock Square 3⁄16-1w +0.0/-0.002
Low Carbon Steel Plain Mill Stock
Ht. W Ht. W Ht. W Ht. W Key Stock
(In.) (In.) Order # Price Ea. (In.) (In.) Order # Price Ea. (In.) (In.) Order # Price Ea. (In.) (In.) Order # Price Ea. 1018 Carbon Steel 1⁄8-3⁄4w +0.004/-0.0
1⁄8 1⁄8 A04965026 $0.69 1⁄2 1⁄2 A04965083 $6.41 3⁄32 3⁄32 A84780022 $5.25 1⁄2 1⁄2 A04472403 $5.35 Rectangular
3⁄16 3⁄16 A04965034 1.35 5⁄8 5⁄8 A04965091 9.47 1⁄8 1⁄8 A36970754 1.53 5⁄8 5⁄8 A04472460 8.53 1018 Carbon Steel Up to 3⁄4w +0.003/-0.0
1⁄4 1⁄4 A04965042 1.96 3⁄4 3⁄4 A04965109 13.77 3⁄16 3⁄16 A36971075 1.63 3⁄4 3⁄4 A74122128 11.13 Square 7⁄8-1w +0.004/-0.0
5⁄16 5⁄16 A04965059 2.98 7⁄8 7⁄8 A04965117 23.26 1⁄4 1⁄4 A03691102 2.01 7⁄8 7⁄8 A04964649 14.85 Stainless Steel 1⁄8-3⁄16w ±0.003
3⁄8 3⁄8 A04965067 4.29 1 1 A04965125 24.32 5⁄16 5⁄16 A36971091 2.67 1 1 A04964656 18.10 Square 1⁄4w +0.0/-0.002
7⁄16 7⁄16 A04965075 7.27 3⁄8 3⁄8 A37024874 3.27 5⁄16-7⁄16w +0.0w-0.003
7⁄16 7⁄16 A36971208 4.22 1⁄2-1w +0.0/-0.004
Low Carbon Steel Zinc-Plated Rectangular Key Stock
Ht. W Ht. W Ht. W Ht. W Ht. W Ht. W
(In.) (In.) Order # Price Ea. (In.) (In.) Order # Price Ea. (In.) (In.) Order # Price Ea. (In.) (In.) Order # Price Ea. (In.) (In.) Order # Price Ea. (In.) (In.) Order # Price Ea.
3⁄16 1⁄8 A04964672 $2.06 5⁄16 1⁄4 A88434915 $3.85 3⁄8 5⁄16 A04964763 $5.09 1⁄2 3⁄8 A83684126 $7.19 3⁄4 3⁄8 A04964805 $10.21 1 3⁄4 A04964847 $28.09
1⁄4 1⁄8 A04964680 2.49 3⁄8 1⁄8 A04964698 3.17 1⁄2 3⁄16 A04964730 4.72 5⁄8 5⁄16 A04964789 7.29 3⁄4 5⁄8 A04964821 16.32
1⁄4 3⁄16 A04964706 3.17 3⁄8 3⁄16 A04964722 3.85 1⁄2 1⁄4 A04964755 5.17 5⁄8 3⁄8 A04964797 9.21 3⁄4 1⁄2 A81406381 11.91
5⁄16 3⁄16 A04964714 3.39 3⁄8 1⁄4 A04964748 4.25 1⁄2 5⁄16 A04964771 6.20 5⁄8 1⁄2 A04964813 10.69 1 5⁄8 A04964839 26.94
Stainless Steel Plain Square Key Stock High Carbon Steel Gold Dichromate Plated Square Key Stock Assortments
Ht. W Ht. W Order #04965133 Order #04964664
(In.) (In.) Order # Price Ea. (mm) (mm) Order # Price Ea. • Mill Stock - made from 12L14 low • Square Stock - made from 1018 low carbon
1⁄8 1⁄8 A09556416 $3.80 2 2 1
A04964573 $7.21 carbon steel steel, zinc plated
3⁄16 3⁄16 A09556424 4.72 3 3 A05865829 5.15 • Includes: 6 ea. of sizes 3⁄16w, 1⁄4w, • Includes: 6 ea. of sizes 3⁄16w, 1⁄4w, 5⁄16w, 3⁄8w; 4
5⁄16w, 3⁄8w; 4 ea. of sizes 7⁄16w and 1⁄2w ea. of sizes 7⁄16w and 1⁄2w
1⁄4 1⁄4 A09556432 6.76 4 4 A04964581 2.93
5⁄16 5⁄16 A09556457 9.90 5 5 A04964599 3.09
Order #04964854 Low Carbon Steel Assortments
3⁄8 3⁄8 A09556473 15.39 6 6 A04964607 3.43 • Rectangular Stock - made from 12L14 No. of
A70372586 Plain Zinc-Plated
7⁄16 7⁄16 A04965141 21.47 7 7 8.57 low carbon steel, zinc plated Pcs. Order # Price Ea. Order # Price Ea.
1⁄2 1⁄2 A09556481 28.19 8 8 A04964615 4.98 • Includes: 2 ea. of sizes 1⁄4w x 3⁄8w, 1⁄4w x
5⁄8 5⁄8 A04965158 45.26 10 10 A04964623 7.21 1⁄2w, 5⁄16w x 3⁄8w, 5⁄16w x 1⁄2w, ½ x 5⁄8”, 1⁄2w x 16 A04964854 $106.50
12 12 A04964631 10.97 3⁄4w and 5⁄8w x 3⁄4w 32 A04965133 $118.16 A04964664 95.36
1
Plain Finish
1841
BRASS & METALS TECHNICAL INFORMATION
Page 1845
Page 60
1845
STAINLESS STEEL
1855
CERAMICS & POLYURETHANE TECHNICAL INFORMATION
Grade L/LE Linen Laminate
Rods - 48w Lengths
Dia. (In.) Order # Price Ea. Dia. (In.) Order # Price Ea. Dia. (In.) Order # Price Ea. Dia. (In.) Order # Price Ea. Dia. (In.) Order # Price Ea.
0.250 63413843 $10.64 0.500 63413884 $23.82 0.875 63413926 $59.90 1.375 63413967 $131.97 3.000 63414007 $584.39
0.312 63413850 12.44 0.562 63413892 26.50 1.000 63413934 78.63 1.500 63413975 148.71 3.500 63414015 745.71
0.375 63413868 15.12 0.625 63413900 33.40 1.125 63413942 90.00 2.000 63413983 280.52 4.000 63414023 1034.60
0.437 63413876 19.16 0.750 63413918 43.89 1.250 63413959 109.21 2.500 63413991 423.99
Tubes - 30-48w Random Lengths
Wall Approx. Wall Approx. Wall Approx. Wall Approx. Grade LE Cotton Fabric Reinforced
Thickness Wt. Thickness Wt. Thickness Wt. Thickness Wt. Phenolic-natural (light tan to brown).
(In.) (Lbs.) Order # Price Ea. (In.) (Lbs.) Order # Price Ea. (In.) (Lbs.) Order # Price Ea. (In.) (Lbs.) Order # Price Ea. This grade is composed of a continuous
0.187w ID 0.312w ID 0.500w ID 0.750w ID cotton woven cloth impregnated with a
0.031 0.03 63414031 $28.84 0.031 0.05 63414155 $30.08 0.031 0.09 63414270 $30.36 0.031 0.13 63414395 $36.92 phenolic resin binder. Grade LE contains
0.062 0.07 63414049 29.69 0.062 0.12 63414163 34.21 0.062 0.22 63414288 23.62 0.062 0.34 63414403 31.24 a fine weave linen and, like the canvas
0.093 0.10 63414056 33.86 0.093 0.18 63414171 40.55 0.093 0.34 63414296 28.28 0.093 0.50 63414411 37.40 phenolic, is known for its mechanical
0.125 0.13 63414064 39.47 0.125 0.24 63414189 47.60 0.125 0.45 63414304 33.54 0.125 0.68 63414429 43.51 properties. The finer weave allows for
0.187 0.20 63414072 49.65 0.187 0.36 63414197 56.04 0.187 0.68 63414312 44.95 0.187 1.01 63414437 57.87 machining more intricate details than
0.250 0.26 63414080 62.48 0.250 0.48 63414205 65.88 0.250 0.90 63414320 58.08 0.250 1.35 63414445 73.30 CE, like gear teeth. This grade is not
recommended for primary insulation.
0.250w ID 0.375w ID 0.625w ID 1.000w ID
0.031 0.04 63414098 29.69 0.031 0.07 63414213 31.83 0.031 0.11 63414338 33.04 0.031 0.18 63414452 42.76
0.062 0.09 63414106 31.38 0.062 0.14 63414221 35.94 0.062 0.28 63414346 31.86 0.062 0.45 63414460 38.02
0.093 0.14 63414114 36.39 0.093 0.21 63414239 43.03 0.093 0.42 63414353 24.81 0.093 0.67 63414478 44.73
0.125 0.19 63414122 42.45 0.125 0.29 63414247 50.84 0.125 0.56 63414361 35.53 0.125 0.90 63414486 52.27
0.187 0.29 63414130 44.73 0.187 0.43 63414254 60.10 0.187 0.84 63414379 47.54 0.187 1.35 63414494 67.05
0.250 0.38 63414148 46.95 0.250 0.57 63414262 71.03 0.250 1.13 63414387 62.01 0.250 1.81 63414502 88.06
Sheets (+0/.500w Tolerance)
12 x 12w 12 x 24w 24 x 24w 24 x 36w 36 x 48w
Thickness (In.) Order # Price Ea. Order # Price Ea. Order # Price Ea. Order # Price Ea. Order # Price Ea.
0.031 63413199 $5.31 63413322 $9.23 63413454 $18.70 63413587 $21.32 63413710 $37.77
0.062 63413207 5.52 63413330 10.56 63413462 20.65 63413595 28.64 63413728 59.82
0.125 63413215 10.23 63413348 20.00 63413470 40.27 63413603 55.76 63413736 120.61
0.187 63413223 15.26 63413355 29.85 63413488 60.21 63413611 83.37 63413744 180.42
0.250 63413231 20.29 63413363 39.82 63413496 80.42 63413629 111.36 63413751 241.21
0.312 63413249 25.35 63413371 49.67 63413504 100.37 63413637 138.98 63413769 301.02
0.375 63413256 30.46 63413389 59.71 63413512 120.63 63413645 167.04 63413777 361.81
0.500 63413264 40.60 63413397 79.62 63413520 160.84 63413652 222.71 63413785 482.42
0.625 63413272 50.77 63413405 99.52 63413538 201.05 63413660 278.42 63413793 603.04
0.750 63413280 60.90 63413413 119.45 63413546 241.26 63413678 334.11 63413801 723.63
1.000 63413298 81.21 63413421 159.27 63413553 321.69 63413686 445.46 63413819 964.83
1.250 63413306 101.51 63413439 199.06 63413561 402.11 63413694 556.80 63413827 1206.04
1.500 63413314 121.83 63413447 238.88 63413579 482.52 63413702 668.16 63413835 1447.25
Basics of...Polyurethane
Thermoset cast urethane products are well known for their extraordinary toughness and durability in most demanding applications. They usually outlast conventional
rubbers and plastics by a factor of 20 to 1. When impingement abrasion is involved, they will usually outlast
carbon steel. Cast from thermoset urethane resins, solid urethane products are produced to very close
tolerances and typically require a minimum of machining to adapt to their end uses. Precision cast products are
available in several standard size sheets, bars, rods, and tube stocks. All standard forms can be shipped off-the-
shelf. Some typical applications for urethanes are wear pads, metal-forming pads, machinery mounts, cutting
surfaces, sound dampening pads, gaskets, seals, rollers, roller covers and sandblast curtains.
• Color: black • Temperature range: -40 to +180°F
1880
Page 62
POLYURETHANE & RUBBER TECHNICAL INFORMATION
Continued from previous page
Natural Thin Gage Latex Rubber Sheets Natural High Strength Latex Rubber Sheets
Tear resistant with durable holding structure under high Thick. (In.) Order # Price/Ft. High natural rubber content (98%) gives this sheeting exceptional abrasion resistance, cut/tear
pressure. Not used with petroleum products but good resistance and resiliency. Very good sound and vibration damping qualities.
resistance to alkalies and fair resistance to acids. 0.006 31934748 $5.06
0.008 31934755 5.42 Specifications:
Applications: • Temp. Range: -40° to 170° • Color: pink • Size: 48w wide roll
• Release sheeting • Gasketing 0.010 31934763 6.31
0.012 31934771 7.34 • Tensile Strength: 3000 psi • Durometer (Shore A): 35-45
• Environmental seals • Design shop models
• Medical disposables 0.014 31934789 7.65 Thick. (In.) Order # Price Per Foot
Applications:
0.020 31934797 8.52 1⁄16 31934847 $51.71 • Tank and pipe lining; conveyor
Specifications: 0.025 31934805 9.47 1⁄8 31934854 84.98 belt cover; shot blast tables
• Temperature Range: -65° to 180°F 0.030 31934813 10.98 3⁄16 31934862 106.84 • Impact pads; vibrating feeder
• Tensile Strength: 4000 psi 1⁄4 31934870 139.98 pans; conveyors
• Durometer (Shore A): 35-45 (plied) 0.040 31934821 19.18
• Color: amber • Size: 42w wide roll 0.050 31934839 29.78
1883
WIRE & WIRE CLOTH TECHNICAL INFORMATION
Cut & Straightened Music Wire Black Oil-Tempered Spring Wire
Wire Gage Pkg. High Carbon Steel Stainless Steel • Pre-cut 12w lengths can • Uses include wire forming and springs, where a high carbon oil tempered steel is required
Dia. (In.) No. Qty. Order # Price/Pkg. Order # Price/Pkg. be used in tooling or • Furnished in 6 foot lengths
0.0200 8 100 31981236 $3.68 31981426 $10.02 for making pins Wire Gage Pkg. Wire Gage Pkg.
0.0220 9 100 31981244 4.79 31981434 11.88 • The music wire meets Dia. (In.) Number Qty. Order # Price/Pkg. Dia. (In.) Number Qty. Order # Price/Pkg.
0.0240 10 100 31981251 5.14 31981442 12.13 ASTM A228
• The stainless steel wire 0.0630 16 83 31983323 $66.79 0.1480 9 14 31983372 $66.79
0.0260 11 100 31981269 5.99 31981459 12.17 0.0920 13 38 31983331 66.79 0.1620 8 12 31983380 66.79
meets ASTM A580
0.0290 12 100 31981277 6.45 31981467 13.58 0.1050 12 28 31983349 66.79 0.1770 7 10 31983398 66.79
0.0310 13 100 31981285 6.85 31981475 15.94 0.1200 11 21 31983356 66.79 0.1870 — 9 31983406 66.79
0.0330 14 100 31981293 7.63 31981483 16.13 0.1250 — 17 31983364 66.79
0.0350 15 100 31981301 8.92 31981491 16.32
0.0370 16 100 31981319 9.64 31981509 16.53
0.0390 17 100 31981327 10.68 31981517 17.04
0.0410 18 100 31981335 11.45 31981525 17.04
0.0430 19 100 31981343 11.79 31981533 17.34
0.0450 20 100 31981350 11.86 31981541 17.73
0.0470 21 100 31981368 12.12 31981558 17.73
0.0490 22 100 31981376 12.78 31981566 17.98
0.0510 23 100 31981384 13.75 31981574 18.02
0.0550 24 100 31981392 15.56 31981582 18.30
0.0590 25 100 31981400 17.70 31981590 19.02
0.0630 26 100 31981418 17.52 31981608 19.02
Nickel-Chromium Wire
1⁄8 Lb. Spools 1⁄4 Lb. Spools 1 Lb. Spools
Wire Gage Approx. Resistance @ 68° F Approx. Resistance @ 68° F Approx. Resistance @ 68° F • This solid bare resistance wire is
Dia. (In.) Number (Ft./Spool) OHMS/Ft. Order # Price Ea. (Ft./Spool) OHMS/Ft. Order # Price Ea. (Ft./Spool) OHMS/Ft. Order # Price Ea. 80% nickel, 20% chrome
• Furnished in 1⁄8, 1⁄4, and 1 Lb.
0.0030 40 4175 70.24 73226177 $36.07 8352 70.24 73226201 $68.97 33400 70.24 73226367 $209.31 spools
0.0040 38 2400 42.19 73226169 35.02 4800 42.19 73226193 59.26 19200 42.19 73226359 164.32
0.0050 36 1600 27.00 73226151 34.65 3200 27.00 73226185 49.13 12800 27.00 73226342 149.31
0.0063 34 1015 17.00 73226136 31.85 1965 17.00 31981806 41.93 8120 17.00 73226334 145.65
0.0080 32 983 10.55 73226128 27.67 1285 10.55 31981814 38.35 7860 10.55 73226326 140.47
0.0100 30 393 6.75 73226110 20.76 785 6.75 31981822 30.79 3140 6.75 73226318 123.70
0.0126 28 498 4.251 73226102 16.40 498 4.25 31981830 29.21 1990 4.251 73226300 84.84
0.0159 26 158 3.348 73226094 13.75 315 2.67 31981848 28.36 1260 3.348 73226292 87.57
0.0201 24 99 2.107 73226086 12.22 198 1.67 31981855 25.47 793 2.107 73226284 77.83
0.0253 22 63 1.322 73226078 11.62 125 1.06 31981863 23.15 501 1.322 73226276 76.84
0.0320 20 39 0.8301 73226060 11.15 79 0.66 31981871 22.16 315 0.8301 73226268 76.00
0.0359 19 32 0.675 73226052 11.11 64 0.52 31981889 21.84 257 0.6755 73226250 73.14
0.0403 18 25 0.5208 73226045 10.29 50 0.5208 31981897 21.82 199 0.5208 73226243 69.95
0.0453 17 20 0.212 73226037 10.01 40 0.33 31981905 21.03 163 0.3902 73226235 77.04
0.0508 16 16 0.2595 73226029 9.89 32 0.26 31981913 20.31 126 0.2595 73226227 66.11
0.0641 14 10 0.1648 73226011 9.77 20 0.16 31981921 20.64 80 0.1648 73226219 65.24
1896
SOCKET HEAD CAP SCREWS
All Socket screws meet AISI, IFI,
Basics of...Socket Head Fasteners ANSI, ASME and ASTM standards
and specifications.
Socket screws include several types of high strength fasteners, all using an internal hex drive for installation. Socket head, low head, flat head and button head cap
screws are all tensile fasteners. Their clamping strength is derived from stretching the screws and creating “preload” to combat the external forces seen in the clamped
parts. Socket shoulder screws have both tensile and shear applications. Socket set screws are compression fasteners. Socket screws are used in a wide variety of
applications where both strength and cosmetics are important. They are found in tooling, metal stamping dies, plastic injection molds, machinery, power transmission,
hand and power tools and even furniture.
Socket Head Cap Screws
Socket head cap screws are not grade designated as are hex head cap screws. A standard inch series socket head cap screw is 20% stronger than a
Grade 8 hex head cap screw and 50% stronger than a Grade 5 hex cap screw. The tensile strength is a minimum 180,000 psi for sizes ½" diameter
and smaller and 170,000 psi for 5⁄8w diameter and above (Tensile strength may vary according to heat treatment and manufacturer.) Low head, flat
head and button head cap screws are rated 10,000 psi lower due to the head configuration and are seen more in lighter duty applications.
As an alternative drive, Torx Plus (Star Head) screws offer more contact points allowing for a higher level of torque transfer and extended tool life. Additional benefits
include faster tool engagement and reduced camout and end load.
Socket Shoulder Screws
Socket shoulder screws have tensile and shear components. The shoulder is precision ground and heat treated and often
supports shear loads such as brake pedals, stamping die rails and stripper plates on printing presses. It is that application that
helped coin the name “stripper bolts”. Shoulder screws are called out by shoulder diameter and length and each shoulder
diameter has a default thread diameter and length. The default thread diameter for any shoulder is one standard size smaller
than the shoulder. For example, a 5⁄8” shoulder screw has a ½-13 threaded portion at its end.
Socket Set Screws
Socket set screws derive their holding power from compression of the point into the mating application. The more it is tightened, the greater the
axial holding power of the screw. Common applications are shaft collars, crash bars on exit doors and knobs of many types. Set screws are
hardened beyond socket cap screws to RC 45-53.
Common Set Screw Point Styles:
Cup: most commonly used style; the thin edge design allows for high holding power for applications requiring quick, permanent and semi-permanent part assemblies.
Cone: highest holding power due to the sharp cone shaped point which allows for deep penetration of the part; commonly used in the permanent setting of parts.
Flat: due to the flat point design, this style is used in applications where frequent adjustments are required and minimal surface damage is desired.
Half Dog: also known as Extended Point or Pilot Point; it features a round nub that protrudes from the bottom of the set screw, thus extended or pilot point. The point
is designed to align or mate with a slot.
Oval: like the flat point design, this style is also used in applications where frequent adjustments are required and minimal surface damage is desired
Knurled: the grooves on the cup- point are designed to improve grip and prevent backing out or loosening. Internal and external knurled styled points are available Page
depending on manufacturer.
Page 65 1902
1902 CALL MSC TODAY 800-645-7270 FOR ALL YOUR INDUSTRIAL NEEDS
WOOD SCREWS & NYLON FASTENERS
Wood Screws - Oval Head Slotted
Zinc Plated 18-8 Stainless Brass Zinc Plated 18-8 Stainless Brass Oval Head Slotted
L (In.) Order # Price/100 Order # Price/100 Order # Price/100 L (In.) Order # Price/100 Order # Price/100 Order # Price/100
100 Per Package
#4 #8
1⁄2 67368407 $2.79 67546283 $21.52 67586008 $5.63 3⁄4 67368688 $3.71 67546481 $31.34 67586164 $15.89
3⁄4 67368449 3.01 67546325 21.91 67586040 7.12 1 67368720 4.59 67546523 33.78 67586206 19.08
#5 11⁄4 67546564 39.39
3⁄4 67368480 3.22 11⁄2 67604488 43.89
#6 #10
1⁄2 67546366 24.03 67586081 7.53 3⁄4 67604520 41.50
5⁄8 67368522 3.01 1 67368761 6.59 67604561 41.45 67586248 26.51
3⁄4 67368563 3.07 67546408 28.44 67586123 9.90 11⁄4 67368803 10.85 67604603 46.99 67586289 37.06
1 67368605 4.59 67546440 31.69 11⁄2 67368845 9.13 67604645 51.47 67586321 36.89
11⁄2 67368647 9.68
Drive Screws
L Pkg. Zinc Plated 18-8 Stainless Steel L Pkg. Zinc Plated 18-8 Stainless Steel L Pkg. Zinc Plated 18-8 Stainless Steel
(In.) Qty. Order # Price/100 Order # Price/100 (In.) Qty. Order # Price/100 Order # Price/100 (In.) Qty. Order # Price/100 Order # Price/100
#00 (.058w Dia.) #4 (.114w Dia.) #8 (.164w Dia.)
1⁄8 1000 67383364 $6.03 67316927 $4.22 3⁄16 1000 67383844 $3.85 67317289 $2.94 1⁄4 1000 67317529 $5.41
3⁄16 1000 67383406 5.73 67316968 4.22 1⁄4 1000 67383885 3.85 67317321 3.22 3⁄8 1000 67384248 $6.03 67317560 6.12 Sold in Full Box
1⁄4 1000 67383448 6.20 67317008 4.22 5⁄16 1000 67383927 3.94 1⁄2 1000 67384289 6.32 67317602 8.38 Quantities Only
#0 (.073w Dia.) 3⁄8 1000 67383968 5.85 67317362 6.24 5⁄8 1000 67384321 7.76
1⁄8 1000 67383489 4.93 67317040 4.18 #6 (.138w Dia.) #10 (.179w Dia.)
3⁄16 1000 67383521 5.05 67317081 4.04 1⁄4 1000 67384008 4.42 67317404 4.24 3⁄8 1000 67384362 6.75 67317644 6.12
1⁄4 1000 67383562 5.08 67317123 4.18 5⁄16 1000 67384040 4.52 67317446 4.57 1⁄2 1000 67384404 3.62 67317685 7.95 These screws can be used
3⁄8 1000 67383604 5.52 3⁄8 1000 67384081 4.65 67317487 5.01 5⁄8 1000 67384446 5.35 in drilled or punch holes.
#2 (.098w Dia.) #7 (.152w Dia.) #12 (.209w Dia.) Excellent for permanent
1⁄8 1000 67383646 4.81 67317164 3.97 5⁄16 1000 67384123 6.98 1⁄2 1000 67384487 6.08 fastening of castings,
3⁄16 1000 67383687 4.84 67317206 4.14 3⁄8 1000 67384164 6.26 3⁄4 1000 67384529 7.39 sheet metal, plastics and
1⁄4
wood panels.
1000 67383729 4.83 67317248 4.12 1⁄2 1000 67384206 6.28 #14 (.239w Dia.)
5⁄16 1000 67383760 4.93 1⁄2 100 67384560 8.57
3⁄8 1000 67383802 5.07 3⁄4 100 67384602 13.29
Nylon Socket Head Cap Screws Nylon Knurled Head Thumb Screws with Shoulder
Thread Head Head Key Size Hex L. Under L. Under
Size Dia. A (In.) Ht. H (In.) J (In.) Depth (In.) Head Pkg. Head Pkg.
(In.) Qty. Order # Price/100 (In.) Qty. Order # Price/100
4 .180 .110 3⁄32 .051
6 .222 .136 7⁄64 .064 #6-32 1 100 67342006 $16.42
1⁄2 100 67341768 $15.19 11⁄2 100 67342048 17.12
8 .265 .162 9⁄64 .077
10 .310 .188 5⁄32 .090 3⁄4 100 67341800 15.26 1⁄4-20 ALL FASTENERS
1⁄4w
ALL FASTENERS OFFERED IN FULL 1 100 67341842 15.36 1⁄2 100 67342089 16.78 OFFERED IN FULL BOX
.370 .248 3⁄16 .120 BOX QUANTITIES ONLY - NOT SOLD QUANTITIES ONLY -
3⁄8 .560 .370 5⁄16 .180 IN BROKEN PACKAGES. #8-32 3⁄4 100 67342121 17.09 NOT SOLD IN BROKEN
3⁄4 100 67341883 15.80 1 100 67342162 17.19 PACKAGES
Molded threads approximate UNC/UNF 2A and 2B. 1 100 67341925 15.90 11⁄4 100 67342204 17.37
L. Under Head (In.) Pkg. Qty. Order # Price/100 L. Under Head (In.) Pkg. Qty. Order # Price/100 #10-32 11⁄2 100 67342246 17.17
4-40 10-32 (Cont’d) 3⁄4 100 67341966 15.71
3⁄8 100 67343327 $6.73 1⁄2 100 67343848 $7.80
1⁄2 100 67343368 8.01 5⁄8 100 67343889 9.24
3⁄4 100 67343400 8.10 3⁄4 100 67343921 7.86
1 100 67343442 6.93 1 100 67343962 7.94
6-32 1⁄4-20 Nylon Slotted Set Screws
1⁄4 100 67343483 6.86 3⁄8 100 67344002 11.08
1⁄2 100 67343525 8.30 1⁄2 100 67344044 8.82 Molded threads
3⁄4 100 67343566 8.40 3⁄4 100 67344085 8.91 approximate UNC/
8-32 1 100 67344127 8.91 UNF 2A and 2B.
1⁄2 100 67343608 7.23 11⁄4 100 67344168 9.07
3⁄4 100 67343640 7.27 11⁄2 100 67344200 9.22 Thread OAL Pkg. Thread OAL Pkg.
1 100 67343681 7.35 1⁄4-28 Size (In.) Qty. Order # Price/100 Size (In.) Qty. Order # Price/100
10-24 1 100 67344242 8.91 4-40 1⁄8 100 67342840 $7.67 10-32 1⁄2 100 67343087 $9.28
3⁄4 4-40 1 100 67342881 8.88 10-32 1 100 67343129 9.50
100 67343723 9.26 3⁄8-16
6-32 1⁄4 100 67342923 8.19 1⁄4-20 1⁄4 100 67343160 10.34
1 100 67343764 9.34 1 100 67344283 25.56
8-32 1⁄8 100 67342964 9.00 1⁄4-20 1⁄2 100 67343202 10.50
10-32 11⁄4 100 67344325 31.26
3⁄8 100 67343806 7.80 11⁄2 100 67344366 32.37 8-32 1⁄4
100 67343004 8.55 1⁄4-20 3⁄4 100 67343244 11.36
10-32 1⁄4 100 67343046 9.13 1⁄4-20 1 100 67343285 11.51
ALL FASTENERS OFFERED IN FULL BOX QUANTITIES ONLY - NOT SOLD IN BROKEN PACKAGES
2014 CALL MSC TODAY 800-645-7270 FOR ALL YOUR INDUSTRIAL NEEDS
ELECTRONIC HARDWARE
Tamper Resistant Sheet Metal Screws
• Length is overall for flat head, under head for all other types
Refer to Page No. 2048 for Drivers.
18-8 Stainless Steel Pan Head Spanner Flat Head Spanner Button Head Torx Round Head One Way
L Pkg. Pan Head Spanner Flat Head Spanner Button Head Torx Round Head One Way L Pkg. Pan Head Spanner Flat Head Spanner Button Head Torx Round Head One Way
(In.) Qty. Order # Price/100 Order # Price/100 Order # Price/100 Order # Price/100 (In.) Qty. Order # Price/100 Order # Price/100 Order # Price/100 Order # Price/100
#6 #10
1⁄2 100 67750000 $43.48 67754127 $41.06 2 3
67750729 $19.71 1⁄2 100 67750240 $50.59 67754325 $56.02 67750562 $76.25 67751008 $27.74
3⁄4 100 67750042 2 3
43.48 67754168 41.38 67750760 23.92 3⁄4 100 67750281 50.59 67754366 58.45 67750604 76.25 67751040 29.66
2 3
1 100 67750802 27.74 1 100 67750323 50.59 67754408 57.56 67750646 76.25 67751081 33.24
2
#8 11⁄4 100 67750687 97.87
1⁄2 100 67750083 1 3
44.72 67754200 45.58 67750406 $62.03 67750844 27.74 11⁄2 100 67751123 44.95
3⁄4 1
100 67750125 44.72 67754242 45.58 67750448 62.03 67750885 27.74 #14
1 3
1 100 67750166 44.72 67754283 46.48 67750489 62.03 67750927 27.74 1⁄2 100 67751164 41.12
1 3
1 ⁄4 100
1 67750521 83.08 3⁄4 100 67750364 87.86 67751206 46.15
3
11⁄2 100 67750968 35.04 1 100 67751248 50.27
3
2 100 67750208 65.18 11⁄2 100 67751289 84.45
1
T15 tamper resistant Torx driver 2T25 tamper resistant Torx drive 3One-way extraction tool - Order #79906558
Dowel pins are a shear fastener most often associated and used in conjunction with socket screws. They are used to absorb shear loads, allowing the socket screw to
take up the tensile loads in the application. Most dowel pins, particularly those used in high strength applications, are made from heat treated alloy steel, have a higher
case hardness than core hardness and have a ground finish.
In accordance with ASME B 18.8.2, hardened ground machine dowel pins have a core hardness of RC 50-58 and a case hardness of RC 60 minimum. Surface finish is
8 microns. Dowel pins are made 0.0002” over a standard diameter and are fit into a reamed hole. Dowel pins for special applications where lower loads are present
may also have carbon steel as a base material. Corrosive and other special environments requiring dowels may require that the pins be formed or machined from brass
or stainless steel. Special oversize dowel pins, also called “repair” dowel pins are made 0.0010” oversized, so the damaged hole may be further opened up to
accommodate the new pin.
Pull -out dowel pins are internally threaded to allow for removal and reuse with a standard screw or pull-out tool. Pull-out dowels are not referenced by any standard of
ASTM or ASME but by custom have the same hardness as hardened ground machine dowel pins. There are two types of pull-out dowel pins:
• Standard round (not vented): have a smooth finish and are used in applications featuring a through- hole
• Vented: are designed to relieve trapped air and are used in blind-hole applications. Spiral vent pins feature a groove cut from end to end, while flat vent pins have a
ground flat chamfer along one side
Because of the high hardness on the surface of a dowel pin, it is necessary they be pressed into the reamed hole with a ball peen hammer made of a softer material,
rather than hammered or driven. This prevents the pin from shattering and causing injury. Page
Safety goggles must always be worn when installing dowel pins. Page 68 2066
2066 CALL MSC TODAY 800-645-7270 FOR ALL YOUR INDUSTRIAL NEEDS
RIVETS
Copper Belt Rivets with Burrs Semi-Tubular Brake Lining Rivets
Hole Dia. (In.) Head L Under Body Box Price/ Zinc Yellow Plated Steel,
Min. Max. Dia. (In.) Head (In.) Dia. (In.) Qty. Order # Box
Perfect for fastening leather, conveyor belts and other 150° Countersunk
0.100 0.107 0.312 1⁄4 9⁄64 100 77432672 $7.92
copper assemblies. With a countersunk head and tapered
0.100 0.107 0.312 5⁄16 9⁄64 100 77432680 7.92
shank and each supplied with an equal number of burrs.
0.100 0.107 0.312 3⁄8 9⁄64 100 77432698 9.77
Sold in 1 Lb. packages.
0.100 0.107 0.312 7⁄16 9⁄64 100 77432706 9.77
0.100 0.107 0.375 1⁄4 9⁄64 100 77432714 7.92
Body Body Approx. Body Body Approx. 0.100 0.107 0.375 5⁄16 9⁄64 100 77432722 7.92
Size L (In.) Pcs./Lb. Order # Price/Lb. Size L (In.) Pcs./Lb. Order # Price/Lb. 0.100 0.107 0.375 3⁄8 9⁄64 100 79454161 8.63
#5 1 39 67137323 $20.53 #9 7⁄8 143 67138206 $20.53 0.100 0.107 0.375 1⁄2 9⁄64 100 79454179 9.11 • Used when a flush head
0.134 0.141 0.375 1⁄4 3⁄16 100 79454187 9.11 semi-tubular rivet is desired
#6 1 57 67137406 20.53 #9 1 129 67138248 20.53 as in “brake or clutch”
#7 1⁄2 143 67137448 20.53 #9 11⁄4 108 67138289 20.53 0.134 0.141 0.375 5⁄16 3⁄16 100 79454195 9.11
assemblies
#7 5⁄8 127 67137489 20.53 #9 11⁄2 93 67138321 20.53 0.134 0.141 0.375 3⁄8 3⁄16 100 79454203 9.77 • How to clinch: same as oval
#7 3⁄4 112 67137521 20.53 #10 3⁄8 302 67138362 22.15 0.134 0.141 0.375 7⁄16 3⁄16 100 79454211 10.69 head tubular rivet
#7 7⁄8 99 67137562 20.53 #10 1⁄2 256 67138404 22.15 0.134 0.141 0.375 1⁄2 3⁄16 100 79454229 11.18 • Low silhouette head
#7 11⁄4 74 67137646 20.53 #10 5⁄8 216 67138446 22.15 0.134 0.141 0.375 5⁄8 3⁄16 100 79454237 14.53 combines the advantages of
#7 11⁄2 62 67137687 20.53 #10 3⁄4 192 67138487 22.15 0.134 0.141 0.500 5⁄8 3⁄16 100 79454245 17.20 oval head with countersunk
#8 3⁄8 206 67137729 20.53 #10 7⁄8 165 67138529 22.15 0.176 0.184 0.500 7⁄16 1⁄4 100 79454252 20.51 150° head
#8 1⁄2 180 67137760 20.53 #10 1 147 67138560 22.15 0.176 0.184 0.500 1⁄2 1⁄4 100 79454260 23.34
#8 5⁄8 150 67137802 20.53 #10 11⁄4 121 67138602 22.15 0.176 0.184 0.500 5⁄8 1⁄4 100 79454278 26.16
#8 3⁄4 133 67137844 20.53 #10 11⁄2 104 67138644 22.15
#8 7⁄8 120 67137885 20.53 #12 3⁄8 412 67138685 20.74
#8 1 105 67137927 20.53 #12 1⁄2 330 67138727 20.74
#8 11⁄4 86 67137968 20.53 #12 5⁄8 287 67138768 20.74
#8 11⁄2 75 67138008 20.53 #12 3⁄4 244 67138800 20.74
#9 3⁄8 260 67138040 20.53 #12 1 191 67138842 20.74 Semi-Tubular Oval Head Rivets
#9 1⁄2 208 67138081 20.53 #12 11⁄4 160 67138883 20.74
#9 5⁄8 183 67138123 20.53 #12 11⁄2 136 67138925 20.74 • Tubular rivets can be used to economically join two or more
#9 3⁄4 160 67138164 20.53 pre-drilled or pre-punched holes permanently and easily
• High shear strength with ease of clinching on automatic,
pneumatic, and manually operated rivet setting machines
• Head type: dome • Material: zinc plated steel
Body L Under Head Body L Under Head
Nickel Plated Steel Split Rivets Dia. Head Dia. Box. Dia. Head Dia. Box.
(In.) (In.) (In.) Qty. Order # Price/Box (In.) (In.) (In.) Qty. Order # Price/Box
• Used when permanently joining soft material such as leather, fiber, rubber, 1⁄8 1⁄8 0.218 100 79454971 $11.56 3⁄16 1⁄4 0.375 100 79455101 $11.94
wood, canvas and some plastics 1⁄8 3⁄16 0.218 100 79454989 11.56 3⁄16 5⁄16 0.375 100 79455119 11.94
• Clinches with anvils that spread the prongs flush with material or turned into the material 1⁄8 1⁄4 0.218 100 79454997 11.56 3⁄16 3⁄8 0.375 100 79455127 12.75
• Can be used with caps or against washers to prevent clinch from tearing loose 1⁄8 5⁄16 0.218 100 79455002 11.56 3⁄16 1⁄2 0.375 100 67659490 13.28
• Eliminate cost of pre-punching or pre-drilling of holes in material without weakening the
1⁄8 3⁄8 0.218 100 79455010 11.56 3⁄16 3⁄4 0.375 100 79455135 13.85
assembly by removing of material
1⁄8 1⁄2 0.218 100 79455028 11.56 3⁄16 1 0.375 100 79455143 15.46
L Under Head (In.) Pkg. Qty. Order # Price/Box 1⁄8 5⁄8 0.218 100 79455036 11.94 1⁄4 3⁄8 0.437 100 79455150 15.46
5⁄16 100 77432607 $8.85 1⁄8 3⁄4 0.218 100 79455044 11.94 1⁄4 1⁄2 0.437 100 79455168 16.01
• Head type: dome
3⁄8 100 77432615 8.85 • Hole dia. range: 1⁄8 1 0.218 100 79455051 13.28 1⁄4 3⁄4 0.437 100 79455176 17.63
7⁄16 100 77432623 8.85 0.100 - 0.107w 9⁄64 1⁄4 0.312 100 79455069 11.56 1⁄4 1 0.437 100 79455184 19.80
1⁄2 100 77432631 8.85 • Head dia.: 5⁄16w 9⁄64 5⁄16 0.312 100 79455077 11.94 1⁄4 11⁄4 0.437 100 79455192 22.79
5⁄8 100 77432649 10.69 • Body dia.: 9⁄64w 9⁄64 3⁄8 0.312 100 79455085 11.94 1⁄4 11⁄2 0.437 100 79455200 24.96
3⁄4 100 77432656 12.05 9⁄64 1⁄2 0.312 100 79455093 11.94
2080 CALL MSC TODAY 800-645-7270 FOR ALL YOUR INDUSTRIAL NEEDS
Page 69
THREADED INSERTS
Threaded Inserts for Plastic & Wood
Flush Press Inserts for Plastic
Brass 303 Stainless Steel • Diamond knurled press inserts are designed to
replace molded-in inserts and threads in plastic
Internal Insert Start. Hole Drill Pkg. Pkg. • Cut reject waste caused by misaligned inserts
Thread Dia. (In.) L (In.) Size (In.) Size (In.) Qty. Order # Price/Pkg. Qty. Order # Price/Pkg. • Install cold
0-80 0.104 0.125 0.094 3⁄32 25 93442010 $7.57 • Install properly without a precise hole depth
2-56 0.135 0.156 0.125 1⁄8 50 93442028 8.19 25 09141979 $9.58
4-40 0.166 0.188 0.156 5⁄32 50 93442036 8.65 10 09141987 3.87 Flush Press Inserts for Plastic - Metric
6-32 0.199 0.250 0.188 3⁄16 50 85595262 8.97 10 09141995 3.94 Internal Insert Start. Hole Pkg. Brass
8-32 0.230 0.313 0.219 7⁄32 50 85595270 9.18 10 09142001 6.07 Thread Dia. (In.) L (In.) Sz. (In.) Qty. Order # Price/Pkg.
10-24 0.262 0.375 0.250 1⁄4 25 93442044 4.94 M3x0.5 0.166 0.188 0.156 50 85595197 $9.96
10-32 0.262 0.375 0.250 1⁄4 25 93442051 5.41 5 93442069 5.49 M3.5x0.6 0.199 0.250 0.188 50 85595189 9.96
1⁄4-20 0.326 0.500 0.313 5⁄16 25 85595304 7.98 5 93442077 6.41 M4x0.7 0.230 0.313 0.219 25 93441988 5.15
5⁄16-18 0.389 0.563 0.375 3⁄8 10 85595312 4.95 5 93442085 7.46 M5x0.8 0.262 0.375 0.250 25 93441996 6.56
3⁄8-16 0.451 0.625 0.438 7⁄16 10 85595320 5.61 5 93442093 9.38 M6x1.0 0.326 0.500 0.313 25 93442002 7.89
Flush Die Cast Zinc Hex Drive Inserts for Wood Flanged Die Cast Zinc Hex Drive Inserts for Wood - Metric Flush Die Cast Zinc Hex Drive Inserts for Wood - Metric
Internal L Hole Hex Pkg. Internal L Hole Hex Pkg. Price/ Internal L Hole Hex Pkg. Price/
Thread (In.) Size (In.) Size Qty. Order # Price/Pkg. Thread (mm) Sz. (mm) Size Qty. Order # Pkg. Thread (mm) Sz. (mm) Size Qty. Order # Pkg.
8-32 0.400 .250 M4 100 09142290 $11.48 M6x1.0 13 9 M6 50 93442374 $4.26 M6x1.0 13 9 M6 50 93442317 $4.12
10-24 0.500 0.277 M5 50 09142308 7.84 M6x1.0 20 9 M6 50 09142407 7.52 M6x1.0 20 9 M6 50 09142282 7.91
10-32 0.500 0.277 M5 50 09142316 7.91 M8x1.25 13 11 M8 25 93442382 3.47 M8x1.25 13 11 M8 25 93442325 3.39
1⁄4-20 0.500 0.363 M6 100 09142324 10.88 M8x1.25 20 11 M8 25 93442390 4.56 M8x1.25 20 11 M8 25 93442333 4.56
1⁄4-20 0.789 0.359 M6 50 93442341 5.15
5⁄16-18 0.789 0.453 M8 50 93442358 9.13 • Superior holding power in hard woods
5⁄16-18 0.984 0.453 M8 25 93442366 4.85 • Use wherever field assembly could cause thread erosion or stripping
• Long pilot ensures straight driving
Knife Thread Insert for Wood • Install with screwdriver, bolt and nut or drive tool
Internal Major Dia. Hole Pkg. Internal Major Dia. Hole Pkg.
Thread Ext. Thd. (In.) L (In.) Size (In.) Qty. Order # Price/Pkg. Thread Ext. Thd. (In.) L (In.) Size (In.) Qty. Order # Price/Pkg. Knife Thread Insert for Wood - Metric
Brass 5⁄16-18 0.600 0.625 1⁄2 10 93442275 $5.47 Major Hole
4-40 0.350 0.375 1⁄4 25 93442218 $6.52 5⁄16-24 0.600 0.625 1⁄2 10 93442283 5.47 Internal Dia. Ext. Size Pkg. Brass
6-32 0.350 0.375 1⁄4 25 88695762 6.52 3⁄8-16 0.600 0.625 1⁄2 10 93442291 6.12 Thread Thd. (In.) L (In.) (In.) Qty. Order # Price/Pkg.
8-32 0.350 0.375 1⁄4 25 93442226 6.52 3⁄8-24 0.600 0.625 1⁄2 10 93442309 6.12 M3x0.5 0.350 0.375 1⁄4 10 93442168 $2.72
10-24 0.453 0.500 3⁄8 25 93442234 8.20 303 Stainless Steel M4x0.7 0.350 0.375 1⁄4 10 93442176 2.72
10-32 0.453 0.500 3⁄8 25 93442242 8.20 8-32 0.350 0.375 1⁄4 10 09142217 23.77 M5x0.8 0.453 0.500 3⁄8 10 93442184 3.41
1⁄4-20 0.453 0.500 3⁄8 25 93442259 8.99 10-24 0.453 0.500 3⁄8 10 09142225 32.68 M6x1.0 0.453 0.500 ⁄8 10 3 93442192 3.73
1⁄4-28 0.453 0.500 3⁄8 25 93442267 8.99 1⁄4-20 0.453 0.500 3⁄8 10 09142233 35.65 M8x1.25 0.600 0.625 ⁄2 10 1 93442200 5.68
2124 CALL MSC TODAY 800-645-7270 FOR ALL YOUR INDUSTRIAL NEEDS
SOCKETS TECHNICAL INFORMATION
Basics of...Sockets
Quality hand sockets are made from alloy steel with tight tolerances that permit a high strength, thin wall design for use on fasteners that are very close to
obstructions. Choosing the correct socket will maximize productivity when it comes to turning the nut or bolt.
There are several factors that must be considered when choosing the correct socket:
Inch (SAE) or Metric:
The SAE (Society of Automotive Engineers) established standards based on fractional sizes. Choosing the correct size or fit will cause less damage to fasteners and
apply the correct torque to your project.
Drive Size:
Should be determined by the amount of force that needs to be applied in the application and the accessibility of the fastener. For example, smaller fasteners and limited
space typically call for smaller drive sizes (1⁄4, 3⁄8”) whereas larger drive sizes (1⁄2, ¾ and 1”) are for larger fasteners where more leverage is required.
Point Size:
Represents the amount of points or corners on a fastener. The most common are 6 and 12 Point.
4 and 8 Point: primarily used on square fasteners.
6 Point: designed for use on 6 Point hex head fasteners and stubborn or worn bolts. They allow for a thinner wall thickness, giving the socket a
reduced overall diameter and making it easier to access recessed or tightly confined fasteners. Reduces fastener stripping since the area of
contact with the fastener is larger.
12 Point: easiest to position for rapid seating on 6 Point hex head fasteners, however 12 Point sockets can lead to rounding-off of seized or low
strength fasteners, making removal extremely difficult.
Overall Length: Sockets come in short, standard and deep lengths.
Types
Deep sockets are primarily used to reach into deep spaces or Power sockets are for use with power drivers such as nut
when a large portion of the bolt protrudes. They reduce the runners, multiple spindle machines and the like. Most have
need to use extensions. Available in 6 and 12 Point. magnetic properties. They are not for use with impact tools.
Universal Joints are flexible joints that fit in between a ratchet Drive Adapters are used to convert from one drive size to
and socket and allow the socket to access hard-to-reach another. For example, if the ratchet is a 3⁄8” drive (male) and
places. The female and male drive sizes on a U-Joint are the the socket is a ¼” drive (female), an adaptor from 3⁄8” female to
same. Available in ¼ to 1” drive sizes. ¼” male would be needed in order to use the ratchet and the
socket. Preferably for use going from a smaller to a larger
drive, not from larger to smaller.
Extensions Bars are used for extending a socket down into awkward Wobble Bars are an alternative to Extension Bars with a diamond shaped
recesses. Typical lengths are: 3, 6 and 9". Locking Extensions, head so sockets can be positioned at inconvenient angles. The diamond
which provide socket retention so the socket cannot be accidentally shape allows the socket to wobble slightly.
disengaged, are also available. Locking extensions have a quick
release feature.
NEVER USE A HAND SOCKET WITH A POWER TOOL; IMPACT SOCKETS ARE DESIGNED SPECIFICALLY FOR USE WITH POWER TOOLS.
2190 CALL MSC TODAY 800-645-7270 FOR ALL YOUR INDUSTRIAL NEEDS
Page 72
ADAPTERS, UNIVERSAL JOINTS & HEX KEY SETS
Ratcheting Drive Adapters 1⁄4, 3⁄8 & 1⁄2w Drive Locking Adapters
Inch Mfr’s Lifetime Warranty Inch
• Convert standard handles to ratcheting handles • Permit sockets to be securely locked to the
• Size for male and female ends are the same drive tool square
• Include hex key for easy locking into drive tool
Drive Female Male OAL • Knurl locking ring
Size (In.) Size (In.) Size (In.) (In.) Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea. • Black oxide finish 87027892
3⁄8 3⁄8 3⁄8 15⁄16 J5247 A95872537 $52.26 Drive Size (In.) OAL (In.) Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea.
1⁄2 1⁄2 1⁄2 221⁄32 J5447 A96019856 60.98
3⁄4 3⁄4 3⁄4 33⁄4 J5647 84967645 142.12 1⁄4 111⁄16 J4759BLS A87027892 $25.36
3⁄8 21⁄8 J5260-02BLS A87027918 27.90
1⁄2 3 J5460-02BLS A87027926 30.69
Ball-End Hex Keys: allow you to turn a fastener at an angle. Fold-up Tool Sets: gives the user convenient access to the
This will get into hard to reach places, and allows you to most commonly used hex sizes, and helps keep you from
remove or tighten a fastener quicker than with a conventional losing individual sizes. Ergonomic handle hex tools provide
hex key. extra comfort and slip resistance, without sacrificing strength.
Steel Fold-ups have the most compact handle.
Torx Keys: have star shaped tips, which fit into the
Torx fastener star shaped recess. The Torx drive T-Handle: supplied individually and in sets, they
system provides even greater surface contact provide greater leverage and greater reach and are
between the tool and the fastener, which provides also stackable. The bar style grip fits comfortably in
greater torque and less rounding of fasteners or tools. the hand and provides the greatest torque. The loop
style grip is most compact.
Tamper Resistant Torx Keys: used in applications where you
want to limit access to a fastener. The tamper resistant
fastener has a pin in the center of the socket, which keeps a Screwdriver Handle: supplied individually and in sets,
conventional key from getting in. The tamper resistant key has they are comfortable and turn easily. Often used in Page
a matching hole in the center of its tip. low torque applications such as electronics assembly.
Page 73 2231
Page 2241
Page 74
Page 2242
Page 75
2242 CALL MSC TODAY 800-645-7270 FOR ALL YOUR INDUSTRIAL NEEDS
WRENCHES TECHNICAL INFORMATION
Basics of...Wrenches
Adjustable
Open-ended wrench with an adjusting screw. Fits a wide range of nuts and bolts. Adjustable wrenches are one of the most
versatile types of tools, since the size can be changed by opening or closing the movable jaw using an adjustable toothed bar
system. Force should be applied by pulling (not pushing) so the load is always on the fixed jaw of the wrench. Adjustable
wrenches are commonly referred to as Crescent® wrenches.
Auto
Sometimes referred to as a “Monkey Wrench”. Adjustable Wrench with sliding jaw designed for flat service work.
Box
Closed-ended wrench completely surrounds the fastener for better torque. The 15° & 45° angle is designed for use when there
is some kind of an obstruction around the fastener. The angle allows the user to maintain a solid grip on wrench. Available in 6
& 12 point.
Combination
Features both open and closed ends for a variety of needs. This combination offers the advantage of having a box end for
applying more force and an open end for working more quickly. The box end’s 15° angle provides more handling space.
Available in 6 & 12 point.
Crowfoot
A Ratchet driven open-ended wrench best used to reach hard-to-access fasteners in tight spaces. Available
in standard or flare nut.
Engineers
Large open-ended wrench with head diameters measuring anywhere from 1w to 10w+, often used in such places
as trains and boiler rooms for very large fasteners.
Flare Nut
Flare-nut ends are straight, not angled and often used to work on pipe and tube fittings. The design makes them suitable for
fasteners and accessories that are made of soft metals, (i.e., brass and copper), whose structure could be damaged by a
regular open end wrench and where access with a box wrench is not possible. Available in 6 & 12 point.
Flex Head
Combination open-end (unless otherwise stated) and pivoting socket-end wrench to access hard-to-reach fasteners
Ignition
Open-end wrench for use in auto assembly, construction, fabrication, manufacturing, maintenance and engine repair. Thin
narrow jaws for better access in limited space. Offset 15° & 60°.
Open-End
Single or double ended wrench with an offset opening to allow access to fasteners in limited spaces. Necessary when there is
an obstruction directly above the fastener or on pipe joints where a pipe does not permit the use of a box end wrench.
Pipe
For loosening and tightening pipe fittings or gripping and turning threaded pipe. Wrenches have hook jaws with or without
serrated jaws (teeth) depending on grip requirements. (Pipe Wrenches can be found in the Plumbing Section – Refer to
Section 17 of Big Book)
Pump
Features a short handle and thin head section designed for close quarter work on pumps and valves (also referred to as a
service wrench)
Ratcheting
Any wrench with a ratcheting feature built into it. Available in Flat or Offset versions. These wrenches are not designed
for high torque but to move a fastener quickly. Available in 6 & 12 point.
Spanner
A wrench with a hook or pin at the end for adjusting collars, locknuts or rings, commonly used in material
handling and for specific machinery. Available in adjustable or fixed styles.
Spline
Spline wrenches offer the flexibility to turn 6 & 12 point as well as spline, square, E-Torx™ and slightly
worn/rounded fasteners.
14 Pc. Nut Driver & Screwdriver Set 7 Pc. Magnetic Tip Screwdriver Set
®
Slotted & Phillips Slotted & Phillips® Made in Germany
All blades are high quality steel, hardened and tempered Set Consists of:
for optimum performance. Plastic handles have • 1 - Insulated Magnetic Holder with 1⁄4w Hex Drive
patented spring device that holds blades firmly, yet • 3 - Slotted: 7⁄32w (5.5mm) x 1w, 1⁄4w (6.5mm) x 1w,
permits quick, easy insertion and removal. Regular 5⁄16w (8.0mm) x 1w
handles accommodate all blades, single and reversible. • 3 - Phillips®: #1 x 1w, #2 x 1w, #3 x 1w
• Supplied with tool wrap
Set Consists of: Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea.
• 1 - Regular Handle 38006 06649602 $19.68
• 9 - Nut Drivers: 3⁄16, 7⁄32, 1⁄4, 9⁄32, 5⁄16, 11⁄32, 3⁄8, 7⁄16, 1⁄2w Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea.
• 2 - Slotted Screwdrivers: 3⁄16, 1⁄4w
• 2 - Phillip® Screwdrivers: #1, #2 99-PR 88537014 $92.73
Zipper-Style Tool Cases
Heavy-duty zipper cases made from abrasion-, puncture-,
and tear-resistant Dupont Cordura® material. All models
have three exterior pockets or compartments and leather
wrapped handles. Black.
Cordura® is a registered trademark of the Dupont Corp.
All items ship from MSC stock except where noted.
W. Depth Ht. No. of Interior
(In.) (In.) (In.) Tool Pockets Order # Price Ea.
13.0 10 2 29 BU88537766 $123.53
14.0 13 2 27 BU88537774 156.35
15.0 11 3 47 BU88537782 172.25
18.0 13 3 22 BU88537790 194.58 Tools Not Included
2282 CALL MSC TODAY 800-645-7270 FOR ALL YOUR INDUSTRIAL NEEDS
PLIERS TECHNICAL INFORMATION
Basics of...Pliers
Pliers come in a wide variety of configurations but most can be classified into the following categories: diagonal, lineman’s, long nose, slip joint, groove joint,
end cutting, locking and specialty.
Diagonal: Only used for cutting. There are several different types but are typically classified into single and lap joint styles.
Lineman’s: (also known as side cutting pliers) are Tongue & Groove Joint: used for grasping and turning.
general use pliers used for cutting, gripping, twisting Commonly referred to as Channellock®, these pliers
and crimping. have a series of grooves in the joint which allows the
Combination: perform the same functions as user to adjust the width of the jaw opening.
lineman’s pliers but are thinner and have two different Commonly used in the plumbing and automotive
types of gripping jaws in the head. trades, these pliers are made with a wide variety of
different jaw configurations. Some types have
V-notch jaws which can grab and turn fasteners like a
wrench. The European market uses a similar type of
Slip Joint: are used for grasping and turning. These pliers called water pump pliers.
types of pliers have a two position joint which allows Water Pump: perform the same functions but typically
the use to adjust the jaw opening. have thinner and shorter jaws. These pliers also have
Hose Clamp: utilize the design of Slip Joint Pliers with multiple jaw positions but do not use interlocking
recesses in the jaws to install and remove wire spring grooves like groove joint pliers. Instead, they typically
tension clamps. have a series of serrated teeth or scallops in the joint
that intersect with a pin or gear.
Long Nose: used for grasping and bending small End Cutting Pliers: also known as pincer pliers or
objects. Many styles also have cutting jaws or nippers are used for cutting and prying. These pliers
stripper holes for removing insulation from small have “C” shaped cutting jaws that allow for flush
diameter wire. As the name implies they have a long cutting. In addition, these pliers have a rounded head
tapered nose which can be used to reach into areas which allows the user to grasp and pry out nails or
where space is limited. The jaws can be serrated or tacks much like one would use a claw hammer.
smooth depending on the intended application. Some
also have a bent nose at 45 or 90 ° to help reach
Locking: used for grasping and holding objects with
around objects in limited space applications.
an adjustable amount of force. There are several
Chain Nose: commonly referred to as long nose pliers varieties but most use a simple toggle link
that are typically shorter and thicker for increased mechanism with an adjustable pivot to set the
strength. clamping force. These types of pliers are commonly
referred to as ViseGrip®. They are made with a wide
Needle Nose: have longer and thinner heads for finer variety of different jaw configurations for specialty
work. uses such as welding, plumbing and wood working.
Specialty: are often application specific. Some examples include those used for installing or removing snap rings, cutting fiber optic cable, removing springs or
stripping wire insulation. There are many types of such pliers used in all industries and trades. A few are shown below:
2298 CALL MSC TODAY 800-645-7270 FOR ALL YOUR INDUSTRIAL NEEDS
Page 79
CHISELS & PUNCHES TECHNICAL INFORMATION
Hand Operated Bolt Cutters
General Purpose Cutters • Series 2000 bolt cutters - general purpose
• Drop-forged jaws with center-cut blades • Heat treated for wear resistance/long cutting life
OAL Replacement Cutterheads
• Lock plate keeps jaws from loosening
(In.) Cap. (In.) Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea. Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea.
• Cuts soft, medium/hard materials • Lightweight precision handles
14 1⁄4 Hard, 5⁄16 Medium 1490AC 06644033 $54.00 1413AC 06644009 $35.14 • Soft and medium-hard metals up to Brinell 200/Rockwell C15
18 1⁄4 Hard, 3⁄8 Medium 0090FC 05645734 158.22 0013C 06642458 80.32 • Medium-hard and hard metals up to Brinell 300/Rockwell C31
18 5⁄16 Hard, 3⁄8 Medium 0090AC 06644041 67.23 0013AC 06644017 38.64
24 5⁄16 Hard, 7⁄16 Medium 0190FC 05645866 201.01 0013C 06642458 80.32
24 3⁄8 Hard, 7⁄16 Medium 0190AC 06644058 94.19 0113AC 06644025 39.49
30 3⁄8 Hard, 1⁄2 Medium 0290FC 03083300 234.96 0213C 06642474 120.32
36 7⁄16 Hard, 9⁄16 Medium 0390FC 67816694 282.50 0313C 06642482 140.77 06644058 End View
MASONRY METAL
Cape: for cutting or grooving keyholes or slots
Masonry: for cutting, scoring and shaping
cinder block, cement, brick and stone Cold: for cutting, shaping and removing metal
softer than the cutting edge of the chisel
Diamond Point: for weld cleaning and making
Hexagon-Joint: for clearing and cutting block V-shaped grooves in metal
joints and brick
Half Round Nose (Gouge): for weld cleaning
and cutting grooves in metal
Rivet: for making V-Shaped grooves in metal
Brick Set: for scoring and trimming masonry and removing bolts and rivet heads
bricks and concrete blocks
WOOD & WALLBOARD
Floor: thin cutting blade for rough cutting and
Bull Point: for breaking up concrete or wood trim. Can be used as a pry bar for
masonry tongue and groove floors.
Ripping: for rough cutting or removing hard
and soft wood
Flat Utility: all-around utility chisel for cutting,
scraping and sizing masonry Electricians: wide blade for rough cutting
wallboard and wood
Punches
Aligning: for aligning holes in two or more Pin: for driving out and removing already
pieces through which rivets or bolts can be loosened pins and keys after the initial
inserted movement by a solid punch
Automatic Center: eliminates the need for a Prick: for scribing lines into metal before
hammer cutting or riveting
Center Punch: for piercing and marking or for Starting (Solid): for loosening frozen or tight
starting drills in metal and other materials pins and knocking out rivets
Drift: for installing and removing pins and shafts. Also used to align holes in two or more pieces. Brass drift punches are designed
to prevent damage to the object being struck. Page
Page 80 2324
2324 CALL MSC TODAY 800-645-7270 FOR ALL YOUR INDUSTRIAL NEEDS
HAMMERS TECHNICAL INFORMATION
Basics of...Hammers
Always choose the proper tool for the job. Hammers, mallets and other striking tools are among the most common hand tools around; they come in many types and
sizes (hammers are sized by weight) depending on the specific design of their use. Some important things to consider when selecting a hammer:
Selection Criteria
Bevel: a bevel allows hammer claws to easily slip under nail heads that are either embedded or just close to the surface. A bevel or chamfer on the striking face will
reduce the chance of chipping or damaging the face, making the hammer safer to use.
Handles & Grips: higher quality wooden handles are hickory and ergonomically shaped. Fiberglass and tubular steel hammers should include a vinyl or plastic grip
molded to the handle to prevent slipping. Solid steel handles should feature an air-cushioned grip for shock absorption.
Hardness: forged steel heads are best for strength, while heat-treated heads ensure a hammer’s durability and wear resistance.
Head Components
Claw: may appear curved or straight depending on the type of hammer selected. A curved-claw hammer will provide greater leverage for removing nails, while a rip or
straight claw design is better suited for demolition work.
Eye: should provide a secure head to handle assembly when manufactured separately. Today however, many hammers are forged from one-piece of steel, eliminating
any chance for the head to separate from the handle.
Face: typically considered the business end of the tool. Quality hammers will provide a larger striking surface (a.k.a. “face-space”) than hammers of equivalent weight
for surer strikes and easier, quicker nail driving.
Poll & Neck: absorbs the impact of each strike. Quality hammers incorporate a hot forge, heat treating process to insure exact tempering of the steel to produce a
durable, high performance tool.
Contractor & Machinist Hammers
Claw Replaceable Face
• Used for general woodworking • Faces are made of a variety of materials including tough
• Curved claw provides better leverage when removing nails plastic, nylon, urethane, copper and rawhide
• Straight or rip claw are primarily used in heavy or professional carpentry for • These different materials are used in applications that
ripping and framing work require a non-marring effect on various surfaces
• In many quality hammers, the plastic faces are
Nailing replaceable
• 20 oz. or less • Applications that require non-marring blows, such as
• Less than 13 ½” in length automotive, jewelry work or furniture assembly, soft
• Curved, Straight or Rip Claw faced hammers should be used
• Fiberglass / Wood / or Graphite Handle or
one-piece Forged Steel
Standard Soft Faced
Framing
• Steel shot in head for dead blow feature
• More than 16” in length
• Non-sparking, non-marring
• 10 oz. or more
• Commonly refered to as Stanley® Compo-Cast®
• Plain or Checkered Face
• Rip Claw
• One-piece Forged Steel or Wood
Handle
Demolition Hammers
Blacksmith Engineer
• Designed specifically for metal work, but work well for most • Similar to drilling hammers, in as much as they are designed for
HARD-HITTING applications HARD-HITTING applications. However, these hammers are slightly
• The key difference between Blacksmith Hammers and other Demolition heavier; ranging from 2.5 to 4 lbs.
hammers is the unique shape of the head • Longer handle for extended striking applications in open areas
Drilling
• Intended for HARD-HITTING in confined spaces Sledge
• Compact and extremely durable • Large, heavy hammers designed for jobs where great force is required,
• Drilling hammers are forged with hardened & tempered steel heads i.e. driving stakes, fence posts, cement demolition
• Typically available in 2 to 3 lbs. • Octagonal head with flat face
Safety Orange
• Bolt cutters certified nonconductive to 1000 Volts
• 100% Tested to 10,000 volts
• Individually serial numbered for traceability 1000V Insulated Hacksaw Frame
• Handles made of continuous strand 71307250
fiberglass with ergonomic grips
• Jaws are forged compound hinge • 2 Blade positions
• Meet or exceed ASTM F1505 and IEC 60900 standards • Butterfly tensioner
• Bi-metal blade (included)
OAL (In.) Capacity Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea. • Frame for 300mm blade
18 3⁄8w (8.3mm) Medium-hard Bolt 76701 A71307250 $197.13
24 7⁄16w (11mm) Medium-hard Bolt 76702 A71307276 254.60 Blade L (In.) Handle Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea.
30 1⁄2w (13mm) Medium-hard Bolt 76703 A71307284 335.35 12 Ergonomically Designed D-Style FT-602.AVSE 82642497 $143.42
Retractable: a good choice for general use; offer the convenience of being able to quickly adjust the cutting depth of the blade. Plus
they offer the safety of allowing the blade to be retracted completely into the handle when not in use.
Fixed: blades lock into a fixed, non-retractable position between the halves of the knife handle. This improves blade stability in severe
cutting applications and allows the knife to accept special-purpose blades that are too large to retract into the handle.
Snap-off: built around a blade designed to snap off or break away in sections, providing a fresh, sharp cutting point without having to
open the knife. These knives are a good choice for light- and medium-duty applications, or when adhesive materials like packing tape
leave a residue on the blade.
2370 CALL MSC TODAY 800-645-7270 FOR ALL YOUR INDUSTRIAL NEEDS
POCKET KNIVES
Pocket Knives
2376 CALL MSC TODAY 800-645-7270 FOR ALL YOUR INDUSTRIAL NEEDS
SCISSORS & SHEARS
Lightweight Scissors
Fiskars
• Ergonomic and lightweight
• Stainless steel blades
• Used for a wide variety of applications
• Ambidextrous handles 73531378 73530693
00144303
• TiN coating helps resist scratches, wear and corrosion
OAL LOC Handle Handle Fiskars
(In.) (In.) Desc. Type Material Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea.
4 1 Mini Craft Straight Plastic 95077097 00144303 $11.96
79457602
51⁄2 11⁄2 Detail Cutting Straight Contoured Plastic 01-004681 A73531378 4.64 73530701
5 15⁄8 Micro-Tip® Straight Softtouch® 99216984 00144402 13.90
5 13⁄4 Micro-Tip® Straight Plastic 94817096 00144295 11.96
5 13⁄4 Nonstick Straight Plastic 99947097 04324521 12.47
8 13⁄4 Micro-Tip Scissor Straight Plastic/Softgrip 98887097 79457602 14.52
51⁄4 2 Compact Straight Plastic 01-005042 A73530057 2.54 73530768
5 2 Blunt Tip Double Thumb Loop Plastic 94917097 07430465 6.53 73530057
61⁄2 23⁄8 All Purpose Straight Plastic 94597797 A73531287 10.13
8 23⁄8 Micro-Tip Scissor Straight Plastic/Softgrip 94767097 79457594 16.54
7 21⁄2 All Purpose Straight Contoured Plastic 01-005037 A73531386 5.06
63⁄4 23⁄4 All Purpose Straight Double Thumb 94597097 08567042 12.06
81⁄2 3 Softgrip Scissors Straight Contoured Plastic 01-004761 A73532798 6.32 07430465 77209815
10 31⁄8 Multi-Purpose Shear Straight Softtouch® 99117097 00144386 18.72
8 31⁄2 All Purpose Offset Plastic 10007097 08097263 7.19
81⁄4 31⁄2 All Purpose Bent Plastic 01-004250 A73530685 5.49
81⁄8 31⁄2 All Purpose Straight Plastic 01-004253 A73530693 3.38
81⁄2 31⁄2 All Purpose Bent Plastic 01-004254 A73530701 3.38 73531287 08567000
81⁄2 31⁄2 Razor Edge Bent Plastic 12-75807097 A73530768 20.84
81⁄4 31⁄2 All Purpose Bent Ergonomic Plastic 94517397 A77209815 13.59
8 31⁄2 Multi-Purpose Straight Contoured Plastic 34527797 08567000 11.32
81⁄2 31⁄2 Razor Edged™ Straight Ergonomic 94547097 08567034 21.94
81⁄2 35⁄8 Nonstick General Purpose Bent Plastic 99977097 04324513 16.33
8 33⁄4 Softgrip Scissors Straight Plastic/Softgrip 12-98807797 79457586 16.33 79457594 08567034
12 41⁄8 Shop Shears Straight Softtouch® 79296984 00144378 26.40
93⁄4 41⁄2 All Purpose Bent Ergonomic Reinforced Plastic 94417097 A76510510 20.68
9 41⁄2 Razor Edged™ Shear Straight Ergonomic 94466984 00144253 26.16
91⁄2 41⁄2 Serrated w/Cutting Notch Bent Plastic 96526984 00144246 20.17 79457586
93⁄4 41⁄2 Bent Bent HD Contoured 94416297 08567018 21.13 73531386
Heritage
General Purpose 84385319
• Stainless steel blades precision ground and heat treated
• Ambidextrous handles 08567042 76510510
• Soft to the touch blue handles
OAL LOC Handle Handle Heritage
(In.) (In.) Desc. Type Material Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea.
10 43⁄4 Heavy-Duty Bent Large Loop Plastic 7310 84385319 $16.03 73532798 08567018
12 51⁄2 Heavy-Duty Big Loop Plastic 7312 84385327 16.15
2382 CALL MSC TODAY 800-645-7270 FOR ALL YOUR INDUSTRIAL NEEDS
SNIPS TECHNICAL INFORMATION & SNIPS
Basics of...Snips
Snips are available in a wide variety of models and versions for numerous industrial cutting and do-it-yourself applications. Snips are indispensable to maintenance
specialists and industrial workers in the sheetmetal, appliance, aircraft, automotive, electrical and construction industries.
Compound Action Snips
Allows a margin of strength far above the limit of hand power that can be exerted. Originally developed for cutting the extremely tough alloys used in the aircraft
industry (hence the nickname aviation snips), they are the favorite of most craftsmen who work with metal. Compound Action Snips are available in various versions:
• Bulldog: feature a shorter jaw design that withstands the strain of cutting heavy stock and tight curves
• Left Cutting: cutting left from tight curves to straight
• Right Cutting: cutting right from tight curves to straight
• Offset Jaw: help keep the users hand up and clear of the material being cut
• Pipe and Duct: for cutting any shape ducts, seams, sheet metal stock, vinyl tiles and plastic laminates
• Straight Cutting: for cutting left or right and straight into light stock Straight Offset
• Special Series: feature specially hardened jaws for cutting exotic metals
Tinners Snips
For cutting straight lines as well as curves, generally when cutting resistance is low. Traditional tools of the sheet metal, plumbing, heating, air conditioning and roofing
trades. These snips are available in various versions:
• Duckbill Pattern: for cutting tighter curves as well as straight
• Offset/Bent Pattern: feature offset blades that help keep the users hand up and clear of the material
being cut
• Straight Pattern: for cutting straight and wide curves as the flat face of the jaws guide the tool along a Duckbill Straight
straight line
Aviation Snips
NuLine Mfr’s Lifetime Warranty: Clauss
Wiss
• Drop forged chrome molybdenum alloy steel • Blades have serrated edges
• Cuts up to .050w cold rolled steel or .028w stainless steel • Metalmaster® Compound Action Snips have nonslip serrated
jaws made of extra tough wear resistant molybdenum steel
OAL (In.) LOC (In.) Cuts Grip Color Order # Price Ea. • Withstands severe strain of cutting heavy stock and tight curves
10 13⁄8 Left Red 09959818 $15.30 • Self-opening action for fast, effortless feed
06642508
10 13⁄8 Right Green 09959826 15.30 • Handle of high tensile strength alloy
10 13⁄8 Straight Yellow 09959834 15.30 steel exceeds hand power limit
09959818 • Nonslip textured grips for superior control, safety
Set and comfort
No. of Pcs. OAL (In.) LOC (In.) Cuts Grip Color Order # Price Ea. OAL LOC Grip
(In.) (In.) Cuts Color Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea. 06642557
3 10 13⁄8 Left, Right and Straight Red, Green and Yellow 53463055 $37.91
93⁄4 13⁄8 Left Red M1R 06642508 $20.06
Offset 93⁄4 13⁄8 Right Green M2R 06642557 20.06
• Offset blades for safety 93⁄4 13⁄8 Straight Yellow M3R 06642607 20.06
OAL (In.) LOC (In.) Cuts Grip Color Order # Price Ea.
General Purpose 06642607
93⁄4 11⁄4 Left Red 09959883 $15.58 09959883 • Spring-loaded blades for reduced fatigue on repeated cuts
93⁄4 11⁄4 Right Green 09959891 15.58 • Soft-touch co-molded handles for maximum comfort
• 420 Stainless blades provide maximum corrosion resistance
• Wire cutter notch for easy cutting of light-gauge wire
• Gauge Capacity (Steel): 0.0376 91874909
Long-Cut • Heavy-duty design is perfect for shop, garden and craft cutting jobs
• Cuts up to .0376w cold rolled steel or .0212w stainless steel OAL LOC
OAL (In.) LOC (In.) Cuts Grip Color Order # Price Ea. (In.) (In.) Cuts Grip Color Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea.
10 3 Straight Yellow 09959842 $18.40 09959842 9 21⁄2 Straight Red & Black WEZSNIP 91874909 $10.95
Heavy-Duty Offset
• Cuts up to .024w stainless steel • Offset design keeps hands clear of metal
OAL (In.) LOC (In.) Cuts Grip Color Order # Price Ea. OAL LOC Grip
(In.) (In.) Cuts Color Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea.
10 11⁄2 Left Black 09959859 $17.84
10 11⁄2 Right Black 09959867 17.84 91⁄4 11⁄4 Left Red M-6R 06642946 $26.16
10 11⁄2 Straight Black 09959875 17.84 09959875 91⁄4 11⁄4 Right Green M-7R 06642953 26.16 06642946
Continued on next page
2388 CALL MSC TODAY 800-645-7270 FOR ALL YOUR INDUSTRIAL NEEDS
HANDSAWS TECHNICAL INFORMATION & HANDSAWS
Basics of...Handsaws
Handsaws are generally for woodcutting, while Hacksaws are generally for cutting metal.
Hacksaws: handles are a D handle or pistol grip,
frames are available in different types:
Handsaws: available in different blade lengths for
• Fixed: single piece metal bridge uses only one size specific needs. Handles are generally made of wood
blade or composite materials, typically with a D handle grip.
• Adjustable: adjustable metal bridge accepts different Pistol Grip
size blades
Jeweler’s Saws: adjustable steel framed saw used to
• High Tension: features an adjustable frame that
make cuts in harder materials such as precious
prevents the twisting and binding of the blade when
metals. Lever pins in the frame turn to change the
bearing down
D Handle position of the blade.
Handsaws
Irwin Marathon Mfr’s Lifetime Warranty: Stanley
Stanley
Standard Panel Saws
• M2™ Tooth Technology: advanced tooth geometry and Tri-Ground™ teeth provide a fast, efficient cut • Mfr’s #20-222 & 20-526: Saw blade
• Deep Gullets™ provide rapid removal of chips • Thick-Body™ Blade: delivers rigidity and control made of steel with induction-hardened
• Tapered-Pitch™ nose improves clearance and stability teeth for long lasting sharpness
• Mfr’s #15-335, 15-775, 15-726: Saw
ProTouch™ blade made of steel with resharpenable, 06565188
• Same features as above plus ergonomic handle design provides durability and comfort machined set teeth
Blade • Mfr’s #20-222, 15-335, 20-526: SharpTooth™ Saw Technology uses an aggressive
L (In.) TPI Application Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea. three-sided tooth design that gives three cutting surfaces to cut 50% faster than
Standard conventional Stanley® handsaws
15 9 Wood 2011102 88427398 $16.67 • Mfr’s #20-222 & 20-526: Ergonomically designed handle is made out of high-impact
20 9 Wood 2011104 88427406 20.21 88427406 polypropylene and a textured rubber grip over mold to provide comfort and a slip
resistant grip
ProTouch • Mfr’s #20-222, 15-335, 15-775, 15-726: Handle design allows for the back of the saw
15 9 Wood 2011201 88427422 22.59 blade to be used for making 45° and 90° angles
15 12 Wood 2011200 88427414 21.41
20 9 Wood 2011204 88427455 26.16 Blade L (In.) TPI Application Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea.
24 9 Wood 2011203 88427448 28.52 Heavy-Duty Saws w/Wood Handle
24 12 Wood 2011202 88427430 27.36 15 9 Wood/Drywall Cutting 15-085 07119886 $18.83
88427422 20 9 Wood/Plasterboard/MDF 15-087 74353699 26.20
15 9 Wood/Drywall 20-222 A84257377 17.30
Heavy-Duty Saws w/Wood Handle - Resharpenable
Nicholson 15 9 Wood/PVC/ABS Pipe 15-334 06565188 22.27
Economy Quik-Cut 20 9 Wood/Drywall 15-335 A09099664 31.11
• Precision set teeth for smooth cuts
• Hardened and tempered polished steel blades with resharpenable teeth for long life Fine Finish Saw w/Wood Handle
• Impact resistant plastic handle has mitre features for marking angles 26 12 Wood/PVC/ABS Pipe 20-065 01260611 35.33
Fine Finish Saws w/Cushion Grip
Blade 15 12 Wood, Plastic, Wood Flooring, Finish 20-526 A80377807 14.44
L (In.) TPI Application Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea. Work, Crown Molding
15 8 Wood/Plastic NS503 07070543 $8.17 20 12 Wood/Plastic 20-527 73038440 26.58
General Purpose Saw w/Plastic Handle
15 9 Wood/Plastic 15-579 07119894 11.92
General Purpose Saws w/ Plastic Handle - Resharpenable
Professional Handsaw 20 8 General Purpose - Wood, Drywall, 15-775 A84224468 8.25
• Precision set teeth for smooth cuts Framing, and Roofing
• Hardened and tempered polished steel blades 26 8 Wood/Drywall 15-726 A04381091 7.75
with resharpenable teeth for long life
• Hardwood handle
FatMax™ Panel Saws
Blade L (In.) TPI Application Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea. • Saw blade is 15% thicker than
conventional saws for straighter cuts
24 8 Wood/Plastic NS1501 07070519 $19.20 and less binding
• SharpTooth™ Saw Technology uses an 79753943
aggressive three-sided tooth design that gives three cutting surfaces to cut 50%
®
faster than conventional Stanley handsaws
Stanley • Ergonomically designed handle made out of wood
• Textured rubber grip over mold to provide comfort and slip resistant grip
FatMax™ Flooring Saw • Handle design allows for back of saw blade to be used for making 45° and 90° angles
• Lacquered blade for corrosion protection • BladeArmor™ composite coating helps to protect the blade with 2x more rust
• Ground teeth on nose for plunge cuts protection, 6x more abrasion protection and 50% less friction when compared to
• Ergonomically designed handle made out Stanley lacquered saws
of high-impact polypropylene
• Textured rubber grip over mold to Blade L (In.) TPI Application Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea.
41853102
provide comfort and slip resistant grip 15 9 Wood/Plastic 20-045 67379479 $26.48
Blade L (In.) TPI Application Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea. w/Bladearmor™ Coating
12 14 Wood 17-204 41853102 $19.28 15 9 Wood/Drywall 20-046 09447103 25.85
20 9 Wood/Drywall 20-047 79753943 28.98
SharpTooth™ Drywall Saw FatMax™ Back/Miter Box Saws
• Lacquered blade for corrosion protection • Lacquered blade for corrosion protection
• SharpTooth™ Saw Technology uses an aggressive three-sided tooth design that gives • SharpTooth™ Saw Technology uses an aggressive three-sided tooth design that gives
three cutting surfaces to cut 50% faster than conventional Stanley® handsaws three cutting surfaces to cut 50% faster than conventional Stanley® handsaws
• Unique tooth design reduces burring • Saw stop prevents base damage to miter box
• Ergonomically designed handle made out of high-impact polypropylene • Ergonomically designed handle made out of high-impact polypropylene
• Textured rubber grip over mold to provide comfort and slip resistant grip • Textured rubber grip over mold to provide comfort and slip resistant grip
Blade L (In.) TPI Application Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea. Blade L (In.) TPI Application Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea.
15 9 Abrasive Drywall 15-025 04209623 $18.86 14 14 Wood/Plastic 17-202 41853094 $17.03
2390 CALL MSC TODAY 800-645-7270 FOR ALL YOUR INDUSTRIAL NEEDS
CORDLESS FLASHLIGHTS & WORK LIGHTS
36V Cordless Flashlight Heavy-Duty Cordless/
Corded Work Light
• Flex-neck design allows for hands-free use and versatility to stand or • 38W Fluorescent worklight runs on 12-18V NiCd, NiMH or Li-Ion DeWalt
hang the light batteries or AC power source
• Wide angle beam of light is brighter than conventional flashlights • Provides area lighting without the extreme heat of halogen lighting
• Runs on 36V high performance batteries for long run-time and battery life • Power outlets offer jobsite versatility
• Xenon bulbs provide an extra bright beam of light • Spring loaded battery receptacle keeps batteries in place during transport
• 8 Hours run-time on 1 charge • Compact design for quick and easy fold-up, transport and storage
• Battery and charger not included • Lumens: 2700 • Run time: 1 hour on 18V DC9096 battery
Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea. Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea.
DC509 76145127 $73.77 DC020 08162901 $118.34
Work Light with GFCI & Charger M12™ & M18™ Cordless Work Lights
• 2D 38W fluorescent light and GFCI protection with • M12 Work light equipped with 90° pivoting head and integrated magnet
dual port power tool battery charger • Run time: 1.5 hours for both
• Compact, fold-up design features durable base • For 12V replacement battery, Order #09351420
and is easy to hang for wall use • M12 equipped with 135° rotating head and foldaway utility back
• Built-in cord wrap • 3 GFCI outlets • For 18V replacement battery, Order 89868822
• Convenient 3 tools in 1: corded/cordless light,
GFCI outlet and charger for cordless batteries Volts Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea.
Charger Input Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea. 12 49-24-0145 71863864 $28.32 49-24-0145 49-24-0171
18 49-24-0171 71863872 57.52
Dual Port DC022 09233388 $211.89
2468 NOTE: DO NOT USE HAND TOOL ACCESSORIES IN POWER DRIVEN PRODUCTS. CONTACT MSC @ 800-645-7270
Page 89
ELECTRIC RECIPROCATING SAWS & TECHNICAL INFORMATION
Magnetic Socket Drivers Driver Sets
• Hardened core for extra strength • Quickly change among 6 drivers to increase speed
OAL Insert • Store all 6 drivers in 1 holder • Include most common geometries
(In.) Size (In.) Desc. Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea. DW2330 Consists of: DW2336 Consists of:
17⁄8 1⁄4 Socket Driver DW2218B 80485543 $3.69 • Phillips® #2/slotted #8 • (2) Intermediate tubes
17⁄8 5⁄16 Socket Driver DW2219B 80485568 3.78 Socket Driver • Square #2/square #1 • Phillips® #1/Phillips® square
29⁄16 1⁄4 Socket Driver DW2221B 80485626 3.48 • 1⁄4w Nutsetter • Torx #15/Torx #20 • Square #1/square #2
29⁄16 5⁄16 Socket Driver DW2222B 80485634 3.59 • 5⁄16w Nutsetter • Phillips® #2/slotted #8 • Holder
29⁄16 3⁄8 Socket Driver DW2223B 80485642 3.70 Desc. Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea.
29⁄16 — Acoustic Eyelag DW2225 02764520 7.20 Acoustic Eyelag
6-In-1 Driver 4 Pc. Set DW2330 06762876 $16.19
6-In-1 Driver 7 Pc. Set DW2336 06762884 21.06 DW2336
2484 NOTE: DO NOT USE HAND TOOL ACCESSORIES IN POWER DRIVEN PRODUCTS. CONTACT MSC @ 800-645-7270
STAPLERS, STAPLES, NAILS & TECHNICAL INFORMATION
Upholstery Stapler & Staples 1w & 11⁄2w Narrow Crown
Stapler Kits & Staples
US58 - 22 Ga., 3⁄8w Upholstery Stapler Kit
• Drives 18 gauge staples with 1⁄4w crown
• Uses SENCO “C” type, 22 gauge, 3⁄8 crown staples for 1⁄4w to 5⁄8w long • Split nose design for easy removal of jammed staples
• 3⁄4w Nose extension for limited clearance fastening
• Long life, maintenance-free motor prevents work surface staining
• Steel cap for durability • Holds 185 staples • Internal piston catch for consistent power on every shot
• Operating pressure: 70 - 120 psi • Weight: 13⁄4 Lbs. • Rear exhaust keeps contaminants away from work
Upholstery Stapler • Selectable trigger has restrictive or contact activation mode
• Integrated rubber grip for improved comfort
Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea. • Special hardened driver blade and strong, lightweight die-cast
US58 01916600 $114.50 aluminum body
• Capacity: 100 staples • Fastener size: 18 Gauge
Staples • Operating pressure: 70-120 psi 84546282
L (In.) Mfr’s # Order # Price/Pkg. Fastener L (In.)
Min. Max. Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea. Kits Include:
1⁄2 PUS12G A81149692 $8.04 • Stapler • 1000 #18g 1w staples
5⁄8 PUS58G A81149718 9.02 1⁄2 1 NS100B 84546282 $118.16 • 1⁄4w fitting • Safety glasses
3⁄8 PUS38G A81149700 7.71 • 10,000 Per box • 22 Gauge
1⁄2 11⁄2 NS150B 84546308 140.64 • Carrying case
Narrow Crown Staples
• 18 Gauge • Galvanized steel • 1⁄4w Crown width 74964255
L Pkg. L Pkg.
(In.) Qty. Mfr’s # Order # Price/Pkg. (In.) Qty. Mfr’s # Order # Price/Pkg.
1⁄2 5000 PNS18050 A74964255 $9.93 1 5000 PNS18100 A74964297 $12.37
5⁄8 5000 PNS18063 A74964263 13.97 11⁄4 5000 PNS18125 A74963539 14.72
3⁄4 5000 PNS18075 A74963521 14.72 11⁄2 5000 PNS18150 A74964339 15.15
7⁄8 5000 PNS18088 A74964271 16.05
2532 NOTE: AIR TOOLS SHOULD BE OILED EACH DAY BEFORE USE. FAILURE TO DO SO WILL VOID WARRANTY. CONTACT MSC @ 800-645-7270
Page 91
TECHNICAL INFORMATION & PNEUMATIC GRINDERS
NOTE: AIR TOOLS SHOULD BE OILED EACH DAY BEFORE USE. FAILURE TO DO SO WILL VOID WARRANTY. CONTACT MSC @ 800-645-7270 2533
PNEUMATIC RATCHETS, NUTRUNNERS & TECHNICAL INFORMATION
Pneumatic 3⁄8w & 1⁄2w High Speed Pneumatic Pulse Tools
Quiet Ratchets
• 3x Increase between oil changes to minimize maintenance
• Quiet operation at 84 dBa • 3 Chamber air motor increases torque and lowers cycle time
• New TriSpring™ anti-slip head design • Inertial shut-off system simplifies pulse unit and removes
which virtually eliminates slippage variability due to pulse fluid
• Ergonomic grip • Easy setup • 90 psi • Inlet size: 1⁄4w
• 360° Adjustable exhaust Drive Max. Max.Torque 02135549
• Easy touch variable speed trigger for speed Size (In.) Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea. RPM CFM (Ft./Lbs.) Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea.
control on all types of work
3⁄8 CP7828 02978773 $171.69 6000 23 40 55PTHD603 02135598 $2524.72
• RPM: 240 • Max. torque: 60 Ft./Lbs. 1⁄2
• CFM: 4 • Inlet size: 1⁄4w CP7828H 02978781 175.77 6500 19 25 35PTHD653 02135549 2277.61
• 1700 IPM • 90 psi • Comes with detachable belt clip • Reversible • Front exhaust directs air away from operator
Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea. • Lever throttle • Steel housing for long life
• Extended tool length provides increased leverage
MP2266 81779258 $429.72
Mfr’s # OAL (In.) Order # Price Ea.
UT2010 141⁄2 09840901 $191.15
3⁄8w Pneumatic Production Nutrunners
NOTE: AIR TOOLS SHOULD BE OILED EACH DAY BEFORE USE. FAILURE TO DO SO WILL VOID WARRANTY. CONTACT MSC @ 800-645-7270 2551
Page 93
PNEUMATIC SCREWDRIVERS & TORQUE GUIDE
SA054C • Well suited for production line assemblies • Convenient one-handed operation
• Full ranges of speed, torque and clutch for a variety of applications
• Balanced design offers easy handling and control to reduce operator fatigue
• Maximum parts interchangeability • Pistol grip handles • Air inlet: 1⁄4w
• Direct drive: rotates fastener until resistance overcomes motor power and motor stalls, torque
is set by adjusting air pressure
• Versa Clutch™ allows operator to externally adjust clutch plates providing full range of torque
Clutch Type RPM Torque (In./Lbs.) Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea.
SG052B-17-Q SG053B-17-Q Adjustable 1100 17 - 140 MP2478 79026407 $364.19
SG051B-10-Q
Adjustable 1800 30-100 MP2477 08806663 353.80
Positive Clutch: For soft draw applications. Allows motor to run without bit turning until Adjustable 2800 12 - 75 MP2476 79026399 367.41
pressure is applied. Torque pressure is determined by the force applied by the operator Direct Drive 1100 52 - 70 MP2454 79026365 270.73
and the ratchet time.
Direct Drive 1800 75 MP2453 74118746 242.33
• All are reversible • Use 5⁄16w hose size • Air Inlet NPTF 1⁄4w Direct Drive 2800 30 - 65 MP2452 00711929 266.42
Style Type L (In.) RPM Torque CFM Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea. Positive 1100 85 - 140 MP2466 79026381 293.28
Positive 1800 54 - 120 MP2465SR 79026373 295.44
Pistol Woodworking 6.6 1800 6.2 27 7672-A18 05956560 $307.14
Inline Shut Off 10.25 1000 15-80 25 SA054C-10-Q 05956578 1041.29 Positive 2800 75 MP2464 79465985 261.83
Inline Shut Off 10.25 800 15-100 25 SA054C-8-Q 05956586 1041.29 Versa Clutch™ 1100 5-140 MP2437 03896123 391.06
Versa Clutch™ 1800 17-100 MP2436 05073317 323.37
Pistol Stall 8.9 1000 90 25 SG051B-10-Q 05956594 566.35
Pistol Positive Clutch 8.9 1700 65 25 SG052B-17-Q 05956602 611.41
Pistol Adj. Clutch 8.9 1700 10-60 25 SG053B-17-Q 05956610 720.82
Pneumatic Positive
Clutch Screwdriver
1⁄4w Pneumatic Pistol Grip Screwdriver • Balanced design offers easy handling
and control to reduce operator fatigue
Accepts all 1⁄4w hex screwdriver bits. • Rugged aluminum housing with
• Reversible • Adjustable clutch heat treated for durability comfort grip
• Accepts up to 3⁄16w machine screws • Outstanding power
• Torque range: 45-100 In./Lbs. Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea.
Air Inlet (In.) RPM CFM Torque (In./Lbs.) Order # Price Ea. • Reversible • 1⁄4w Hex quick change
1⁄4 1800 4 45-115 63240998 $104.29 • Side to center: 13⁄16w • RPM: 1800 MP2465 63253322 $236.01
2562 NOTE: AIR TOOLS SHOULD BE OILED EACH DAY BEFORE USE. FAILURE TO DO SO WILL VOID WARRANTY. CONTACT MSC @ 800-645-7270
PAINT SPRAYERS & FOAM ADHESIVES/SEALANT TECH INFO
Rechargeable 1 Quart Sprayer 21⁄2 Gallon
Portable Sprayers Production Paint Tank
OZONE FRIENDLY - No CFC’s or Hazardous Propellants One-piece seamless steel tank is coated to resist corrosion. Heavy-duty
Provide high quality uniform coverage of virtually any liquid. These atomizer sprayers offer an aluminum cover. Combination carrying handle and ladder hanger. Includes
economical alternative to aerosols. For use with bulk lubricants, solvents, coatings, pesticides, pressure regulator with gage, 10v air and paint hoses and disposable liner.
etc. All three models are equipped with a palm lever trigger, removable cap and a standard tire Full sized opening accepts a gallon paint can. Weight 15 Lbs.
valve stem for fast, convenient air pressurization of up to 200 psi. Height: 9w. Diameter: 41⁄4w. Desc. Order # Price Ea. (May be used with Order
Steel Canister with Enamel Finish for use with oil base and Paint Tank 09225251 $273.46 #09225319, 09225301 or
noncorrosive materials. Includes an adjustable plastic nozzle Disposable Liners 109225269 38.63 09225202 sprayer guns.)
which provides for an extra fine to pin stream spray.
1
Chrome-Plated Brass Canister (lightweight liquids) for use with corrosive Disposable liners make clean up easier and quicker - comes in
caustic materials as well as with oil or water based materials. Includes an package of 5. Resistant to most common solvents.
adjustable plastic nozzle which provides for an extra fine to pin stream spray.
Chrome-Plated Brass Canister (heavier type liquids) for use with corrosive
caustic water and oil based materials as well as some heavier liquids and some paints.
Includes an all-brass nozzle which provides for a solid cone shaped extra fine mist pattern.
Desc. Order # Price Ea.
Enameled-Steel w/Adjustable Plastic Nozzle 09225459 $44.45
Chrome-Plated Brass w/Adjustable Plastic Nozzle (Lightweight Liquids) 09225467 71.01
Air Hose with Fittings
Chrome-Plated Brass w/Brass Nozzle (Heavier Weight Liquids) 09225509 73.53
602 Replacement Nozzle A98142805 8.11 Length (Ft.) Price Ea. •
Order # Designed to fit directly on paint sprayers
Filler Valve Assembly A03741378 5.02 • Hose is pliable to work with the application
5.0 09135054 $18.66 • Industrial grade rubber hose
15 09225418 28.29 • Comes with 1⁄4w NPT female ball seat swivel
25 09225426 38.68 fittings
Sprayers
1 Quart Refillable & Rechargeable Sprayers
Each includes 2 interchangeable nozzles; 1 general purpose mist and 1 pin stream
• Environmentally safe • Completely portable
• Use bulk liquids and save
Spray Booth Accessories
• Eliminates aerosol disposal problems
Peelable Spray Booth Coatings
Material Use with Order # Price Ea. Protect spray booth walls from dangerous, flammable overspray
Chrome-Plated Brass Water Soluble 00684043 $63.32 build-up. Easy-on, easy-off. These coatings will also provide corrosion
Steel Non-Water Soluble 00684050 46.21 resistant protection during storage and shipping; protect or mask
glass, acrylics or plastic surfaces; protect work surfaces and laboratory
tables from spills and radiation build-up. Coverage: 150 Sq.Ft./Gal.
Solvent base; 250 Sq.Ft./Gal. Waterbase. Waterbase meets California
VOC requirements Coatings meet OSHA and EPA requirements.
Size Price Ea.
Atomizer Model “B” Sprayers (Gal.) Base Sprayable Brushable Color Order # 1-3 4+
1
5 Solvent x White 00240002 $152.03 $136.83
The Sensible Alternative to Aerosols 5 Solvent x x Clear 1
00240028 132.90 119.61
1
• Designed to spray virtually any light liquid, ounce for ounce, 5 Waterbase x x White 00240044 209.36 188.42
bulk chemicals are far more economical than aerosols 5 Waterbase x x Clear 00240069 199.14 179.23
• Pressurize with standard air chuck to 80-150 psi
¹DOT REGULATED. May require special handling.
• Spray a full container of liquid with a single charge of air
Spray Booth Floor Protector W (In.) Order # Price Ea.
Pressure Sprayers A high grade, absorbent, flame-retardant floor
protector that reduces fire hazard and complies 36 00240085 $96.73
Capacity Material Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea.
with OSHA and NFPA maintenance regulations. 42 00240101 112.65
7 oz. Aluminum 8200PL A05419411 $26.62 60 00240127 152.56
Rolls are 100 Lbs., white, 300v long.
16 oz. Aluminum 8000PL A95966347 34.83
16 oz. Nickel Plated Aluminum 8100PL A01356096 42.35 Spray Booth Filters
05419411 95966347 01356096
Minimum purchase case quantity.
Accessory for use w/Pressure Sprayers 8200PL, 8000PL & 8100PL
Desc. Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea. W (In.) L (In.) Ht. (In.) Material Case Qty. Order # Price/Case
16 oz. Aluminum Complete Valve Assembly B51 A95966354 $6.94 20 20 2 DuoPad 100 00240143 $83.47
2604 CALL MSC TODAY 800-645-7270 FOR ALL YOUR INDUSTRIAL NEEDS
Page 95
CAULKS, SEALANTS & VULCANIZING SILICONE TECH INFO
Industrial Grade Fast Set Urethane Sealant Latex Caulk
Bostik 1100FS sealant is a one-component fast curing architectural grade urethane sealant Speed load caulk designed for interior and exterior applications. Ideal for gap filling
capable of dynamic joint movement totaling 50% of original joint geometry. Cures to a tough, and repairing cracks. Adheres well to wood, brick, aluminum, vinyl, fiberglass, and
flexible rubber when exposed to moisture present in the atmosphere. other common building materials. Cleans up with water.
• Dries tack-free in 100 minutes • White available in 10.1 oz. cartridge • Approximate tooling time: 5-10 min.
• Tenacious adhesions to metal, aluminum, glass and wood • Paintable • Approximate cure time: 48 hrs.
• Federal Specification TT-S-00230C Type II, Class A • Temperature range: 0°F to 180°F • Low odor
• ASTM C920-87 Type s, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT, A and M • Resistant to cleansers
• Canadian Standard CAN/CGSB-19.13 Unit Size Color Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea.
Container Case Price Ea. 10.1 oz. White GE14563 06904981 $4.53
Color Size Qty. Mfr’s # Order # Less than Case Case Qty.
White 10.3 oz. 24 1100FS-WH 03353851 $9.47 $9.00
Gray 10.3 oz. 24 1100FS-GY 03353869 9.47 9.00
Black 10.3 oz. 24 1100FS-BK 03353877 9.47 9.00 Professional Grade
Construction Adhesives
Construction Polyurethane Sealant CONTECH PL - Premium: A polyurethane adhesive that provides
superior results. Cures three times faster. For interior and exterior
use. Exceeds AFG-01, ASTM C 557, ASTM 3498, FHA-UM60.
One Component Architectural Grade Polyurethane Sealant - Bostik Chem-Calk® 915 is designed for PL - Polyurethane Roof/Flashing Sealant: Seals between wood
sealing expansion and control joints in precast concrete panels and metal curtain walls, perimeter and metal or flashing around chimney bases, wells. Water and
sealing of door and window framing and other building components. Cures to form a durable, weatherproof, maintains its flexibility in extreme temperatures.
flexible, water-tight bond with most building materials. Paintable. Complies with TT-S-00230C Type II Class A.
Works with: PL - Polyurethane Door/Window/Siding Sealant: Ideal for
• Stone • Masonry • Ceramics • Marble • Wood • Steel • Aluminum • Many plastics installing or repairing, remains flexible, and is paintable,
Work Price Ea. stainable and sandable. Bonds metal, wood, vinyl and other
Container Temp. (°F) Case Less Case materials. It offers the end-user a 50 year life. Complies with
Color Size Min. Max. Mfr’s # Qty. Order # than Case Qty. TT-S-00230C Type II Class A.
White 10.3 oz. -20 150 915-WH 24 03353943 $6.70 $6.36 PL - Polyurethane Concrete/Masonry Sealant: Seals gaps in concrete and masonry structures.
Stone 10.3 oz. -20 150 915-ST 24 03353950 6.70 6.36 Remains flexible during temperature fluctuations, paintable, stainable, sandable. Seals out Radon
Aluminum 10.3 oz. -20 150 915-AL 24 03353968 6.70 6.36 Migration. Complies with TT-S-00230C Type II Class A.
Limestone 10.3 oz. -20 150 915-LS 24 03353976 6.70 6.36 Case Price Ea.
Bronze 10.3 oz. -20 150 915-BZ 24 03353984 6.70 6.36 Desc. Size Qty. Order # Less than Case Case Qty.
Tan 10.3 oz. -20 150 915-TAN 24 03353992 6.70 6.36 PL - Premium 10.2 oz. 12 00233528 $4.55 $4.09
PL - Premium 28 oz. 12 00233544 9.77 8.79
PL - Roof/Flashing Caulk 10.2 oz. 12 00233643 6.88 6.19
Marine Grade Urethane Sealants PL - Door/Window/Siding - White
PL - Concrete/Masonry Sealant
10.2 oz. 12
10.2 oz. 12
00233668
00233684
6.88
6.88
6.19
6.19
920 Urethane & 920FS Fast Set Urethane - One-part, gun grade sealant/adhesives that moisture
cure to an extremely tough, resilient seal exhibiting excellent tear and abrasion resistance, while
retaining permanent elastomeric properties. Offers tenacious adhesion to most common marine
substrates, including virtually all woods, metal, FRP and most plastics. Can be used as either an
Urethane Sealant
adhesive or as a sealant. Recommended for above and below the water line.
Single-component, gun-grade caulk. Urethane sealant has outstanding
920 920FS adhesion properties to concrete, masonry, glass, plastic, wood,
• Extended open time • Fast setting (tack-free in 90 minutes) aluminum and most other metals.
• Outstanding weatherability and adhesion to • Similar weatherability as 920
various materials • Bonds, seals and waterproofs • Temp. resistance up to 180°F
• Max. working temperature: 180°F
Container Case Price Ea.
Color Size Qty. Mfr’s # Order # Less than Case Case Qty. Size Color Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea.
White 10.3 oz. 24 920-WH 03353885 $9.97 $8.97 10.2 oz. Cartridge Gray 39916 05969357 $14.52
Black 10.3 oz. 24 920-BK 03353893 9.97 8.97 Note: Customers must have a DUNS or Federal Tax ID (FIN) number
White 10.3 oz. 24 920FS-WH 03353901 10.61 9.55 in order to purchase these products, since these items are
Black 10.3 oz. 24 920FS-BK 03353919 10.61 9.55 RESTRICTED FOR SALE TO CONSUMER USERS DUE TO VOC LAWS.
2608 CALL MSC TODAY 800-645-7270 FOR ALL YOUR INDUSTRIAL NEEDS
FIRESTOP SEALANTS & BARRIERS & ADHESIVES TECH INFO
Fire Related Sealants
• Withstands temperatures up to 2000°F High Heat Mortar Patch
• Sets rock hard when fired • Can also be used for patching and sealing around fireplaces and wood-burning stoves
• Easy water clean-up • Withstands temperatures up to 2000°F • Sets rock hard when fired • Easy water clean-up
• Fire rated • Draft stop • Meets ASTM E136
Fire Stop Silicone Sealant Polyurethane Fireblock Foam Sealant
• Classified for sealing fire-rated, noncombustible service • Quickly fill and seal large gaps around vents, pipes, ducts and wires; and at wall-to-floor
penetrations and construction joints in horizontal and or ceiling-to-floor joints
vertical fire separations • For use in Type V residential construction, the foam is bright orange for easy code
• Elastomeric - capable of ±25% dynamic joint movement identification and expands 21⁄2 to 3 times its dispensed size
• Meets ASTM E 814/UL 1479 and UL 2079 specifications • Just one can of this expanding foam yields up to fifteen large caulk tubes
Desc. Color Container Size Max. Temp. (°) Order # Price Ea.
Fire Stop Silicone Sealant Limestone 10.1 oz. 160 A02572618 $14.96
High Heat Mortar Patch Black 10.1 oz. 2000 A02571503 3.76 High Heat Polyurethane Fireblock
Polyurethane Fireblock Foam Sealant Orange 12 oz. 240 A02572675 12.07 Mortar Patch Foam Sealant
Basics of...Adhesives
Use this chart as a handy reference to determine the proper adhesive for your application. As it was compiled from various manufacturer’s recommendations, this chart contains only the names of
the types of adhesives and no specific brand names.
Which Adhesive Is Best?
Type Advantages Disadvantages
Anaerobics • Moderately priced • High strength on some substrates • Flexibility to form tough bonds • Limited gap cure • Not advised for some plastics or rubber substrates
• Rapid cure at room temperature • Good solvent and temperature resistance • Will not cure where air contacts adhesive (wet fillets)
• Versatile • Various Viscosities • Non-toxic • Single component • Infinite pot life • Requires primer for many materials • 300° to 400°F Temperature limitation
• No mixing required • Dispenses easily from package • Easily automated
Cyanoacrylates • Rapid cure at room temperature • Excellent adhesion to rubber or plastics • Higher priced • Limited gap cure • Poor durability on some surfaces
• Good adhesion to metal • High tensile strength • No mixing required • Low solvent resistance • Low temperature resistance • Bonds to skin • Toxicity
• Infinite pot life • Dispenses easily
Epoxies • Usually low priced • Good gap filling capabilities • High strength • Versatile • Exothermic reaction creates thinning of adhesive during cycles
• Good temperature resistance • Easily dispensed • Two components, mixing required
• Wide range of formulations • Exact proportions needed for optimal strength • Toxicity • Low pot life
• Waste • Single component usually requires refrigeration and heat cure
Hot Melts • Low price • Good gap filling capabilities • Usually low strength • Poor wetting • Low heat resistance, degrades as heat rises
• Rigid to flexible bonds available • Usually low solvent resistance • Stringy and messy
• Fast setting • Parts must be mated before adhesive cools • Poor on part life
• Requires special dispensing equipment • Difficult to automate
Methacrylates • Usually low to moderately priced • Good gap cure • Usually requires dispensing equipment • Low heat tolerance, 180° to 250°F
• Good impact resistance and flexibility • Good peel and shear strength • Limited pot life • Two component products require mixing
• Medium to fast cure • Wide range of formulations • Tolerant of dirty surfaces • Some odor problems • Flammable
Silicones • Moderately priced • Good gap filling capabilities • Low strength • Limited solvent resistance • Too flexible for structural loads
• Good for bonding glass to most other substrates • Easily applied from package • Expensive to automate • Most need moisture to cure • Corrosivity
• Flexible • Good water resistance • Various viscosities and colors • Some odor when curing • Hard to clean • Slow curing
• Excellent temperature resistance, 400° to 500°F • One component, short shelf life
• Excellent sealant for low stress applications
Urethanes • Moderately priced • Excellent toughness and flexibility • Poor temperature resistance • Sensitive to moisture in cured and uncured state
• Good flexibility at low temperatures • Excellent adhesion to a wide range of materials • May undergo reversion with heat and moisture
• Varying cure time • One or two component, room or oven cure available • Two component mixing or one component toxicity
• Short pot life • Requires special equipment to mix and dispense
2612 CALL MSC TODAY 800-645-7270 FOR ALL YOUR INDUSTRIAL NEEDS
Page 97
INDUSTRIAL MARKERS TECHNICAL INFORMATION
Layout Fluid Removers Fountain Brush In Bottle
Remover specially formulated to remove layout fluids quickly. May also be Consists of soft hair brush with hollow handle attached to squeezable
used to remove light oils, greases, many other types of paint and other translucent bulb. 5 oz. polyethylene bottle. One charging of bulb can
markings on metal or glass items. (Note: May harm certain plastics.) be brushed on approx. 350 sq. in. surface area.
Contains No Class 1 Ozone Depleting Chemicals Case Price Ea.
Container Net Case Price Ea. Size (oz.) Qty. Order # Less than Case Case Qty.
Size Type Fill Brand Qty. Order # Less than Case Case Qty. 5 36 00264317 $13.61 $12.25
16 oz. Aerosol Can 123⁄4 oz. Sprayon 12 00264655 $5.09 $4.58
16 oz. Aerosol Can 12 oz. Dykem 12 00264143 9.99 8.99
1
32 oz. Bottle 32 oz. Dykem 12 00264127 10.22 9.20
1 Gal. Can Dykem 4 1
00264135 27.20 24.48 Spill Master™
1
DOT REGULATED. May require special handling. Perfect container for cutting fluids, layout Avoid Messy & Costly Spills
fluid and lubricants. Its unique design
prevents spills - even when turned Color Order # Price Ea.
completely upside down. Molded from Red 09520057 $7.51
durable polyethylene for years of use. White 09520065 7.51
Comes complete with an applicator brush. Blue 09520073 7.51
2628 CALL MSC TODAY 800-645-7270 FOR ALL YOUR INDUSTRIAL NEEDS
STEEL HAND STAMPS TECHNICAL INFORMATION
Heavy-Duty Steel Stamps - Number Sets, Letter Sets, Combination Sets, Individual Stamps
Sets • Made to meet the demands of rigid service
• Extra heavy, extra long shank
Character Number Sets Letter Sets Letter & Number Sets Character Number Sets Letter Sets Letter & Number Sets • Character identification and size on side of shank
Size (In.) Order # Price Ea. Order # Price Ea. Order # Price Ea. Size (In.) Order # Price Ea. Order # Price Ea. Order # Price Ea. • Three thumb grooves on the shank for easy
1⁄32 97199400 $29.82 97198691 $89.18 1⁄4 52779923 $32.29 95263786 $96.44 04038295 $134.47 handling and positioning of character
1⁄16 95254124 23.49 95254116 70.14 08249781 $97.84 5⁄16 52779931 40.02 94381845 119.79 08249799 177.40 • Number Sets include 0-8. No. 6 is inverted to
3⁄32 98459167 23.49 98459159 70.14 84362623 97.84 3⁄8 00294678 44.40 36962074 131.93 08249807 204.65 make No. 9
1⁄8 97250252 23.49 97250260 70.14 85143378 97.84 1⁄2 98282973 73.08 98282965 217.57 05052311 324.51 • Letter Sets include A-Z and period
5⁄32 99581936 26.44 99172512 79.01 40458028 121.56 5⁄8 99334971 86.43 95301115 257.37 • Letter & Number Sets include 0-8, A-Z and period
3⁄16 96768718 27.98 96768700 83.63 62133988 125.63 • & (ampersand) replaces period in letter sets 5⁄16w
or larger
Individual Stamps - Sizes 1⁄32w to 3⁄8w
1⁄32w 1⁄16w 3⁄32w 1⁄8w 5⁄32w 3⁄16w 1⁄4w 5⁄16w 3⁄8w
Character Order # Price Ea. Order # Order # Order # Price Ea. Order # Price Ea. Order # Price Ea. Order # Price Ea. Order # Price Ea. Order # Price Ea.
1 52779949 $5.00 52780301 52780665 52781028 $3.94 52781382 $4.31 52781747 $4.83 52782109 $4.88 52782448 $6.09 52782802 $6.98
2 52779956 5.00 52780319 52780673 52781036 3.94 52781390 4.31 52781754 4.83 52782117 4.88 52782455 6.09 52782810 6.98
3 52779964 5.00 52780327 52780681 52781044 3.94 52781408 4.31 52781762 4.83 52782125 4.88 52782463 6.09 52782828 6.98
4 52779972 5.00 52780335 52780699 52781051 3.94 52781416 4.31 52781770 4.83 52782133 4.88 52782471 6.09 52782836 6.98
5 52779980 5.00 52780343 52780707 52781069 3.94 52781424 4.31 52781788 4.83 52782141 4.88 52782489 6.09 52782844 6.98
6 52779998 5.00 52780350 52780715 52781077 3.94 52781432 4.31 52781796 4.83 52782158 4.88 52782497 6.09 52782851 6.98
7 52780004 5.00 52780368 52780723 52781085 3.94 52781440 4.31 52781804 4.83 52782166 4.88 52782505 6.09 52782869 6.98
8 52780012 5.00 52780376 52780731 52781093 3.94 52781457 4.31 52781812 4.83 52782174 4.88 52782513 6.09 52782877 6.98
9 52780020 5.00 52780384 52780749 52781101 3.94 52781465 4.31 52781820 4.83 52782182 4.88 52782521 6.09 52782885 6.98
0 52780038 5.00 52780392 52780756 52781119 3.94 52781473 4.31 52781838 4.83 52782190 4.88 52782539 6.09 52782893 6.98
A 52780046 5.00 52780400 52780764 52781127 3.94 52781481 4.31 52781846 4.83 90915646 4.88 52782547 6.09 52782901 6.98
B 52780053 5.00 52780418 52780772 52781135 3.94 52781499 4.31 52781853 4.83 90915653 4.88 52782554 6.09 52782919 6.98
C 52780061 5.00 52780426 52780780 52781143 3.94 52781507 4.31 52781861 4.83 52782208 4.88 52782562 6.09 52782927 6.98
D 52780079 5.00 52780434 52780798 52781150 3.94 52781515 4.31 52781879 4.83 52782216 4.88 52782570 6.09 52782935 6.98
E 52780087 5.00 52780442 52780806 52781168 3.94 52781523 4.31 52781887 4.83 52782224 4.88 52782588 6.09 52782943 6.98
F 52780095 5.00 52780459 52780814 52781176 3.94 52781531 4.31 52781895 4.83 52782232 4.88 52782596 6.09 52782950 6.98
G 52780103 5.00 52780467 52780822 52781184 3.94 52781549 4.31 52781903 4.83 52782240 4.88 52782604 6.09 52782968 6.98
H 52780111 5.00 52780475 52780830 52781192 3.94 52781556 4.31 52781911 4.83 52782257 4.88 52782612 6.09 52782976 6.98
I 52780129 5.00 52780483 52780848 52781200 3.94 52781564 4.31 52781929 4.83 52782265 4.88 52782620 6.09 52782984 6.98
J 52780137 5.00 52780491 52780855 52781218 3.94 52781572 4.31 52781937 4.83 52782273 4.88 52782638 6.09 52782992 6.98
K 52780145 5.00 52780509 52780863 52781226 3.94 52781580 4.31 52781945 4.83 52782281 4.88 52782646 6.09 52783008 6.98
L 52780152 5.00 52780517 52780871 52781234 3.94 52781598 4.31 52781952 4.83 52782299 4.88 52782653 6.09 52783016 6.98
M 52780160 5.00 52780525 52780889 52781242 3.94 52781606 4.31 52781960 4.83 52782307 4.88 52782661 6.09 52783024 6.98
N 52780178 5.00 52780533 52780897 52781259 3.94 52781614 4.31 52781978 4.83 52782315 4.88 52782679 6.09 52783032 6.98
O 52780186 5.00 52780541 52780905 52781267 3.94 52781622 4.31 52781986 4.83 52782323 4.88 52782687 6.09 52783040 6.98
P 52780194 5.00 52780558 52780913 52781275 3.94 52781630 4.31 52781994 4.83 52782331 4.88 52782695 6.09 52783057 6.98
Q 52780202 5.00 52780566 52780921 52781283 3.94 52781648 4.31 52782000 4.83 52782349 4.88 52782703 6.09 52783065 6.98
R 52780210 5.00 52780574 52780939 52781291 3.94 52781655 4.31 52782018 4.83 52782356 4.88 52782711 6.09 52783073 6.98
S 52780228 5.00 52780582 52780947 52781309 3.94 52781663 4.31 52782026 4.83 52782364 4.88 52782729 6.09 52783081 6.98
T 52780236 5.00 52780590 52780954 52781317 3.94 52781671 4.31 52782034 4.83 52782372 4.88 52782737 6.09 52783099 6.98
U 52780244 5.00 52780608 52780962 52781325 3.94 52781689 4.31 52782042 4.83 52782380 4.88 52782745 6.09 52783107 6.98
V 52780251 5.00 52780616 52780970 52781333 3.94 52781697 4.31 52782059 4.83 52782398 4.88 52782752 6.09 52783115 6.98
W 52780269 5.00 52780624 52780988 52781341 3.94 52781705 4.31 52782067 4.83 52782406 4.88 52782760 6.09 52783123 6.98
X 52780277 5.00 52780632 52780996 52781358 3.94 52781713 4.31 52782075 4.83 52782414 4.88 52782778 6.09 52783131 6.98
Y 52780285 5.00 52780640 52781002 52781366 3.94 52781721 4.31 52782083 4.83 52782422 4.88 52782786 6.09 52783149 6.98
Z 52780293 5.00 52780657 52781010 52781374 3.94 52781739 4.31 52782091 4.83 52782430 4.88 52782794 6.09 52783156 6.98
Individual Stamps - Sizes 1⁄2w, 5⁄8w
1⁄2w 5⁄8w 1⁄2w 5⁄8w 1⁄2w 5⁄8w 1⁄2w 5⁄8w
Char. Order # Price Ea. Order # Price Ea. Char. Order # Price Ea. Order # Price Ea. Char. Order # Price Ea. Order # Price Ea. Char. Order # Price Ea. Order # Price Ea.
1 52783164 $11.03 52783529 $12.18 0 52783255 $11.03 52783610 $12.18 I 52783347 $11.03 52783701 $12.18 R 52783438 $11.03 52783792 $12.18
2 52783172 11.03 52783537 12.18 A 52783263 11.03 52783628 12.18 J 52783354 11.03 52783719 12.18 S 52783446 11.03 52783800 12.18
3 52783180 11.03 52783545 12.18 B 52783271 11.03 52783636 12.18 K 52783362 11.03 52783727 12.18 T 52783453 11.03 52783818 12.18
4 52783198 11.03 52783552 12.18 C 52783289 11.03 52783644 12.18 L 52783370 11.03 52783735 12.18 U 52783461 11.03 52783826 12.18
5 52783206 11.03 52783560 12.18 D 52783297 11.03 52783651 12.18 M 52783388 11.03 52783743 12.18 V 52783479 11.03 52783834 12.18
6 52783214 11.03 52783578 12.18 E 52783305 11.03 52783669 12.18 N 52783396 11.03 52783750 12.18 W 52783487 11.03 52783842 12.18
7 52783222 11.03 52783586 12.18 F 52783313 11.03 52783677 12.18 O 52783404 11.03 52783768 12.18 X 52783495 11.03 52783859 12.18
8 52783230 11.03 52783594 12.18 G 52783321 11.03 52783685 12.18 P 52783412 11.03 52783776 12.18 Y 52783503 11.03 52783867 12.18
9 52783248 11.03 52783602 12.18 H 52783339 11.03 52783693 12.18 Q 52783420 11.03 52783784 12.18 Z 52783511 11.03 52783875 12.18
2634 CALL MSC TODAY 800-645-7270 FOR ALL YOUR INDUSTRIAL NEEDS
LABELING TECHNICAL INFORMATION
Basics of...Labeling
Proper identification is a vital part of any job. Whether it’s electrical cables, security or HVAC control wire, the labeling of an
industrial machine, warehouse racks, storage bins, etc., labeling is an important, yet often overlooked, key element of the
project. Properly labeling can increase safety, decrease time for service and repair, eliminate costly errors and overall, make
work areas look and operate more professionally.
Choosing the Right Labeling Tool
An important consideration of proper labeling is matching the application with the right labeling tool. For example, using an office labeler to label wire, cables or
machinery will not yield satisfactory results. They possess neither the functionality nor the features to do the job properly. While office labelers are good for their
intended purpose (i.e., file folders, etc.) they will not withstand the rigors of a professional environment like a shop floor or an electrical room.
There are many industrial applications that require labeling solutions. The first step is to choose the right labeling tool: Manual (often pen and tape), Portable (as in
with a portable handheld printer) or Desktop (features a more fixed printer on a bench or table).
Manual Labeling: this basic labeling technique combines a permanent writing instrument with a label to provide text or picture descriptions to be attached or adhered to
a desired object or location. This style of labeling is typically used when a professional grade label is not necessary like roughing in electrical wire to a new jobsite. If
choosing this method, be sure to choose a high quality, permanent marker and a tape that resists smearing and fading. Don’t forget to write NEATLY.
Portable Labeling: an electronic, on demand, portable labeling system that enables a user to print permanent, easy to read, clear text on an adhesive label which will
then be applied to the desired object or location. Portable label makers are ideal when you need to make professional grade labels on the jobsite, in a warehouse, or in
a telecommunications room. If choosing this method, select a model that offers convenient, easy-to-use features designed to save the user valuable time. Some
portable printers even print on Heat Shrink Tubing, for the ultimate in wire and cable labeling.
Desktop Labeling: these printers are larger, not as portable, and are designed for higher volume and higher speed. Often, these printers offer PC connectivity that
enable users to download labels to the printer (and bring the printer with them on the job) or print the labels on the desktop prior to the job. This is referred to as
“kitting” labels - the person who is to apply the labels receives a “label kit” prior to starting the project. If choosing this method, select one that is also portable so that,
if needed, a user may also take it on the job.
Choosing the Right Label for the Job
The chart below outlines some typical industrial applications and the correct label for that application. A good rule of thumb, when in doubt, use Flexible Nylon as this
is the stickiest and most flexible medium.
Wire & Outdoor Curved Smooth Flat Rough Plastic Office
Labels Cable Surfaces Surfaces Surfaces Surfaces Holder (Inserts) Application
Flex Nylon X X X X
Vinyl X X
Heat Shrink X
Permanent Polyester X
Metalized Permanent Polyester X
Non-Adhesive Tags X
Self-Laminating X X X X
Paper X
Special Properties
Extreme Pressure (EP) Additives: have active chemicals that react with freshly cut metal, forming a stable, non-reactive surface. This function is typically used to help
control built-up edge and chip welding. Chlorine, sulfur, or phosphorous are often used in Extreme Pressure Additives.
Boundary Lubricants: contain highly polar molecules that attach themselves to the metal surfaces and work to reduce friction by repelling each other.
Hydrodynamic Lubricants (Full Fluid Lubricants): form a continuous barrier of film between the two surfaces. The non-compressible nature of the film separates the
surfaces to prevent metal to metal contact completely.
Maintenance: Steps to Getting the Most from a Metalworking Fluid
1. Run a cleaning detergent through the sump during change-out every 6 to 12 months. TIP: Use an industrial sump cleaner and circulate through for one hour.
2. Use an antimicrobial additive once a month to prevent bacteria/fungus. TIP: Adding the antimicrobial on Friday morning will reduce “Monday-morning smell”.
3. Swarf like dirt, filings and chips should be cleaned from the sump regularly. TIP: A coalescer cleans cutting fluid by removing swarf and tramp oil.
4. Tramp oil should be removed from the sump every day. TIP: A wheel skimmer is ideal for removing tramp oil but they are most effective when the machine is off.
5. Let the machine run for an hour or more a day to aerate the sump. TIP: An aerating pump can be used if it isn’t possible to run the machine every day.
6. Increase performance by mixing cutting fluid before adding it to the sump. TIP: A drum mixer or proportioner ensures the right concentration every time.
7. Check the sump concentration every week. TIP: A hand-held refractometer is the perfect tool for this job.
8. Keep up the sump level by adding make-up frequently. TIP: Never add straight water or coolant concentrate to the sump and always add coolant concentrate to water
when mixing.
*Tramp Oil: is a by-product of using Metalworking Fluids in a Metalworking process(usually cutting, drilling or grinding). It usually manifests itself as a thin layer of Page
film over the Metalworking Fluid and should be removed on a regular basis to avoid contaminating the Metalworking Fluid.
Page 101 2709
®
OAKFLO® DSO 650 Soluble Oil
OAKFLO DSY 910 Metalworking Fluid Cutting & Grinding Fluid
• Ideal for machining and grinding operations in central systems applications • Recommended for a wide variety of heavy-duty machining and grinding operations
• Clear, water-based synthetic product • Recommeded starting dilution of 5% • Capable for all operations in metalworking plants
• Excellent lubricity, cleanliness and rancidity control • Ideal for ferrrous metals • Excellent lubricity, corrosion and biological control • Works extremely
well on metals
Container • Duty range: Container • Recommended
Type Size Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea. moderate to Type Size Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea. starting dilution of 5%
Pail 5 Gal. OKFL DSY-9105 37016961 $121.81 heavy-duty Pail 5 Gal. OKFL DSO-6505 35446939 $132.21 • Duty range: moderate
1 1
Drum 55 Gal. OKFL DSY-91055 37016979 1339.86 operations Drum 55 Gal. OKFL DSO-65055 35446947 1454.29 to heavy-duty
1 1 operations
FOB Factory FOB Factory
According to OSHA 1910.133 – Employers shall ensure that each employee uses appropriate eye or face protection (including side protection) when exposed to eye or
face hazards which include flying particles, molten metal, liquid chemicals, acids or caustic liquids, chemical gases or vapors, or potentially injurious light radiation.
This includes employees who wear prescription lenses while engaged in operations that involve eye hazards. The user must wear eye protection that incorporates the
prescription in the design, or wear eye protection that can be worn over the prescription lenses without disturbing the proper position of the prescription or the
protective lenses.
Protective eye and face devices shall comply with ANSI Z87.1 “American National Standard Practice for Occupational and Educational Eye and Face Protection”.
Anyone working in or passing through areas that pose eye hazards should also wear appropriate protective eyewear.
Safety Glasses
Many styles of protective safety glasses are available. Look for safety glasses that offer full coverage of the entire orbital eye area. Some safety glasses are available in
an OTG(over-the-glass) version where the user needs to wear protection over their own personal prescription glasses. Many safety glasses have custom fitting
features, like adjustable nose bridges and temples, which provide added comfort and enhanced fitting. Eyewear compliance is greatly improved when the right
combination of style, comfort and fitting is achieved.
Safety glasses can be easily identified. Look for ANSI Z87.1 markings on the frame or temples, the manufacturer’s mark (e.g., 3M is the mark used by 3M) and a (+)
sign to identify protective eyewear that meets the high impact standards set forth in ANSI Z87.1-2003.
Base Curve: back curvature of the lens. The higher the base curve, the more curvature there is in a lens. To maintain good optics, the thickness of the lens material
varies from location to location on the curve of the lens. As a result, the light that passes through the lens does not have prismatic imbalance.
As an example: a traditional "basic" safety glass has a base curve of 4, which is fairly flat; hence the need for the sharp curves on the temple ends to meet ANSI side
shield requirements. Newer designs incorporate higher base curves, creating better optics and reduced distortion. Due to the increased curvature of the lens it wraps
more around the face, eliminating the need for sideshields. Glasses with a higher base curve have a tendency to look sportier and more stylish, therefore have an
increased acceptance by the wearer.
Aspheric Lenses
• Helps reduce distortion out to edges of lens
• Thinner thus lighter
• Flatter curves reduces bulging
Most safety glasses are available with either a hard coating to protect the surfaces of the lens and to help prevent premature scratching, or other coatings that may
have anti-fog, anti-scratch, anti-static and anti-UV properties.
Safety lenses are available in a variety of tints for specific workplace applications:
• Clear: for use in general purpose applications
• Yellow (Contrast Amber): use when sharpness, acuity and contrast are needed and to block high intensity blue lighting such as UV. Good for working outdoors at dawn
and dusk. Good for hazy and overcast days
• Red (Vermillion): absorbs green light. Sharpens visual acuity and provides a contrast similar to the contrast amber lens. Some people prefer vermillion to amber, when
choosing a lens to sharpen visual acuity. Good for inspection work, i.e. circuit boards, miniature components, assembly items, etc. because defects can be seen better
• Green/IR Shade: blocks red/infrared (IR) light. Can be used any place where there is heat. Good for metal working, furnace work etc.
• Gray/Silver Mirror/Blue Mirror: reduces glare and bright light. Good for outdoor applications where a task specific lens is not required
• Indoor/Outdoor Mirror: tones everything down and provides excellent vision in both indoor and outdoor lighting. Allows a person to wear the same pair of safety
glasses both indoors and outdoors
• Polarized: designed for outdoor use where reflective glare from water, snow, cement and other hard surfaces exist
In certain applications the use of a full-face shield is required to protect the entire face and eyes. Always wear safety glasses underneath a face shield.
Goggles
There are work environments that require the use of goggles. Goggles are available for protection from impact and particulates and for chemical and non-hazadarous
splash.
Styles:
• Direct Vent: protects your eyes from impact and particulates. They offer excellent circulation around the eyes to prevent goggle from fogging. They are not to be used
where the chance of chemical splash can occur
• Indirect Vent: protects your eyes from airborne particulates and chemical splash. The vents are designed to allow for adequate ventilation yet designed to protect the
wearer from liquids entering the eye area
• Ventless: allows the wearer to be protected from impacts, airborne particulates and chemical splash and fumes. Since there are no vents to allow for adequate air
circulation, this form of protection discourages the wearing of them for long periods of time
Hard Hat Bump Cap Full Brim Hard Hat Short Bill Hard Hat
OSHA standards require the use of industrial head protection in any work environment that presents a risk of injury to the head. Industrial head protectors worn to
reduce the force of impact must meet the specifications established in ANSI Requirements for Industrial Head Protection, Z89.1-2003.
In the latest revision of the standard, Z89.1-2003, ANSI specifies requirements for two Types and three Classes of head protection: the Type categories define the area
of impact and penetration protection, while the Classes define levels of protection from electrical hazards.
Type I caps and hats provide protection from objects falling directly onto the top of the helmet, but not from objects that may strike from the side, front, or rear. These
are the familiar “hardhats” of conventional design, and constitute the majority of industrial safety helmets.
Type II caps and hats provide the same degree of protection as Type I to the top of the head. In addition, Type II helmets provide a degree of protection against blows
to the side, front and rear. This new category of protection may be useful for workers who are not always in an upright position when working.
Both Type I and Type II helmets may be available in any of the three classes of electrical protection.
• Class C (Conductive) caps and hats offer no electrical protection and are for use where there is no possibility of exposure to electric shock or burn
• Class E (Electrical application) caps and hats protect against contact with higher voltage conductors. Tested at 20,000 volts AC for three minutes (This Class was
formerly designated Class B)
• Class G (General application) caps and hats protect against limited electrical shock and burn. Tested at 2000 volts AC for one minute (This Class was formerly
designated Class A)
Note: The voltages listed above are not intended to be an indication of the voltage at which headgear protects the wearer, but only the level at which they are tested.
Unless otherwise noted, all safety caps and hats featured meet or exceed applicable requirements of ANSI Z89.1-2003 for Type I helmets for impact, penetration
resistance and dielectric performance.
Shells are water-resistant, slow-burning and non-irritating to the wearer’s skin. They are molded from tough materials, such as high-density polyethylene, which
provides good chemical resistance and impact resistance.
Most protectors have crown straps that form a cradle suspension, adjustable headbands and brow pads that cradle the forehead and absorb perspiration. Type II
protectors have, in addition, a layer of shock-absorbing material in the sides, front and rear.
Some caps and hats are designed for mounting accessories such as faceshields, hearing protectors and others accessories. Care should be taken that these additions
do not adversely affect the product’s original degree of head protection. In particular, the use of accessories with metal parts may affect the voltage protection
capabilities of Class G and Class E head protectors.
Suspension Types
Pinlock Suspensions - work by inserting a strip with pre-distanced pins into a strip with pre-distanced holes.
Ratchet Style Suspensions - adjust by simply turning a knob on the back end of the suspension system. Replacement suspensions should only be from the original
manufacturer of the hat or cap.
Hearing Conservation
• First, measure the noise level; noise levels above 85 dBA (decibel) are considered hazardous
• If you must raise your voice to be heard at normal conversation distance (3 feet), noise levels are above 85 dBA and hearing protection should be worn
• Engineer the noise out or down when possible-this can be done primarily with sound barriers or enclosures. Secondly, look to administrate whereby the employee’s
exposure is limited to the amount of time they are exposed to hazardous noise levels. Lastly, provide adequate hearing protectors after the first two methods have
been successfully applied
• Train employees on the hazards of noise and the proper steps they need to take, including proper selection and fitting of hearing protectors, to keep their hearing safe
• Employees who are in hazardous noise levels as a frequent part of their job should have their hearing tested annually to assure their hearing is being properly
protected. The initial test is known as the baseline
• Appropriate hearing protectors should be provided to those who are working in noise hazardous areas. According to Federal law, employers must provide a “variety of
suitable hearing protectors” from which the employees may choose. A minimum of three different styles of hearing protectors needs to be offered to the affected
employees. Records of the elements of the hearing conservation program should be kept, particularly the annual hearing tests of each person
Hearing Protectors
Foam earplugs: made of slow-recovery foams allowing the wearer to roll-down the earplug and insert it into the ear canal where it re-expands to create a seal against noise. Capable of providing very
high levels of protection when properly fitted; low cost and comfortable. Probably the most difficult style of hearing protection to fit properly – fit training is essential. Usually available with and without a
neck cord for convenient storage when not in use. Some are available in sizes
Premolded earplugs: molded out of plastic or other elastic materials and often incorporate flanges to create an airtight seal in the ear canal. Usually a longer lasting hearing protector, which can be
cleaned and reused for a longer period of time. Generally provide lower levels of protection and comfort. Available with neck cords and often with carrying cases for storage and to promote reuse.
Push-In style foam: a hybrid of the foam and premolded earplugs consisting of a foam-sealing pod at the end of an insertion stem. Provides the benefits of comfort and high attenuation common to foam
earplugs along with the hygiene and ease of use advantages of push-in fitting without having to roll-down the earplug. Available with and without neck cords
Metal Detectable style: this form of hearing protection is required for use in the food industry
Hearing bands: consist of earplugs at the ends of a U-shaped band. Earplugs are held in the ear by the tension of the band. Great for intermittent use since fitting is quick and the band provides
convenient storage around the neck when not in use. Using replacement tips can minimize cost. Typically provide lower levels of noise protection than other devices
Earmuffs: cups, worn over the ears, which are held against the side of the head by a band or hardhat attachment. Easiest device to use and capable of providing a wide range of protection levels,
depending upon which model is selected. Effective where impact noise occurs and is transmitted through the bones connected to the ear (i.e. mastoid). Headbands are available which provide for band
positioning over-the-head, behind-the-head, attached to a hard hat or multi-band positions. Should last for a long time, but muff cushions should be replaced at least every six months
Electronic and other specialized protectors: many hearing protectors are modified to allow for radio communications, personal entertainment system connections, improved voice communications in noise
and even integrated AM/FM radio. Check with MSC if you have a unique requirement
For Example:
All products sold as hearing protectors in the U.S. must have their noise reducing abilities For a noise level of 93 dBA and a hearing protector with an NRR of 25 dB: Because the
evaluated under the test method described in ANSI S3.19-1974. The data from this testing is used noise level is measured in dBA, use the last column in the Table. Subtract 7 from the NRR
to calculate the Noise Reduction Rating or NRR. To determine adequacy of a hearing protector of the hearing protector (25 – 7 = 18); Divide the result by 2 (18 / 2 = 9)
based on the NRR, use the procedure in the Table above and subtract the result from the noise Subtract the result from the measured noise level: 93 dBA – 9 dB = 84 dBA.
level. The result should be lower than 90 to be adequate; below 85 is desirable. In this case population exposure is about 84 dBA. Page
Page 104 2756
FOR ALL YOUR SAFETY TRAINING NEEDS REFER TO PAGES 2879–2880 2769
Page 105
HAND PROTECTION TECHNICAL INFORMATION
Basics of...Gloves
There are a variety of factors that influence proper glove selection. Follow this general guideline to assist in the process.
• Analyze and evaluate the conditions to which you will subject the glove and thoroughly analyze any chemicals handled.
• Determine the types of physical contact, such as:
*Sharp objects *Abrasion *Cuts and slashes
• Temperature: If high heat or cold conditions are a factor in your work environment, three questions need to be considered to choose the proper hand protection:
What is the size and weight of the object you are in contact with?
What is the duration of contact you will have with the object?
What is the potential temperature range for the application?
• Choose the glove with the highest rating for chemical and physical conditions.
• Determine application needs and glove requirements:
Breakthrough Detection Time (BDT): time it takes for a chemical to pass through the glove material measured in minutes.
Dexterity: select unsupported (unlined) gloves for extra dexterity and sense of touch. If cut, snag, puncture, or abrasion-resistance is important, match the
application’s critical factors to the glove’s physical characteristics – whether supported or unsupported.
Grip: select a grip pattern that provides grip needed for the job. Common patterns are diamond embossed, pebble, patterned, dipped or smooth.
Length: choose glove length by the depth to which the arm will be immersed or exposed to chemical splash.
Size: correct size will ensure optimum wear comfort, dexterity and employee satisfaction.
• Glove colors could be a factor in work areas for identifying product exposure.
Glove Styles
• Clute Pattern – sewn with seams on the back of the glove at every finger and straight thumb.
• Gunn Pattern – features fully wrapped leather index fingers and thumbs, leather fingertips, leather knuckle straps, wing thumb design, shirred elastic back and
continuous pull. Open cuff design allows the wearer easy on/off. Usually very generously sized.
• Reversible (Ambidextrous) – allows the glove to be worn on either hand, thus doubling the wear surface. Available in a variety of materials. All disposable gloves (vinyl,
latex, nitrile, polyethylene) are reversible. Reversible gloves are also available in machine knit, cotton lisle inspectors, natural jersey, Kevlar knit and most of the
reinforced cut-resistant gloves.
Thumb Patterns
• Keystone Thumb – an inset thumb on full leather glove patterns. Keystone thumbs provide additional wear and greater comfort.
• Straight Thumb – a glove thumb that normally lies straight with the index finger. They are common in most fabric gloves and drivers’ gloves.
• Wing Thumb – glove construction that angles the thumb diagonally across the palm. Frequently found in leather palm gloves, wing thumbs improve comfort similar to
inset thumb designs.
Cuff Styles
• Knit Wrist – machine knit cuff material using elasticized fabrics to close around the wrist similar to that of a sweatshirt. Minimizes soil that can get inside of gloves.
• Band Top – 1 ½ to 2” cuff which enables easy on and off while protecting the wrist.
• Safety Cuff – 2 ½” cuff that allows for protection of the wrist and easy, fast removal.
• Gauntlet Cuff – 4 ½ to 5” cuff that protects both wrists and forearms.
• Slip-On Cuff – Open-end gloves that make on/off easy. This style is usually found in drivers’ gloves.
Leathers
There are a variety of leathers used in the manufacture of industrial gloves. The types of leathers used include:
• Cowhide: strong and supple leather that is slit to obtain both top grain (smooth) and split (suede) cuts. Once it is tanned, cowhide is used in drivers, leather-palmed,
welders and specialized heat gloves.
• Pigskin: tanned for ruggedness and flexibility. Large pores characterize top grain pigskin where the coarse hairs of the animal have been removed. Perform well in wet
applications because they remain supple even after drying.
• Goatskin: used to make leather gloves where dexterity in a leather glove is the most important aspect of the glove. Goatskin has high lanolin content, which keeps the
leather very flexible and durable. The lanolin makes goatskin gloves feel the best of any leather glove a wearer can use.
Chemical Resistance
Both unlined and coated gloves intended for chemical protection come in a variety of materials. Depending on what you are protecting the wearers hands from, the
application will dictate which form of hand protection is best suited.
• Unsupported – gloves are either unlined or flock lined. Flock lining makes it easier for wearer to put on or take off.
• Coated – linings are typically made of knit or jersey materials. Both absorb perspiration and insulate, however, jersey is thicker than knit offering better protection in
hot or cold applications.
FOR ALL YOUR SAFETY TRAINING NEEDS REFER TO PAGES 2879–2880 2787
Page 106
CUT PROTECTION GLOVES TECHNICAL INFORMATION
Butyl Gloves
Flexible & Sensitive
These gloves are formulated for the highest chemical-resistance barrier to ketones and esters.
The gloves provide the right combination of protection and dexterity.
Best Butyl II® North Butyl Rubber
• Synthetic rubber • Offers the highest impermeability to water vapors, gases and
• Provides the highest permeation toxic chemicals
resistance to gases and water vapors • Resistant to oxygenated solvents and most oxidizing chemicals Best North
Smooth Grip Rough Grip
Best North Best North
Thick. Price per Pair Price per Pair Price per Pair Price per Pair
Size (mil) Mfr’s # Order # 1-5 6+ Mfr’s # Order # 1-5 6+ Mfr’s # Order # 1-5 6+ Mfr’s # Order # 1-5 6+
11w Length
Medium 13 B131-8 01904044 $18.02 $17.12 B131R-8 01904077 $22.37 $21.25
Medium 16 B161-8 01904101 21.97 20.87 B161R-8 01904135 27.06 25.71
Large 13 B131-9 01904051 18.02 17.12 B131R-9 01904085 22.37 21.25
Large 16 B161-9 01904119 21.97 20.87 B161R-9 01904143 27.06 25.71
X-Large 13 B131-10 01904069 18.02 17.12 B131R-10 01904093 22.37 21.25
X-Large 16 B161-10 01904127 21.97 20.87 B161R-10 01904150 27.06 25.71
14w Length
Small 14 874-07 66004359 $25.08 $23.83 874R-07 66004409 $28.94 $27.49
Small 25 878R-07 69300267 57.92 55.02
Medium 14 874-08 66004367 25.08 23.83 874R-08 66004417 28.94 27.49
Medium 25 878-08 69300234 53.01 50.36 878R-08 69300275 57.92 55.02
Medium 32 B324-8 01904168 43.43 41.26 B324R-8 01904192 54.08 51.38
Large 14 874-09 66004375 25.08 23.83 874R-09 66004425 28.94 27.49
Large 25 878-09 05945753 53.01 50.36 878R-09 69300283 57.92 55.02 878-09 05945753 53.01 50.36
Large 32 B324-9 01904176 43.43 41.26 B324R-9 01904200 54.08 51.38
X-Large 14 874-10 66004383 25.08 23.83 874R-10 66004433 28.94 27.49
X-Large 25 878-10 99837171 53.01 50.36 878R-10 69300291 57.92 55.02
X-Large 32 B324-10 01904184 43.43 41.26 B324R-10 01904218 54.08 51.38
XX-Large 14 874-11 66004391 25.08 23.83 874R-11 66004441 28.94 27.49
XX-Large 25 878-11 69300259 53.01 50.36 878R-11 69300309 57.92 55.02
FOR ALL YOUR SAFETY TRAINING NEEDS REFER TO PAGES 2879–2880 2805
LINEMAN’S GLOVES TECHNICAL INFORMATION
Top Grain Cowhide Leather Protectors Top Grain Goatskin Leather Protectors
Novax™ Salisbury Novax™
Price per Pair Price per Pair Price per Pair
L (In.) Size Order # 1-5 6+ Mfr’s # Order # 1-5 6+ L (In.) Size Order # 1-5 6+
10 9 ILP10/9-9H 00041038 $50.81 $45.73 10 8 84491844 $16.05 $14.44 Salisbury Glove Dust Novax™ Glove Bag Salisbury Glove Bag
10 10 ILP10/10-10H 00041046 50.81 45.73 10 9 40631681 16.05 14.44
10 11 ILP10/11-11H 00041053 50.81 45.73 10 10 40110777 16.05 14.44
12 8 A70881669 $23.75 $21.37 10 11 40631673 16.05 14.44
12 9 A63008437 23.75 21.37 ILP3S/9-9H 00041061 56.77 51.09 14 9 A59797795 25.63 23.07
Choose from a variety of approved rubber
12 10 A81156499 23.75 21.37 ILP3S/10-10H 00041079 56.77 51.09 14 10 A59797779 25.63 23.07
12 11 A81932287 23.75 21.37 ILP3S/11-11H 00041087 56.77 51.09 14 11 A59797787 25.63 23.07 gloves according to hand size, class, voltage
ratings, length and styles. Extend the gloves’
14 9 ILP5S/9-9H 00041095 61.39 55.25
14 10 ILP5S/10-10H 00041103 61.39 55.25
lives with separately available leather
14 11 ILP5S/11-11H 00041111 61.39 55.25 Salisbury Glove Dust protectors and glove bags.
16 9 ILP7C/9-9H 00041129 64.40 57.96 Price Ea. • Gloves made of highly dielectric, strong and
16 10 ILP7C/10-10H 00041137 64.40 57.96 Size Mfr’s # Order # 1-5 6+ flexible insulated rubber
16 11 ILP7C/11-11H 00041145 64.40 57.96 6 oz. 10-4 77206928 $11.71 $10.54 • Class 1, 2 and 3 gloves have red interior to alert
wearer to large cuts and snags
Glove Bags • Allow for additional room when selecting
Novax™ Salisbury leather protectors
Price Ea. Price Ea. • Bags in three sizes fit unfolded gloves, and
L (In.) Order # 1-5 6+ Mfr’s # Order # 1-5 6+ each bag comes with a belt clip
11 93880045 $19.20 $18.24 • Glove dust absorbs moisture and perspiration
12 GB112 00041152 $37.45 $33.70 and provides extra comfort
14 93880052 20.41 19.39 GB114 00041160 42.54 38.29 • Compliance: ASTM D120 and IEC 903 (rubber
18 GB118 00041178 46.56 41.90 gloves only)
FOR ALL YOUR SAFETY TRAINING NEEDS REFER TO PAGES 2879–2880 2819
RAINWEAR & HI-VIS CLOTHING
2 Pc. Sandnes Rain Suit Hi-Vis Bomber Jackets
& Sweatshirts
The collection consists of 100% waterproof PVC and
polyurethane coated clothes providing superior Meets ANSI Specs
protection and durability. PVC-coated garments have Bomber Jacket
extremely hard-wearing coatings and are resistant to • Outer jacket is made of fluorescent yellow PVC
water as well as most chemicals, acids and oils. coated polyester plus 3M™ Scotchlite reflective tape
Polyurethane coated clothes are lighter, softer and • Features include a snap on hideaway hood, flip up
more resistant to the cold. collar for wind blocking, zipper and snap front, a
• Extra lightweight radio pocket, two outside hand pockets, and dark
• Oil and cold resistant • 2 Front pockets cuffs, collar and waistband to hide dirt
• Zip closure in front • Snap adjustment at ankle • When it is not quite so cold outside, zip out the inner
• Polyurethane coated knitted polyamide material Sandnes Set - Navy polar fleece jacket and wear the bomber jacket as a
Navy Black two layer jacket, still Class 3
Size Mfr’s # Order # Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea. • Zip off bomber jackets’ yellow sleeves and wear as a
Medium 70625-590-M 86048576 70625-990-M 86048626 $100.42
Class 2 vest. When wearing the jacket without yellow
Large 70625-590-L 86048568 70625-990-L 86048618 100.42 sleeves, as a Class 2 vest, the inner fleece jacket with
X-Large 70625-590-XL 86048584 70625-990-XL 86048634 100.42 fleece sleeves can remain in place
XX-Large 70625-590-2XL 86048592 70625-990-2XL 86048642 100.42 • Remove the inner polar fleece jacket lining with
XXX-Large 70625-590-3XL 86048600 70625-990-3XL 86048659 115.50 sleeves, leaving a Class 2 sleeveless yellow outer vest
with reflective striping
• Lastly, the blue, noncompliant, inner polar fleece
jacket can be worn alone on cool days
Workwear Socks
Lightweight Crewneck Sweatshirt
• 50% Polyester/50% cotton fabric provides
These socks are made from breathable materials and feature a
breathability and comfort
reinforced toe design for durability.
• One 360° horizontal stripe and two vertical shoulder
• Coolmax® material insulates and transports stripes to increase visibility
moisture through point structures
Bomber Jackets - Orange Crew Neck Sweatshirts - Yellow
• Steel toe Cordura material provides added Size Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea. Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea.
protection at the toe and heel
• Wool, lycra and polyamide fibers provide warmth, Medium LUX-TJBJ-OM 64304264 $112.72 LUX-SWTL-YM 64304702 $35.03
Large LUX-TJBJ-OL 64304256 112.72 LUX-SWTL-YL 64304694 35.03
elasticity and strength X-Large LUX-TJBJ-OXL 88579131 112.72 LUX-SWTL-YXL 64304710 35.03
Size Mfr’s # Order # Price per Pair XX-Large LUX-TJBJ-O2X 64304272 123.99 LUX-SWTL-Y2X 64304728 38.19
Small 75724-990-S 81736134 $16.54 XXX-Large LUX-TJBJ-O3X 64304280 135.25 LUX-SWTL-Y3X 64304736 38.25
Medium 75724-990-M 81736126 16.54
Large 75724-990 L 81736100 16.54 • Style: Cold weather/outdoor
X-Large 75724-990-XL 81736142 16.54 • Color: Black
FOR ALL YOUR SAFETY TRAINING NEEDS REFER TO PAGES 2879–2880 2833
CLEANROOM TECHNICAL INFORMATION
Basics of...Cleanrooms
Cleanrooms are classified according to the number and size of particles permitted per volume of air. ISO 14644 Standards were first formed from the US Federal
Standard 209E Airborne Particulate Cleanliness Classes in Cleanrooms and Clean Zones. ISO 14644-1 Standards specify the decimal logarithm of the number of
particles 0.1 μm or larger permitted per cubic meter of air.
ISO 14644-1 Cleanroom Standards
Maximum Particles/m³
FED STD 209E
CLASS *0.1 μm *0.2 μm *0.3 μm *0.5 μm *1 μm *5 μm Equivalent
ISO 1 10 2
ISO 2 100 24 10 4
ISO 3 1,000 237 102 35 8 Class 1
ISO 4 10,000 2,370 1,020 352 83 Class 10
ISO 5 100,000 23,700 10,200 3,520 832 29 Class 100
ISO 6 1,000,000 237,000 102,000 35,200 8,320 293 Class 1000
ISO 7 352,000 83,200 2,930 Class 10,000
ISO 8 3,520,000 832,000 29,300 Class 100,000
ISO 9 35,200,000 8,320,000 293,000 Room Air
FOR ALL YOUR SAFETY TRAINING NEEDS REFER TO PAGES 2879–2880 2843
EMERGENCY EYEWASH TECHNICAL INFORMATION
Combination Eyewash/Shower
The Code of Federal Regulations (29 CFR 1910.151) states, “where the eyes or body of any person may be exposed to injurious corrosive materials, suitable facilities
for quick drenching or flushing of the eyes and body shall be provided within the work area for immediate emergency use.”
This regulation is enforced by OSHA, who typically relies on uniform National Standards for guidance, when conducting facility inspections. The National Standard for
Emergency Eyewashes and Drench Showers is ANSI Z358.1-2009 and it establishes uniform minimum performance and use requirements for Emergency Eyewash
and Drench Shower Equipment and supplemental products.
The main criteria specified in the ANSI Standard that is most useful to Facility Maintenance Managers, Safety Directors, Purchasing Agents or others at a company
location is as follows: Emergency Eyewash Stations & Drench Showers…
• Should be within 10 seconds from a hazard exposure area. This equates to approximately 50 - 100 feet from each hazard
• Should be placed at the same level as the hazard with a clear unobstructed pathway to the equipment
• Should have a highly visible sign on or near the equipment to designate location and have adequate lighting in the area so equipment is easy to find
• Requiring a plumbed water supply should be tested weekly to ensure proper operation and to clear the supply line of sediment build-up and minimize microbial
contamination. Weekly testing should be documented on an inspection tag that is affixed to the equipment
• Is intended to be used for 15 minutes when exposure has occurred. The water supplied to the unit should be “tepid” or lukewarm to avoid risk of scalding or
hypothermic shock. Any equipment that does not have the ability to provide drenching relief for 15 minutes is considered supplemental only
Selecting the Right Emergency Drench Shower & Eyewash Station for Areas with Hazard Exposure Potential Present:
Areas with highly caustic chemicals that could affect the eyes, face and body should install a Combination Drench Shower with Eyewash. Such areas include:
• Battery Charging Stations • Transportation Areas that involve Hazardous Materials or Waste
• Chemical Processing and Storage Areas • Decontamination Applications such as Bio-Terrorism
Areas with a high level of airborne particulates and/or chemicals present that could affect the eyes only should install an Eyewash Station. If minimal exposure to
chemicals is present that could affect other parts of the body, a supplemental drench hose can be added to the Eyewash Station. Such areas include:
• Machine Shops (welding/grinding applications) • Parts Washer locations
• Janitors Closet (where cleaning chemicals are used and stored) • Laboratory that has limited space and drainage capabilities
Areas where freezing conditions exist should install Heat Traced or Frost Proof Emergency Eyewash and Drench Shower Equipment. This will eliminate the risk of pipes
freezing and equipment malfunctioning in the Eyewash or Drench Shower Station. Areas include:
• Chemical Tank Farms – located outside • Chemical Processing/Storage – located outside
• Waste Treatment Ponds • Transportation of Hazardous Materials (railroads, trucks, aviation)
Areas that are remote and do not have a plumbed water supply available should install Portable Self-Contained Eyewashes to include Gravity Fed or Pressurized Units.
Such areas include:
• Construction Sites • Law Enforcement
• Agriculture Operations (pesticide spraying, etc) • Jet Fueling applications
Areas that have limited space available, are at a level that is not conducive to installation of Emergency Drench Shower or Eyewash Equipment, or require minimal
removal of hazardous materials, can use supplemental eyewash products such as Drench Hoses, Personal Bottle Eyewashes or Sprays, prior to reaching equipment
that drenches for 15 minutes.
Halotron Extinguisher Water Extinguisher Dry Chemical Extinguisher Wheeled Fire Extinguisher
UL Fire Extinguisher Rating - Extinguisher ratings indicate fire-fighting capabilities as tested by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. The ratings can be seen on each
extinguisher with a labeled number, followed by a letter. For example, “3-A”, the number (3) indicates the relative power against a certain class (A) of fire (for class
information please see below). The 3-A has triple the power against a common combustible fire compared to one rated 1-A. Class C fire extinguishers are not labeled
with a relative power rating because these fires are a combination of a Class A and Class B with live electrical equipment.
Some chemical extinguishing agents can be used on more than one type of fire, and some have very specialized characteristics that make them particularly suitable for
a specific type of fire situation. Refer to the descriptions below to help you determine what is right for your needs.
Agent Key:
Class A: Common combustibles (wood, paper, cloth, etc.) - fires involve common combustibles such as wood, paper, cloth, rubber, trash and plastics. These fires are
common in a typical home or commercial settings, and can occur anywhere these types of materials are found.
Class B: Flammable liquids and gases (Gasoline, propane and solvents) - fires involve flammable liquids, gases, solvents, oil, gasoline, paint, lacquers, tars and other
synthetic or oil-based products. Class B fires often spread rapidly and can even reflash after the flames are extinguished.
Class C: Live electrical equipment (computers, fax machines, etc.) - fires involve energized electrical equipment, such as wiring, controls, motors, data processing
panels or appliances. They can be caused by a spark, power surge or short circuit.
Class D: Combustible metals (magnesium, lithium, titanium, etc.) - fires involve combustible metals such as magnesium and sodium. Combustible metal fires, which are
unique to industrial hazards, require special dry powder agents.
Class K: Cooking media (cooking oils and fats) - fires involve combustible cooking media such as oils and grease commonly found in commercial kitchens. The new
cooking media formulations used to form commercial food preparations require a special wet chemical extinguishing agent that is specially suited for extinguishing Page
and suppressing these extremely hot fires that have the ability to reflash.
Page 112 2875
FOR ALL YOUR SAFETY TRAINING NEEDS REFER TO PAGES 2879–2880 2875
FALL PROTECTION TECHNICAL INFORMATION
Lanyards and lifelines are used to connect a worker to an anchor point. Systems should be selected to
ensure that workers are never impacted with more than 1800 pounds of arresting force. For this reason,
rope and web lanyards without energy absorbers should only be used for positioning or restraint. Workers
who are close to their anchor point may require a single energy (shock) absorbing lanyard, while workers
moving from one anchor point to another may require a twin-leg energy (shock) absorbing lanyard to
maintain 100% tie off. If additional mobility is required, self-retracting lifelines or rope or cable lifelines with
grabs may be used. Care should be taken to assess the available clearance below a worker and select
equipment, which will prevent the worker from striking an obstruction or lower level.
Anchorage Connectors
Anchor connectors are used to connect lanyards, lifelines or self-retracting lifelines to a suitable anchor point.
Anchor points must conform to applicable fall protection standards, namely, 5000 lbs. strength or twice the
expected load. Possible anchor points may include I-beams, H-beams, concrete walls, pillars and forms, and other
structures. Anchorage connectors may be quite basic, such as snap hooks or carabineers. They are available in
different sizes based on the size of the connection point. For example, a gate opening of 1 inch or less may be Carabineer Anchor D-Ring
sufficient for connection to a D-ring, while a larger opening will be needed to connect to a larger support such as
bracing or angle iron. Anchor D-rings are commonly used on I-beams and H-beams with holes. When holes are not
available, fixed or sliding beam anchors may be appropriate. Anchor straps can be used in applications where there
is structure to wrap around, and can be provided in any length. Rope and cable grabs are used to connect a lanyard
to a rope or cable lifeline. Anchor Sling
Horizontal Lifelines
Horizontal lifelines allow increased mobility while protecting workers from falls. Some systems are designed
for permanent installation, while others are designed to be removed from one work area and installed in
another. Prior to selecting a system, it is important to determine the distance the system must cover (length
of system), the available clearance below the worker, the number of workers who will use the system at the
same time and the strength requirements for anchor points.
FOR ALL YOUR SAFETY TRAINING NEEDS REFER TO PAGES 2879–2880 2881
Page 113
RECHARGEABLE LANTERNS & BATTERY TECHNICAL INFORMATION
Rechargeable Lanterns
Search & Rescue Superstars
When prolonged search and rescue operations are necessary, lanterns that can withstand inclement weather, hold charges
for extended periods and have highly visible beams should prove helpful. These searchlights have all of those characteristics.
Vulcan® Series
• High-intensity halogen 8 watt spot plus xenon dual filament for instant backup beam
• Up to 31⁄4 hours continuous run-time per charge w/included AC/DC chargers and rack
• Red and green LEDs for charge status • Battery is rechargeable up to 500 times
• Compliance: FM (Class I, II & III, Div. 2), CSA (Class I & II, Div. 2, Class III) NFPA, CE, EX
Fire Vulcan® Standard & Vehicle Mount
• High impact ABS thermoplastic waterproof housing Mfr’s #44400
• 3-Position toggle switch designed for easy use w/gloves
• Run-times up to 3 hours w/steady halogen and 2 bright blue LED
bulbs, 6 hours w/blinking bulbs, or 60 hours w/blinking LEDs only
• All include quick-release strap and applicable charging rack w/cords
• Compliance: FM (Class I, II & III, Div. 2), CSA (Class I & II, Div. 2,
Class III) NFPA, CE, EX
Fire Vulcan® LED Standard & Vehicle Mount
• Features a C4 LED that is impervious to shock with a 50,000 hour lifetime and produces
up to 80,000 Candela (Peak Beam Intensity)
• Deep dish parabolic reflector produces a tight beam with optimum peripheral illumination
• The 2 ultra-bright blue taillight LEDs can be seen through thick smoke Mfr’s #44200 Mfr’s #44450
• Run-Times: Steady LED and Taillights - Up to 3 hours to the 10% output level (High) and
up to 6 hours (Low)
• IPX rated design - waterproof to 1 meter for 30 minutes
• Super lightweight lithium ion battery recharges in 5 hours
• 8 total programmable functions - 4 functions when toggle switch in “left” position
and 4 functions when toggle switch is in “right” position.
• Raised handle and toggle “on-off” switch ensure ease of use with a gloved hand
• Fits existing Streamlight Vulcan chargers
• Serialized for positive identification
• Compliance: FM (Class I, Div 2, Class II Div 2, Class III), NFPA, CE
LiteBox® Dual Filament Mfr’s #45109 Mfr’s #45601
• High impact ABS thermoplastic housing w/swivel neck and H.I.D. LiteBox®
rubberized bumper, lens ring and grip handle • Deep-dish parabolic reflector produces a long range high intensity focused, one million
• 8 Watt spot dual filament bulb for instant backup candlepower beam that can illuminate objects up to a mile away
• Up to 8 hours of continuous run-time between charges • Optimum peripheral illumination for scene lighting
• Includes AC/DC charge cords, mounting rack and shoulder strap • Fully articulating head can be aimed precisely at target
• Compliance: CE, NFPA • 35 Watt H.I.D Xenon lamp: 3350 Lumens, 2000 Hr. min. lifetime
Accessory • White 5mm LED (x2): 9 Lumens (each), Impervious to shock with a 100,000 Hr. lifetime
• Runtime: H.I.D. lamp: up to 1.75 Hrs., LEDs: 100 Hrs.+
Desc. Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea. • High-impact ABS thermoplastic housing and weatherproof construction
Dual Filament Replacement Bulb (Vulcan) 45921 04799607 $20.04 • Fits existing LiteBox® mounting racks
8 Watt Bi-pin Replacement Bulb (Vulcan) 45901 07137540 11.89 • Battery rechargeable up to 500 times • Serialized for positive identification
Lead Acid Replacement Battery 44007 60557493 51.94 • Includes AC and DC charge cords and rack
Lanterns
Desc. Battery Type No. of Batteries Peak Candlepower Bulb Type Bulb # Color L (In.) Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea.
Vulcan w/AC/DC Charger (Standard) 6V Sealed Lead Acid 1 80000 1 Halogen & Xenon Backup 45901 Yellow 71⁄2 44000 B76161835 $183.36
Vulcan Dual Filament 6V Sealed Lead Acid 1 80000 1 Halogen 45921 Yellow 71⁄2 44200 B04799573 180.72
Fire Vulcan w/AC/DC Charger (Standard) 6V Sealed Lead Acid 1 80000 1 Halogen & 2 LEDs (Taillight) 45901 Orange 71⁄2 44400 B09679580 208.36
Fire Vulcan w/DC Charger (Vehicle Mount) 6V Sealed Lead Acid 1 80000 1 Halogen & 2 LEDs (Taillight) 45901 Orange 71⁄2 44401 B09679598 195.35
Fire Vulcan LED w/AC/DC Charger (Standard) Lithium-Ion 1 80000 C4 LED/2 Blue Taillight LEDs — Orange 71⁄2 44450 B66745555 315.37
Fire Vulcan LED w/DC Charger (Vehicle Mount) Lithium-Ion 1 80000 C4 LED/2 Blue Taillight LEDs — Orange 71⁄2 44451 B72053937 303.24
LiteBox Standard System 6V Sealed Lead Acid 1 105000 Halogen 45913 Yellow 111⁄2 45109 B54126230 201.10
LiteBox Dual Filament w/AC/DC Charger 6V Sealed Lead Acid 1 70000 Xenon Dual Watt Spot 45921 Yellow 111⁄2 45705 B04799599 229.87
H.I.D. LiteBox w/AC/DC 12V Sealed Lead Acid 1 1000000 1 Xenon & 2 LEDs 45637 Orange 15 45601 B83219444 857.34
Basics of...Batteries
Types of Batteries
Carbon Zinc: Provide economical power in devices requiring light to moderate drain such as remote controls, flashlights, smoke detectors and radios.
Alkaline: Designed for broadest category of heavy current and continuous use devices and have a longer shelf life and higher energy density than carbon zinc batteries.
Lithium: Designed for optimum performance in high drain / high tech devices including electronic medical devices, portable electronic devices, calculators and
watches. Lithium batteries can be used in place of alkaline batteries in most instances to provide a longer life for a device and superior performance in extreme
temperatures.
Silver Oxide: Miniature battery product primarily used in small electronic devices such as watches and car alarm remotes.
Zinc Air: Primarily used in hearing aids and can be used in place of silver oxide batteries in most instances to provide a longer life for the device.
NiCd (Nickel Cadmium): Rechargeable battery used primarily for cordless and wireless phones, power tools and emergency lighting.
NiMH (Nickel-Metal Hydride): Rechargeable battery with a higher energy density and can provide up to 4 times the capacity of the equivalent NiCd battery.
Lead Acid: Wet-cell rechargeable battery with a large power to weight ratio. Commonly used in large back-up power supplies.
Note: For rechargeable battery recycling and disposal information visit the Rechargeable Battery Recycling Corporation at www.RBRC.org or call 1-800-8-battery.
= Eco Friendly Item FOR ALL YOUR SAFETY TRAINING NEEDS REFER TO PAGES 2879–2880 2907
Page 114
IDENTIFICATION TECHNICAL INFORMATION
Basics of...Identification
It’s the law… ANSI Z535 and OSHA 1910.145 - Safety signs are required to indicate and define specific hazards that, without identification, may lead to injury or death.
Select your sign with the header that indicates the degree of hazard in your application.
Use DANGER to indicate an immediate hazard that has a high probability to severe injury or death.
Use WARNING to indicate a potentially hazardous situation that, if not avoided can result in serious injury or death.
Use CAUTION to indicate a potentially hazardous situation that may result in minor or moderate injury, but not death.
Use NOTICE to provide general information needed to avoid confusion.
SAFETY FIRST, THINK, and EMERGENCY and other similar headings are used with information about housekeeping, first aid, health, medical equipment, sanitation and
general safety.
OSHA Guidelines
©
OSHA 29 CFR 1910.15 (1) & NFPA 101 Life Safety Code – the location of fire extinguishers, sprinklers, hoses and alarms are to be clearly marked
OSHA 29 CFR 1910.37 & NFPA 101 Life Safety Code – all exits are to be clearly marked
OSHA 29 CFR 1910.37(q)(1)(3)(4)(6)(8) – an exit sign with an arrow showing the direction is to be placed in every location where the path of travel to the nearest exit is
not apparent. Also all doors, passages and stairways which are not exits and/or may be mistaken as an exit, are to be identified as not an exit or by its property, i.e.
“PROPERTY ROOM”, “CLOSET”, etc.
OSHA 28 CFR & Section 4.1.2(7) of the Americans With Disabilities Act – toilet/bathing facilities that are accessible shall be identified by the International Symbol of
Accessibility
OSHA 29 CFR 1910.1200 – every container of hazardous chemicals must be labeled with chemical name and appropriate hazard warnings so employees are aware of
potential exposure
OSHA 29 CFR 1910.305(b)(3) – covers for boxes are to be permanently marked with “HIGH VOLTAGE” on the outside of the box cover
NEC 430.102 – Disconnecting means for motor, motor circuits and controllers. “The provisions for locking or adding a lock to the disconnecting means shall be
permanently installed “ON” or “AT” the switch or circuit breaker used as the disconnecting means.”
OSHA 29 CFR 1910.145 – where a hazardous situation could result in death or severe injury, signs are to be posted indicating immediate danger and which special
precautions are necessary. Where a hazardous situation is capable of severe injury, signs are to be posted to caution against unsafe practices.
OSHA 29 CFR 1910.145©(2) – caution signs are to be used to warn against potential hazards
OSHA 29 CFR.147 – all energy sources are required to be turned off and locked out while machines are being serviced or maintained. Any energy sources that cannot
be locked out are to use a tag out system.
OSHA 29 CFR 1910.1450(h)(l) and .1200(g)(10) – right to know material safety data sheets must be readily accessible to employees.
OSHA 29 CFR 1910.145 – location signs for eyewash stations and safety showers are recommended.
OSHA 29 CFR 1910.146©(2) – signs are to be posted near permit spaces to notify employees of what hazards may be present with messages such as “PERMIT
REQUIRED CONFINED SPACE.”
NFPA Life Safety Code 5-2.2.5.4 - “Stairs serving five or more stories shall be provided with signage within the enclosure at each floor landing.
The signage shall indicate the story, the terminus of the top and bottom of the stair enclosure, and the identification of the stair. The signage also shall state the story
of, and the direction to, exit discharge.”
Fire Signs
Flammable: Keep Fire Away 1910.106(d)(3)(ii) – Storage cabinets in which flammable liquids are kept must be labeled in a
conspicuous manner “Flammable – Keep Fire Away”
Fire Hose 1910.158 ©(1) - Where reels or cabinets are used to contain a fire hose, the employer must be sure that they are
conspicuously identified and used only for fire equipment.
Fire Extinguisher Marking 1910.157 ©(1) – When portable fire extinguishers are provided, they must be located, mounted, and
identified so that they are readily accessible.
Basics of...Lockout/Tagout
The OSHA standard for The Control of Hazardous Energy, 29 CFR 1910.147 addresses the practices and procedures necessary
to disable machinery or equipment, thereby preventing the release of hazardous energy while employees perform servicing
and maintenance activities. The standard outlines measures for controlling hazardous energies – electrical, mechanical,
hydraulic, pneumatic, chemical, thermal and other energy sources.
In addition, 29 CFR 1910.333 sets forth requirements to protect employees working on electrical circuits and equipment. This
section requires workers to use safe work practices, including lockout and tagging procedures. These provisions apply when
employees are exposed to electrical hazards while working on, near, or with conductors or systems that use electrical energy.
Page
Page 116 2965
Basics of...Matting
Specialty Mats
Electrically Conductive: designed to quickly drain static electricity from workers before it can be passed onto sensitive equipment. The lower the ohm reading, (i.e. 104
ohm is lower than 105 ohm) the faster the static electricity is drawn off the worker. Mats with lower ohm readings should be used in very sensitive areas. A ground
cord and heel grounders are mandatory accessories.
Non-conductive or Switchboard: designed for use in dry areas around high voltage equipment. These mats ground the worker and protect them from deadly voltage.
Clean Room: trap impurities in areas that require dirt control. The tacky surface pulls dirt from shoe soles before they contaminate a “Clean Room”. Each mat consists
of 30 layers of tacky film that can be peeled away and discarded as they become dirty.
Emergency Shower Station: for use under Emergency Showers and Eyewash Stations. These color coded mats draw attention to the emergency equipment and keep
accident victims from slipping.
Welding Anti-Fatigue Mats: sponge-backed mats that are highly resistant to weld sparks and hot metal shards. Their thick durable surface is bonded to a resilient and
comfortable sponge base.
Absorbent Matting: a disposable product that absorbs leaks, drips, over-sprays and small spills. Can be used alone or placed under other perforated matting. Simply
dispose of these mats when they become saturated and replace with a clean dry piece. This matting comes in rolls and is easily cut to size.
Basics of...Sorbents
Sorbents are used to absorb spilled liquids. Depending on the product selected, they can be used to absorb routine leaks and drips in basic maintenance applications,
or they can be used in emergency response situations.
Regulations to Consider
• OSHA 29 CFR 1910.22(a) requires clean, dry, slip free floors in the workplace
• EPA 40 CFR 112.7 (c) refers to the use of sorbents as one method of preventing oil spills from reaching waterways and groundwater
CAUTION: some sorbents, sold as Universal, are made with organic materials (cellulose, peat moss, corn cob, etc.) and cannot be used on “aggressive fluids” (acids
and caustics) without danger of chemical reaction.
Typical Applications
Pads – under machines and workstations to catch leaks and drips, used also to “wipe down” parts and equipment
Rolls – for larger areas, under conveyors, alongside equipment. Perfed rolls can also be used as pads.
Socks – wrap around the base of machines and equipment to catch liquids at the source
Pillows - under machines for heavier volume, in hard to access locations
Rugs and Matting – in medium to high traffic areas to walk and drive on
2990 READY TO ORDER? VISIT mscdirect.com OR CALL 800-645-7270 = Eco Friendly Item
SAFETY CANS TECHNICAL INFORMATION
Chemical Sorbents
These are specially developed chemical sorbents with properties that make them ideal for hazardous liquid cleanup. A surfactant-treated polypropylene, they absorb 16 times
their weight in chemicals, water or oil. Versatile and cost-effective, they can be used on a wide range of chemicals, including hydrofluoric acid. Their fast wicking actions
minimize the problems of hazmat spills. They are chemically inert, so they will not react with aggressive fluids. They are certified by GTS Duratek and leaves on 0.20% ash.
The product’s green color - the universal symbol for safety - indicates that it is intended for use on hazardous materials.
Pro-Safe SPC
Size Box Price Ea. Price Ea.
Type W L Qty. Capacity Order # 1-4 5+ Capacity Mfr’s # Order # 1-4 5+
Pads 12w 12w 200 20 Gal. UN1113 00922344 $110.09 $104.59
Pads 15w 18w 100 29 Gal. B04019782 $88.83 $84.39 24 Gal. UN1719 1
00260885 111.54 105.96
Pads 15w 19w 200 44 Gal. 04019790 86.98 82.63
Roll 15w 150v 2 58 Gal. B04019816 141.81 134.72 39 Gal. UN1019 90987868 167.39 159.02
Roll 30w 150v 1 58 Gal. B04019808 153.93 146.23 39 Gal. UN3800 00922351 181.70 172.61
1
Size: 15w x 19w
Type I Safety Can Type II Safety Can Lab Can Oily Waste Can
The handling of hazardous liquids is subject to both safety and health regulations requiring protection for employees who work with flammable, combustible and
explosive liquids. Approved safety cans are considered the first line of defense to guard against fire by safely containing these hazardous liquids and liquid soaked
materials, while controlling vapor release and by meeting federal, state and local fire codes and complying with federal OSHA regulations.
Compliance and Regulatory Requirements
Approved safety cans are required by OSHA in commercial and industrial operations where flammable liquids are used or stored. Construction, performance, safety
and quality standards are established by NFPA Code 30 and OSHA 29 CFR 1910.106 (Flammable & Combustible Liquids Codes) and are evaluated by Factory Mutual
Research (FM) Approval Standard 6051 and 6052, Underwriters Laboratories (UL) Standard 30 or UL-Canada for approval.
NFPA 30 and OSHA 29 CFR 1910.106 (a)(29) define a safety can as an approved container, of not more than 5 gallons capacity, having a spring-closing lid and spout
cover and so designed that it will safely relieve internal pressure when subjected to fire exposure.
OSHA 29 CFR 1926.152 (Construction Standard Code) states “Only approved containers and portable tanks shall be used for storage and handling of flammable and
combustible liquids. Approved safety cans shall be used for the handling and use of flammable liquids in quantities greater than one gallon. For quantities of one gallon
or less, only the original container or approved safety cans shall be used for storage, use and handling of flammable liquids.”
Features and Optional Styles
Safety cans are available in various styles, sizes and construction materials to meet most storage and handling requirements. Type I and II Safety Cans feature leak-
tight spring-closing lids with gaskets designed to effectively relieve pressure buildup in the can and feature a fixed or free-swinging handle design, warning labels in 3
languages and flame arresters in all spout openings. Safety cans are also available in styles for handling and disposal of flammable liquids in the workplace, such as
Oily Waste Cans, Bench Cans and Plunger Cans.
Styles
Type I Safety Cans feature one spout that serves for both filling and dispensing. Type II Safety Cans feature two spouts, one for filling, and one with an actuated pour
valve with a flexible metal spout for safer controlled dispensing. Type I cans are also available in Lab Cans, Disposal Cans and Faucet Can styles. Oily Waste Cans are
for disposal of solvent laden rags and have a self-closing lid to prevent spontaneous combustion. Bench and Plunger Cans are designed to control vapor release and
free liquids in cleaning operations.
Safety Can Colors
Safety cans are available in a variety of colors in order to help separate, organize and identify the chemicals inside, as well as to assist first responders in the case of an
emergency. OSHA 29 CFR 1910.144 states “Safety cans or other portable containers of flammable liquids having a flash point at or below 80° F, shall be painted red
with some additional clearly visible identification either in the form of a yellow band around the can or the name of the contents conspicuously marked on the can in
yellow.” Industry accepted can colors are as follows:
Red – Gasoline or other flammable liquids Yellow - Diesel fuel Blue - Kerosene
Construction Materials
Safety cans are available in coated steel (galvanized or terne) with baked-on powder-coat finish for use with gasoline, kerosene, diesel and other flammables, Non-
metallic (HDPE) with stainless steel or coated fittings for use with solvents, fuels and corrosive chemicals and stainless steel with stainless steel fittings for use with
alcohols, ethers, toluene and xylene, but not for use with strong acids, hydroxides or other corrosive solvents.
2998 READY TO ORDER? VISIT mscdirect.com OR CALL 800-645-7270 = Eco Friendly Item
Page 119
SAFETY CABINETS TECHNICAL INFORMATION
Safety cabinets are available in one or two doors and in 3 different door-closing
styles: Manual, Self-Closing and Sliding Door-Self-Closing. OSHA codes accept any
of these styles, however, States that have adopted the Uniform Fire Code require
self-closing doors, which provide an extra measure of protection.
Cabinet Capacity
Safety cabinets are available in sizes/capacities ranging from 2 gallons up to 120 gallons. Stated sizes and capacities are based upon the type of container being stored,
such as 12-ounce aerosol cans, 1-gallon paint cans, 5-gallon gas cans, 30-gallon drums or 55-gallon drums. For example, a 45-gallon flammable storage cabinet will
hold 9-5 gal containers. Cabinets are available in several styles such as floor, counter-top, under-counter, wall-mount, space saver, stackable, drum storage and with
legs. All styles have adjustable shelves to accommodate various container sizes.
Chemical Storage/Cabinet Colors
Colors help separate, organize and identify the chemicals inside. This organization will assist first responders in the case of an emergency. Regulatory codes do not
specify safety cabinet colors. However, industry has accepted the following standards:
Yellow - Flammable Liquids Red - Combustible Liquids Blue - Acid & Corrosive Liquids
Construction Materials
Safety cabinets are available in baked-on powder coated steel with steel shelves for flammable/combustibles, acids/corrosives and pesticides/insecticides and also in
polyethylene for aggressive acids such as nitric, sulfuric and hydrochloric. There are also many accessories available for safety cabinets such as poly shelf liners,
shelves, bonding/grounding wires, dolly carts, ramps, self-closing kits, roller conveyors, etc. Page
3002
Page 120
Spill Pallet with Optional Ramp Spill Platform with Optional Ramp
Containment of hazardous materials is required for the protection of the environment from contamination, the facility from potential fire hazards and for the protection
of employees who work in areas where hazardous materials are stored or used.
Compliance and Regulatory Requirements
The Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) addresses the need for facilities that store, use, transfer or dispose of hazardous materials to store containers in some
kind of containment system. Stationary containers (tanks), as well as portable storage containers (55-gallon drums), are required to have a system that will protect the
environment from contamination if a leak were to occur. Facilities required to meet the Uniform Fire Code (UFC) are also required to provide for containment of
hazardous materials. Portable container containment is addressed in EPA 40 CFR 264.175, Subpart I, Use and Management of Containers and in UFC, Section 80,
Division III, Hazardous Materials Storage Requirements.
In EPA 40 CFR 264.175, a containment system must be designed and operated as follows: “The containment system must have sufficient capacity to contain 10% of
the volume of containers or the volume of the largest container, whichever is greater. The containers must also be elevated or otherwise protected from contact with
accumulated liquid.” Please review the EPA and UFC codes for a complete detail of requirements.
In UFC, Section 80, Div. IV, 80.402(b)(2)(F), Dispensing and Use, “Rooms or areas where hazardous materials liquids are dispensed into containers exceeding 1-gallon
capacity or used in open containers or systems exceeding a 5-gallon capacity shall be provided with a means to control spills. Secondary containment shall be
provided when the capacity of an individual container exceeds 55 gallons or the aggregate capacity of multiple containers exceeds 100 gallons.”
Selection Criteria for Portable Containment Systems
Portable containment systems are much less expensive than are stationary systems and will be the focus of this product review. When selecting a portable
containment system for your facility, you should consider the following:
• Chemical Compatibility: portable systems are constructed of either high density polyethylene (HDPE) or painted steel. HDPE systems are resistant to a wider range of
corrosive chemicals and are typically easier to inspect and to clean
• Volume & Weight: a wide variety of system configurations are available to accommodate container sizes from 1-gallon bottles, 55 gallon drums or IBC tanks, with
weight and capacity ratings based upon static loaded conditions. Refer to listed capacity and weight ratings of the products to make sure they meet both your
requirements and all state and federal regulations
• Mobility/Stack-ability: portable systems are designed to be moved without containers on them. Pallet systems have fork pockets, whereas platform units do not.
Portable systems should not be stacked unless noted otherwise by the manufacture’s specifications
• Loading: portable systems have evolved to a low-profile design to accommodate the use of loading ramps, which are readily available. Higher profile designs continue
to require mechanical loading
• Flammable Chemicals: require special consideration when stored on portable systems. Check your local fire codes for these additional specifications (bonding/
grounding, quantity limitations, etc.)
• Spill Cleanup: determine how the system will be monitored and cleaned. Many of the portable units come with drains, however, a spill cleanup kit may be necessary to
have available in case of spills
• Compliance: in addition to the above noted regulations, state and local codes may vary significantly. Check with local authorities, such as the Fire Marshall, for
additional spill containment requirements
• Indoor/Outdoor: portable systems are available for both indoor and outdoor use. Outdoor units are configured mainly as weather resistant buildings, available in both
HDPE and metal. Mobile units are also available to transport smaller quantities of chemicals between workstations
Page 3006
Page 121
Expanded Steel Mesh Outdoor Waste Container Manually Operated Trash Compactor
Easy, safe method of compacting trash. Operate by placing a drum of refuse on the
• Constructed of hot-dipped galvanized base and compact by working the ram lever like an auto jack.
expanded metal mesh Wt. (Lbs.) Order # Price Ea. • Delivers 7000 Lbs. of compacting force
• Six vertical supporting ribs • For all types of refuse - plastic containers, disposable clothing,
• Galvanized steel mesh 31 09338062 $284.00
paper and cardboard, filters, aluminum cans and more
• 48 gal. 33H x 235⁄8w Dia.
Order # Price Ea. • 29wW x 27wD x 88wH
02678266 $875.19 • Weight: 170 Lbs. FOB Factory
Air Operated Container Crusher
Crush waste pails, paint cans, metal filters. Standard 100 psi
shop air generates crushing force of 13000 Lbs. Air Operated Trash Compactor
• Safety feature makes unit impossible to
engage unless door is closed Designed for compacting needs where speed is important. Connect to air supply up
• Recessed bottom to drain remaining fluids to a maximum of 250 psi. Complete compacting cycle takes only a few seconds.
into a drum or pail FOB Factory
• Crushes metal, plastic or fiber cans and pails up to 15wH x 12wD • For all types of refuse, including paper, cardboard,
• 22wW x 20wD x 43wH • Weight: 240 Lbs. cloth, filters and aluminum cans
• 90 psi shop air will generate 2500 Lbs. of force
Desc. Order # Price Ea.
W (In.) D (In.) Ht. (In.) Wt. (Lbs.) Order # Price Ea.
Can Crusher 02678282 $3956.42 Shown w/Optional Floor Stand 29 27 75 210 02678274 $4893.39 FOB Factory
37wH Floor Stand for Can Crusher 02678290 173.63 Safety Note: Do not use on glass
Deck Mops
Twist N Mop
Capacity Order # Price Ea.
Desc. Case Qty. Order # Price Ea. 16 oz. 09310160 $7.73 • Permanent wood handle,
Twist N Mop (Self- 4 09316258 $26.33 20 oz. 09310178 9.15 one piece
wringing deck mop) 24 oz. 09310186 11.95 • Quality poly blend, at an
• Premium cotton blend, loop end inexpensive price
Twist N Mop Refill 6 09316266 14.19 32 oz. 09310194 13.23
Basics of...Shelving
For storage of items that are handled manually. Our wide versatility of shelving offers a range of multi-purpose and economical storage solutions. Steel shelving should
comply with federal, local, state, building and fire codes.
Wire Shelving
Open wire design allows light and air to flow through. Dust and dirt is minimized. Efficiency of sprinkler systems is enhanced and may be mandated by fire codes.
Posts are furnished with adjustable levelers to compensate for uneven surfaces. Recommended for restaurants, hospitals, retail businesses, product displays, freezers
and coolers.
Types of Material/Finishes:
Chrome Finish: Widely used in electronics production. Bright nickel plating followed by chrome plating for a deep, chrome finish. NSF
Listed.
Epoxy Finish: Multi-layered finish of zinc chloride and clear chromate, topped with an epoxy sealer for high corrosion resistance. NSF listed.
Microban®: Antimicrobial protection material. Inhibits the growth of mold, bacteria, mildew and fungi that cause odors, stains and
degradation of products. Microban® and the Microban® symbol are registered trademarks of Microban® Products Co..
Polymer: High strength and maximum corrosion resistance. Perfect for humid and damp conditions or where frequent cleaning is needed.
Stainless Steel: When the very best is in demand. 304 Stainless is highly resistant to corrosion, rust, dirt and moisture and looks great even
with years of continued use. Ideal for use in hospitals, food service, electronics and clean room applications. Use where high corrosion
resistance is needed. NSF listed for all environments.
Zinc Brite: Best for general use applications. Zinc plating has a clear epoxy coating with a chrome look and helps safeguard against rust.
NSF Listed. Wire Shelf
Steel Shelving Types
U.S. Std. Gg. Metric
Nominal Conversion
Gauge Thickness (In.) (mm)
Shelving Styles
Open Shelving: The low cost, open air shelving design gives high visibility and fast accessibilty in finding stored items.
Back and side braces are easy to install for stability. Ideal for movable and “high-rise” storerooms and used when less
protection is needed.
Closed Shelving: Designed to protect stored materials on all sides and prevents them from falling off the shelf. Closed
shelving has a cleaner finished look and offers more protection than the open shelf unit because of the side and back
panels. Ideal for most offices and perfect when you need key control.
Boltless Shelving:
Very versatile for many shelving applications and easy to assemble at a low
cost. No nuts and bolts needed, just a hammer. Shelf units are ideal for 2-sided
entry because there is no cross braces required. Recommended for storage of
Open Closed
larger items such as boxes, parts, cartons, inventory in warehouses, tool cribs
and maintenance departments.
Bin Unit Shelving: Space efficient storage
Single Rivet: Industrial strength, economical and shelves are fully enclosed units. Great
provides maximum vertical distance between shelves for inventory control and can be used to
for easy access build partitions or storage walls. Fast
Double Rivet: Rugged, high capacity shelving is used set-up and easy assembly to fit any
for heavy applications and where greater stability is warehouse or shop layout.
needed
3102 CALL MSC TODAY 800-645-7270 FOR ALL YOUR INDUSTRIAL NEEDS
STORAGE RACKS TECHNICAL INFORMATION
Types of Racks
Pallet
Cantilever
Stacking
Boltless Storage Racks: Designed for light
weight bulk items that are hand loaded. One
of the most versatile and economic storage
methods available. Quick and easy assembly, Horizontal/Vertical Bar Racks: Designed for light-
no bolts or clips required. Shelves are duty storage of long items. Recommended for
accessible on all four sides. Ideal for record maintenance departments, storage areas, tool
storage, large and bulky items, warehouses rooms and machine centers.
and shipping areas.
Conductive Bins
• Specialty containers are manufactured from a carbon filled polypropylene that dissipates the build up of a static charge
• Also known as conductive, ESD (Electro Static Dissipative), or static safe bins
• Conductive material is available in black color only
• Ideal for manufacturing or storage environments where static safe storage is required
Fiberglass Bins Steel Bins
• Next to steel, the strongest type of bins available • The strongest bins available but also the most expensive
• Ideal for storage in extreme temperature environments or where heavy and • Ideal for usage in extreme temperature settings and where large and/or heavy
or rugged parts need storage or transport parts are being stored
• Manufactured of high strength fiberglass reinforced polyester resin • Manufactured of channel reinforced steel
Types of Plastic
• Polypropylene (PP): a high impact plastic resin known for its stiffness and durability providing a good combination of rigidity as well as toughness. Considered
virtually unbreakable. Provides good chemical and abrasion resistance. Typically are autoclavable and may be steam sterilized up to 250°F.
• Polyethylene (HDPE): very similar to polypropylene, known to be a little more flexible and highly crack resistant.
• Polystyrene or Styrene: resists moisture, oil and many chemicals. While tough, they are not as resistant to breakage as either polypropylene or polyethylene.
• Fiberglass: a reinforced polyester resin known for superb strength. Many of the containers can hold up to 3000 lbs, much more than others in the industry. Withstands
extreme temperature range as well as many chemicals and solvents. Perfect for handling items from -40 to +240° F. Autoclavable and may be steam sterilized.
• Carbon Filled Polypropylene: black colored resin used in the manufacturing of conductive or ESD applications. Resin prevents the buildup of a static charge thus
protecting electronic components or parts that are stored within these types of containers. Offers the same properties as mentioned above for polypropylene Page
Page 126 3123
Locking Systems
• External Lock Bars: Lower end priced cabinets and chests usually have an external lock bar that requires the use of a purchased lock
by the user. The lock bar is typically mounted in a way to deter most common thieves. Lock bars are functional, inexpensive and
obvious. These are usually found on homeowner or hobbyist tool carts or project centers.
• Conventional Keyed Locks: The most common on professional units. They are found on retail, industrial
and automotive professional tool cabinets and chests. They are cost effective and usually very secure.
• Round/Tubular High Security Keyed Locks: Usually found on high-end professional cabinets and Conventional
chests when security is very critical. The keys and lock openings are shaped round and the key has Keyed Lock
slightly different notches or pins around its surface that engage with the locking mechanism.
Typically they are constructed of heavier gauge steel than conventional locks and considered to
provide a higher degree of security and be more difficult to pick with common tooling.
• Groove Cut Keyed Locks: This type of lock is usually associated with expensive sports Groove Cut
cars. A slightly wider key engages the lock on multiple levels providing additional High Security External Lock Bars
security. The technology behind this locking method is much more difficult to defeat Keyed Lock Round/Tubular
with common tools. High Security Keyed Lock
3148 CALL MSC TODAY 800-645-7270 FOR ALL YOUR INDUSTRIAL NEEDS
Page 127
CASTER & WHEEL TECHNICAL INFORMATION
Basics of...Casters
3206 CALL MSC TODAY 800-645-7270 FOR ALL YOUR INDUSTRIAL NEEDS
Page 129
CASTER & WHEEL TECHNICAL INFORMATION
3272 CALL MSC TODAY 800-645-7270 FOR ALL YOUR INDUSTRIAL NEEDS
Page 131
CABLE PULLERS & HOIST TECHNICAL INFORMATION
WARNING! THESE PRODUCTS ARE FOR INDUSTRIAL USE. THEY ARE NOT TO BE USED TO SUPPORT, TRANSPORT OR LIFT PEOPLE. CALL 800-645-7270 3283
LEVER HOISTS, PULLERS & HAND CHAIN HOISTS TECH INFO
Aluminum Heavy-Duty Short Short Handle Pullers
Handle Ratchet Lever Hoists Mfr’s Lifetime Warranty
• Ideal for tight quarters and confined spaces, the short handle puller
Series PA Ideal for Construction & Commercial Applications Mfr’s Lifetime features provides superior durability in a rugged lifting, positioning
Warranty and pulling tool
• Provides high quality and durability
• Extremely low handle effort and 360° rotating handle make it easy to operate, and the one- • Capacities: 1500 Lbs. to 6000 Lbs. • Lift range: 5v
handed free chaining mechanism provides easy rigging • Easy one-hand operation
• Capacities: 1,500 Lbs. to 6,000 Lbs. • Lift range: 5v to 20v • Handle rotates 360°, making it easy to operate in any position and
• Unit and handle made from high strength ductile aluminum alloy in small spaces
• Compact design increases portability and rigging efficiency • Tough, yet lightweight, aluminum construction and powder coat finish
• Double reduction gearing and short handle provide low handle effort • Hoistaloy™ hardened steel load chain for strength, long wear
• 360° Rotating handle: Provides versatile rigging options when used in confined spaces life and flexibility
• State-of-the-art free wheeling mechanism allows quick and easy one-handed take-up and • Free chaining for fast, easy attachment to load
positioning of slack chain • Forged upper and lower hooks with latches
• Enclosed self-adjusting screw and disc type load brake stays clean and dry, eliminating drift • Simple construction with fewer parts for ease of maintenance
and backlash for safe, secure holding • Meets or exceeds ASME/ANSI B30.21 • Metric Rated
• Screw-and-disc brake lowering allows “micro-inching” load positioning Cap. (Lbs.) Std. Lift (Ft.) Avg. Handle Effort (Lbs.) Order # Price Ea.
Cap. Lift No. of Min. Head Handle Avg. Handle Wt. 1500 5 45 02404457 $434.55
(Lbs.) (Ft.) Load Chains Room (In.) L (In.) Effort (Lbs.) (Lbs.) Order # Price Ea. 3000 5 55 02404432 593.42
1500 5 1 12 12 37 16 66035346 $353.91 6000 5 62 02404440 758.53
1500 10 1 12 12 37 18 66035353 383.66
1500 15 1 12 12 37 20 66035361 454.61
1500 20 1 12 12 37 22 66035379 488.67
2000 5
2000 10
1
1
13
13
12
12
49
49
16
18
66035387
66035395
422.22
436.32
Puller Lever Hoists
2000 15 1 13 12 49 20 66035403 512.37
2000 20 1 13 12 49 22 66035411 533.77 • Capacities: 1500 Lbs. to 12000 Lbs. • Standard lift: 5v Mfr’s Lifetime Warranty
• Designed for heavy-duty construction and industrial applications
3000 5 1 141⁄2 12 41 26 66035429 546.80
• Use to pull, lift, drag or stretch
3000 10 1 141⁄2 12 41 30 66035437 593.05
3000 15 1 141⁄2 12 41 34 66035445 639.39 • Tough aluminum alloy constuction; powder coat finish
3000 20 1 141⁄2 12 41 38 66035452 685.68 • Weatherproof for outdoor service
• Simple construction with fewer parts for ease of maintenance and
6000 5 2 171⁄2 12 61 43 66035460 703.37 lower inventories
6000 10 2 171⁄2 12 61 50 66035478 796.68 • Hoistaloy™ hardened steel link type load chain for strength, long
6000 15 2 171⁄2 12 61 57 66035486 888.49 wear life and flexibility
6000 20 2 171⁄2 12 61 64 66035494 983.27 • Weatherized Weston-type automatic braking system for positive
load control
• Easy, one-hand operation and control - only 58 Lbs. of pull
required for 3⁄4 ton model capacity
Ratchet Lever Hoists • Forged upper and lower hooks with latches standard
• Free wheeling for fast and easy attachment to load
Series RA Mfr’s Lifetime Warranty • Meet or exceed ASME/ANSI B30.21 • Metric Rated
• Aluminum ratchet hoist that utilizes a ratchet and pawl design for lifting, pulling and binding Cap. Avg. Handle Wt. Min. Dist.
• Capacities: 1,500 Lbs. to 12,000 Lbs. (Lbs.) Effort (Lbs.) (Lbs.) Btwn. Hooks (In.) Order # Price Ea.
• Rugged unit and handle made from malleable iron
• Riveted construction makes the unit tamper-resistant 1500 58 14 103⁄4 89788863 $448.79
• Free chaining mechanism allows quick and easy take-up and positioning of slack 3000 83 24 141⁄4 89788871 620.06
chain. Hoist will not free chain when under load 6000 95 34 17 89788889 807.94
• Handle stop prevents handle from spinning if the operator accidentally releases it 12000 96 65 213⁄8 89788897 1528.26
• Multiple rigging option: Hoist can lift, pull or bind. Unit can be operated from
either side and will work in any position with equal efficiency
Cap Lift No. of Min. Head Handle Avg. Handle Wt.
(Lbs.) (In.) Load Chains Room (In.) L (In.) Effort (Lbs.) (Lbs.) Order # Price Ea.
1500 561⁄2 1 13 183⁄4 56 18 03533056 $496.60
3000 57 2 15 183⁄4 60 22 03533064 711.80
6000 57 2 175⁄8 275⁄8 120 39 03533072 893.90
12000 53 4 25 335⁄8 124 68 03533080 1820.88
Applications
Hand chain hoists are most often used as an in-plant tool for periodic maintenance applications. A typical use might be for lifting pumps, generators, or other heavy
equipment in water treatment facilities. Whether used in construction, machine shops, automotive garages, farms, or in the private home, hundreds of applications
exist for a hand chain hoist.
CAUTION: This equipment is intended for industrial use only and should NOT be used to lift, support, or otherwise transport people, or to suspend loads over people.
3286 WARNING! THESE PRODUCTS ARE FOR INDUSTRIAL USE. THEY ARE NOT TO BE USED TO SUPPORT, TRANSPORT OR LIFT PEOPLE. CALL 800-645-7270
Page 133
ELECTRIC HOISTS & TECHNICAL INFORMATION
Mini-Electric Cable Hoists
For Use with Single or Double Hook 880 Lb. Capacity Mini-Electric Hoist
Mini-size power driven electric hoist suitable for small volume and assembly. Can be used to • Capacity: 440 Lbs. for single hook
lift and unload goods in light industrial settings and other applications such as restaurants. • Capacity: 880 Lbs. for double hook
440 Lb. Capacity Mini-Electric Hoist • Line speed: 33 feet/minute, 16w double cable
• Capacity: 220 Lbs. for single hook • Capacity: 440 Lbs. for double hook • Lifting height: 38v single lift, 19v double lift
• Line Speed: 33 feet/minute, 16w double cable • Cable: 9⁄64w diameter steel strands
• Lifting Height: 38v single lift, 19v double lift • Motor: 11⁄8 HP, 3400 RPM
• Cable: 1⁄8w diameter steel strands • Motor: 5⁄8 HP, 1725 RPM • Power supply: 110V AC, 850 watts, 8 amp, 1 phase, 60Hz
• Power supply: 110V AC, 460 watts, 4.5 amp, 1 phase, 60Hz • Power cord: UL approved, 3 pronggrounded,
• Power cord: UL approved, 3 prong grounded, double insulated 60348448 double insulated
• Remote switch: 5.5v cable length • Mounting clamps: 15⁄8w dia. • Remote switch: 5.5v cable length
Accessories Included: Mounting clamps for attaching hoist to Cable Hoist • Mounting clamps: 15⁄8w diameter
Cable Hoist 60348455
fixed overhead or rotating support. Remote switch with water Lifting Wt.
sealed power switch, for safe operation. 38v steel wire cable Cap. (Lbs.) (Lbs.) Order # Price Ea. Lifting Cap. (Lbs.) Wt. (Lbs.) Order # Price Ea.
with sheaved pulley lift hook and weighted lift hook.
Stabilizing weight on primary lift hook. Built-in cable guide. 220/440 24.2 60348448 $290.45 440/880 36.3 60348455 $461.31
Selection Criteria
Load Capacity (lbs. or tons): The weight of the load to be lifted. A hoists rated capacity is the maximum load for which the hoist is designed by the manufacturer to lift.
Carefully consider the load weight including attachments such as slings, grabs, spreader beams etc. and the capacity of the hoist..
Lift (ft.): The maximum length of travel required for raising and lowering the load. Standard lifts are generally 8, 10, 15, and 20 foot lifts.
Lifting Medium: Chain or wire rope. Is true vertical lift required? Power Supply Voltage such as 115V single phase, 230V 3-phase or 460V 3-phase.
Control Voltage: A reduced control circuit voltage (24 or 115 volts) accomplished by the use of a transformer in the hoist. This prevents the higher power supply
voltage from reaching the operator through the hoist’s push button station.
Push Button Cord length: Standard length is approximately 4 ft. less than lift.
Power Cord Length: Standard lengths vary by manufacturer and/or hoist model.
Abnormal Operating Conditions: Will the hoist function properly in its environment? (Corrosive, outdoor, dusty/dirty, extreme temp. ranges, hazardous locations, etc.).
Duty Cycle Requirements: Does the specific hoist you select meet the application duty requirement? Using a lower Service Classification Duty rating than your need will
result in shorter hoist life that may not be covered by manufacturer’s limited warranty.
Type of Suspension: Hook (swivel or rigid), lug, trolley (push, hand geared, or motorized).
Headroom Requirements: The distance between the bearing surfaces of the upper and lower hook at the high hook position (or the minimum distance between hooks).
Trolley Hand Chain Drop (ft.): For hand-geared trolleys. For those with trolleys.
Trolley Speed Feet Per Minute (fpm): For those with a motorized trolley.
Beam Size: The type of beam that the trolley will operate on.
CAUTION: This equipment is intended for industrial use only and should NOT be used to lift, support, or otherwise transport people, or to suspend loads over people.
3288 WARNING! THESE PRODUCTS ARE FOR INDUSTRIAL USE. THEY ARE NOT TO BE USED TO SUPPORT, TRANSPORT OR LIFT PEOPLE. CALL 800-645-7270 Page
Page 134 3288
ELECTRIC CHAIN HOISTS & AIR HOISTS TECHNICAL INFORMATION
Heavy-Duty Electric Chain Hoists
High performance hoists engineered for heavy-duty industrial service. Designed for safety, these hoists incorporate mechanical load brake, motor brake and overload H4 Heavy-Duty
clutch as standard. Available with top hook or with a plain trolley. Mfr’s Lifetime Warranty
• Capacities and lifts: Rated loads from ⁄4 to 2 tons, with 10, 15, and 20v lifts. Standard push
1
Hoist with Plain Trolley
button drop is 4v less than lift, CSA approved Includes Hoist and a Trolley with these Features:
• Voltage and motor options: 115/230-single phase; 230/460-three phase, 60 Hz • Parallel mounting standard
• Mechanical load brake: Weston type, controls load lowering and prevents load drift. Holds • Trolley adjustable: For 6w to 8w American Standard I-beams with
rated load independent of multiple disc motor brake recommended 4v minimum radius
• Multiple disc motor brake: Heavy-duty, direct acting design for positive load spotting and holding • Wraparound side plates: Act as safety lugs and as bumpers to protect wheels
• 5-pocket load sheave: Increases chain and sheave engagement 25% over hoists with conventional • Precision trolley wheels: Machined, cast iron wheels with sealed, lifetime
4-pocket sheaves. Provides smoother lifting and reduces chain wear over 4-pocket sheaves lubricated ball bearings for extended trolley life
• Limit switches: Adjustable to regulate upper and lower load travel. Brass nuts standard for improved
switch setting and repeatability. Stainless steel limit switch shaft standard
• Solid state starting switch: Standard on single phase unit. Provides greater reliability and starting WARNING: The equipment shown is intended for industrial
consistency than centrifugal switches - fewer components to wear out or fail use only and should not be used to lift, support, or otherwise
• Overload clutch: Protects hoist, operator and supporting structures from damaging overloads, chain transport people, or to suspend loads over people.
jamming, and reverse phasing
• Meets or exceeds ASME/ANSI B30.21
Hoist w/Rigid Top Hook - EC Models Hoist w/Plain Trolley Models - ECT
Lift 1 Ph. 115/230V 3 Ph. 230/460V 1 Ph. 115/230V 3 Ph. 230/460V
Cap. Lift Motor Speed No. of Min. Hd. Wt. 1 Ph. Wt. 3 Ph. Min. Hd. Wt. 1 Ph. Wt. 3 Ph.
(Tons) (Ft.) (HP) (FPM) Chains Rm. (In.) (Lbs.) Order # (Lbs.) Order # Price Ea. Rm. (In.) (Lbs.) Order # (Lbs.) Order # Price Ea.
1⁄4 10 1⁄4 16 1 167⁄8 100 66033002 106 66033366 $2185.73 1711⁄32 145 66033812 151 66034174 $2539.65
1⁄4 10 1⁄2 32 1 167⁄8 108 66033010 112 66033374 2307.15 1711⁄32 153 66033820 157 66034182 2661.07
1⁄4 15 1⁄4 16 1 167⁄8 104 66033036 110 66033390 2270.15 1711⁄32 149 66033846 155 66034208 2624.08
1⁄4 15 1⁄2 32 1 167⁄8 110 66033044 114 66033408 2391.56 1711⁄32 156 66033853 160 66034216 2745.42
1⁄4 15 1 64 1 167⁄8 120 66033051 119 66033416 2708.45 1711⁄32 165 66033861 164 66034224 3062.38
1⁄4 20 1⁄4 16 1 167⁄8 108 66033069 114 66033424 2354.53 1711⁄32 153 66033879 159 66034232 2708.45
1⁄4 20 1⁄2 32 1 167⁄8 114 66033077 118 66033432 2475.95 1711⁄32 159 66033887 163 66034240 2829.89
1⁄2 10 1⁄4 9 1 167⁄8 104 66033093 110 66033457 2430.07 1711⁄32 149 66033903 155 66034265 2783.97
1⁄2 10 1⁄2 16 1 167⁄8 106 66033101 110 66033465 2512.98 1711⁄32 151 66033911 155 66034273 2866.92
1⁄2 10 1 32 1 167⁄8 118 66033119 117 66033473 2686.82 1711⁄32 163 66033929 162 66034281 3152.69
1⁄2 15 1⁄4 9 1 167⁄8 120 66033127 114 66033481 2514.44 1711⁄32 153 66033937 159 66034299 2868.40
1⁄2 15 1⁄2 16 1 167⁄8 118 66033135 114 66033499 2597.39 1711⁄32 155 66033945 159 66034307 2951.32 Hoist with Rigid Hook - Hoist with Plain Trolley -
1⁄2 15 1 32 1 167⁄8 122 66033143 121 66033507 2883.21 1711⁄32 167 66033952 166 66034315 3237.09 EC Series (Shown with ECT Series (Shown with
1⁄2 20 1⁄2 16 1 167⁄8 114 66033168 118 66033523 2681.82 1711⁄32 159 66033978 163 66034331 3035.73 Optional Chain Container) Optional Chain Container)
1⁄2 20 1 32 1 167⁄8 126 66033176 125 66033531 2967.64 1711⁄32 171 66033986 170 66034349 3321.54
1 10 1⁄4 4 2 181⁄4 116 66033184 114 66033549 2661.07 1811⁄16 165 66033994 163 66034356 3015.00
1 10 1⁄2 8 2 181⁄4 116 66033192 120 66033556 2697.95 1811⁄16 161 66034000 165 66034364 3015.00
1 10 3⁄4 12 1 167⁄8 114 66033200 118 66033564 2730.67 1711⁄32 159 66034018 163 66034372 3084.59
1 10 1 16 1 167⁄8 118 66033218 121 66033572 2758.53 1711⁄32 163 66034026 166 66034380 3152.69
1 15 1⁄2 8 2 181⁄4 121 66033234 125 66033606 2804.75 1811⁄16 166 66034042 170 66034414 3158.65 FOB Factory
1 15 3⁄4 12 1 167⁄8 121 66033242 123 66033614 2828.46 1711⁄32 166 66034059 168 66034422 3182.38
1 15 1 16 1 167⁄8 125 66033259 126 66033622 2896.55 1711⁄32 170 66034067 171 66034430 3250.48
1 20 3⁄4 12 1 167⁄8 126 66033283 128 66033663 2926.17 1711⁄32 171 66034091 173 66034471 3280.09
1 20 1 16 1 167⁄8 130 66033291 131 66033671 2994.28 1711⁄32 175 66034109 176 66034489 3348.19 Chain Containers for EC & ECT Series
2 10 1 8 2 1815⁄16 133 66033317 132 66033705 3425.21 193⁄8 178 66034125 177 66034513 3922.75 1-Chain 2-Chain 3-Chain
2 15 3⁄4 6 2 1815⁄16 136 66033325 137 66033739 3437.01 193⁄8 181 66034133 182 66034547 3934.60 Single (Ft.) Double (Ft.) Triple (Ft.) Order # Price Ea.
2 15 1 8 2 1815⁄16 142 66033333 141 66033747 3595.50 193⁄8 187 66034141 186 66034554 4093.04 20 10 66035775 $72.11
2 15 3 24 1 23 325 66033762 5234.80 219⁄16 370 66034570 5732.36 25 12.5 66035783 78.50
2 20 3⁄4 6 2 1815⁄16 145 66033341 146 66033770 3607.33 193⁄8 190 66034158 191 66034588 4104.90 15 66035791 209.80
2 20 1 8 2 1815⁄16 151 66033358 150 66033788 3765.79 193⁄8 196 66034166 195 66034596 4263.35 30 15 10 66035809 212.42
2 20 3 24 1 23 334 66033804 5376.95 219⁄16 379 66034612 5874.55 50 25 16.5 66035817 227.84
3292 WARNING! THESE PRODUCTS ARE FOR INDUSTRIAL USE. THEY ARE NOT TO BE USED TO SUPPORT, TRANSPORT OR LIFT PEOPLE. CALL 800-645-7270
Page 135
AIR HOISTS, BALANCERS & HOIST BEAM TROLLEYS TECH INFO
Air Chain Hoists Max Air Balancers
• Air hoists can be operated continuously, 100% duty cycle, as rotary vane Provides precise positioning or repetitive transferring of loads as heavy as 120 Lbs. With up to 8w
air motors don’t heat up with proper lubrication of float, the operator can position the load easily and precisely by hand.
• Dust, dirt, moisture and corrosive gases are kept out of the air motor by the • Limitless start/stop cycles for reliable performance and productivity
air pressure that runs it • Exclusive lost load protection system
• No electrical hazard • Pilot pendent control • Exhaust air chain lubrication • Extra safety with exclusive lock out, tag out device that makes the balancer
• Simple speed and directional controls provide precise spotting control inoperable in the event of damage or required maintenance
• Continuous duty cycle capability makes air hoists the first choice for the • Unique pressure compensated flow control maintains lifting speed regardless
most extreme applications like foundries, electroplating shops, heavy of fluctuations in plant air pressure.
industry, petrochemical • Operates on 90 psi plant air which is less than many others that require 100 psi
• Dependable non-asbestos, self-adjusting brakes • Chain lift eliminates spinning or fraying plus delivers long wear life
Hoists • 18 pocket lift wheel for smooth balancer operation
• True vertical chain travel (80w max.)
Cap. Max. Lift Lifting No. of Wt.
• Pendant control station offers ergonomic one-hand control for ease of use and
(Lbs.) Distance (Ft.) Speed (FPM) Chains (Lbs.) Order # Price Ea.
comes standard with 9v-6w drop
550 10 101 1 48 05877154 $3872.95 • Forged steel latch type lower hook with bearing for free rotation
1100 10 55 1 48 05877162 4225.93 • Supplied complete with chain container for loose end chain
2200 10 28 2 61 05877170 4337.03 05877154
Cap. (Lbs.) Working Range (In.) Order # Price Ea.
4400 10 13 2 125 05877196 6333.18
Pendant Control
Chain Containers 120 80 02698264 $3129.34
Desc. Order # Price Ea. Balance Control
For use with order #’s 05877154, 05877162 & 05877170 05877212 $121.66 120 80 02698298 3129.42
For use with order # 05877196 05877220 243.15
Selection Criteria
Suspension (Hook type or Rigid mounted): Hook mounted may be used with any hoist hook mounted hoist. Rigid mounted are used with lug-mounted hoist (hand hoist,
electric or air hoist) to conserve headroom they are mounted directly to the hoist.
Types of Beam: The two most popular styles are American Standard & Wide Flange types which use the standard universal ball tread wheel
Beam Size: Must be considered for the trolley adjustment based on the beam size
Type of Trolley: Push pull, hand geared, or motorized
Minimum Curve Radius: The trolley wheel tread (which rests on the beam) must be able to run smoothly and negotiate along the tightest curve of the beam
Headroom: Measured from the bottom of the treads on the wheels to the mount point where you intend to hang the trolley from
Trolley Speed: Motorized trolleys are offered in standard and special speed configurations and are rated in feet per minute (fpm) of travel. Increases versatility of hoist
CAUTION: This equipment is intended for industrial use only and should NOT be used to lift, support, or otherwise transport people, or to suspend loads over people.
Page
Page 136 3294
3294 WARNING! THESE PRODUCTS ARE FOR INDUSTRIAL USE. THEY ARE NOT TO BE USED TO SUPPORT, TRANSPORT OR LIFT PEOPLE. CALL 800-645-7270
SLINGS TECHNICAL INFORMATION
Basics of...Slings
Use this information below to help you determine the most appropriate type sling for your application
Sling Type vs. Issue Chain Polyester Roundsling Polyester Webbing Nylon Webbing Wire Mesh Wire Rope Comments
Abrasion Resistance - Internal 9 8 6 6 8 8 Dirt accelerates internal abrasion of synthetic slings
Abrasion Resistance - External 10 5 4 4 9 7 Use wear pads for improved sling life
Fatigue Resistance 9 9 8 8 6 6 Wire Rope is susceptible to side bending fatigue
UV Resistance 10 7 3 3 10 10 Rate of web degradation will vary with sling type
Kink Resistance 8 10 10 10 5 1 Sharp bends will permanently damage wire rope
Crush Resistance 9 7 6 6 5 4 Block loads to protect slings from damage
Pulling at Side Angle 8 9 8 8 1 9 Wire Mesh must not be pulled at a side angle
Load Damage @ Contact Points 2 10 10 10 6 2 Loads can always be padded
Water Corrosion 3 10 10 10 4 2 Metal slings can be lubed to reduce corrosion
Ease of Inspection 7 10 6 10 6 5
Ease of Storage 6 10 8 10 4 2
The above values are based on a scale of 1 to 10, with 10 being the best.
CAUTION
• The above information is simply provided to assist customers in determining which sling types tend to perform better when they are subjected to the listed issue
• This information was established based on the judgement of a number of experienced Lift-All personnel. However, it is not based on any studies or scientific data, and
is therefore not to be used in any way to determine the expected life of any sling type.
Basic Hitches Used in Rigging
Most slings will have tags showing capacity ratings for the following three most common types of hitches.
Basket Hitch - Puts both sling ends on the crane or hoist hook(s) while the sling body cradles the load. This hitch must only be
used on loads that are easily balanced and where both sling and load will not shift during lift.
Choker Hitch - Frequently used to lift bundles of materials (tubes, rods, etc.). One end connects to a crane or hoist hook while
the other end goes around the load and connects to the body of the sling. This allows the sling to tighten around the load as
itis lifted, providing greater load control. This hitch should be used when turning a load.
Vertical Hitch - Uses one connection point on the crane or hoist hook and one connection point on the load. Most appropriate
when the load has designated lift points such as hoist rings, eye bolts or hooks. A "Vertical" hitch may be used at an angle if
mulitple slings are used for the lift.
Sling Type vs. Issue Chain Polyester Roundsling Polyester Webbing and Nylon Webbing Wire Mesh Wire Rope Comments
Weight Reference 1 (Lbs.)1 2.2 0.50 0.46 5.3 0.93 Sling Weight per foot of length for a 5 Ton V Sling Capacity
Weight Reference 2 (Lbs.)1 10.4 2.4 2.6 27.1 5.1 Sling Weight per foot of length for a 25 Ton V Sling Capacity
Temperature Limit (°F) 600 200 200 550 400 Stainless Steel varieties available /w higher limits.
Elongation (%) 1 3 10 1 1 When loaded to the full Rated Capacity
Cut Resistant Yes No No Yes Yes Synthetic slings must be protected from sharp edges
Length Adjustment Yes No No No No
Rotation of wear points No Yes Yes No No Based on endless style for the synthetic slings
Repairable Yes No No Yes No
1
These values do not include the weight of the end hardware
Effect of Angle:
Did you know that when slings are used at an angle of less than 90° from horizontal, the sling’s capacity rating must be reduced? How much it is reduced depends on
the degree of the angle. You can determine whether a sling will be rated high enough if you know the angle between the sling leg and the horizontal. Once you know
this angle, multiply the sling’s rating by the appropriate factor in the table below. This will give you the sling’s reduced rating.
WARNING! NEVER EXCEED WORKLOAD LIMITS. NEVER USE SLINGS ON THIS PAGE TO LIFT PEOPLE OR ITEMS OVER PEOPLE. CALL 800-645-7270 3301
Page 137
SNAPS, HOOKS, U-BOLT GRIPS & WIRE ROPE TECHNICAL INFO
Malleable Iron Bull Snaps Stainless Steel Wire Rope Grips - U-Bolt Type
For connecting of rope, chain or webbing to a variety of materials and fittings. • 18-8 SS U-Bolt and Nuts • 316 SS Saddle
Size Pkg. Snap Swivel Eye Fixed Eye • Reusable, no special tools required for assembly
Note: Snaps • Numerous industrial and marine applications
(In.) Qty. Open. (In.) Order # Price Ea. Order # Price Ea. are not for
• Superior corrosion resistance
7⁄8 10 9⁄16 67791483 $4.05 67791467 $3.47 lifting people • 316 Stainless Steel Grade kit
1 10 9⁄16 67791509 7.31 or objects • Kit Form - Qty. of clips included is appropriate for wire diameter
1 10 5⁄8 67791525 7.83 over people. Swivel Eye Fixed Eye Wire Rope Clip, U-Bolts and Nuts
Desc. Order # Price Ea. Desc. Order # Price Ea.
Brass Snap Hooks For 5⁄64w Wire 67685008 $3.62 For 1⁄2w Wire 67685123 $17.18
For 5⁄32w Wire 67685024 4.41 For 9⁄16w Wire 02066132 19.45
Designed for the connecting of rope, chain or webbing to a variety of
For 3⁄16w Wire 67685040 4.93 For 5⁄8w Wire 02066140 22.31
materials and fittings. Available in different materials depending upon usage.
For 1⁄4w Wire 67685065 4.93 For 3⁄4w Wire 02066157 28.83
Size (In.) Snap Opening (In.) Pkg. Qty. Order # Price Ea. Note: Snaps are not for For 5⁄16w Wire 67685081 8.08 For 7⁄8w Wire 02066165 35.74
3⁄4 5⁄8 10 67791723 $5.25 lifting people or objects For 3⁄8w Wire 67685107 10.61 For 1w Wire 02066173 42.28
11⁄8 3⁄4 10 67791749 7.68 over people.
Wire Rope Clip & Thimble Kit - 316 Stainless Steel
Desc. Order # Price Ea. Desc. Order # Price Ea.
Open Eye Type Snaps 3⁄32w Wire (Qty 2) A73525552 $7.81 5⁄16wWire (Qty 3) A73525602 $26.46
For connecting of rope, chain or webbing to
1⁄8w Wire (Qty 2) A73525560 8.37 3⁄8w Wire (Qty 3) A73525495 41.02
Malleable Iron 5⁄32w Wire (Qty 2) A73525578 10.83 1⁄2w Wire (Qty 3) A73525511 91.71
a variety of materials and fittings. Available in
Size Pkg. Snap different materials depending upon usage.
3⁄16w Wire (Qty 2) A73525586 11.92 5⁄8w Wire (Qty 3) A73525529 118.03
(In.) Qty. Opening (In.) Order # Price Ea. 1⁄4w Wire (Qty 2) A73525594 17.22 3⁄4w Wire (Qty 4) A73525545 135.74
3⁄8 10 5⁄16 67791244 $1.75 Zinc Plated Malleable Iron
3⁄8 10 5⁄16 67791269 1.88 Size Pkg. Snap
1⁄2 10 5⁄16 67791285 2.76 (In.) Qty. Opening (In.) Order # Price Ea.
1⁄2 10 1⁄2 67791301 3.69 3⁄8 10 5⁄16 67791400 $2.63
1⁄2 10 9⁄16 67791327 5.65 1⁄2 10 7⁄16 67791426 3.51
5⁄8 10 9⁄16 67791343 8.46 5⁄8 10 9⁄16 67791442 5.51
Note: Snaps are not for lifting people or objects over people.
Types
Fiber Core: Wire rope with a synthetic or natural fiber cord of rope as a core to hold or position other strands. Fiber core adds flexibility without adding strength to the
wire rope. If the operating environment exceeds 180°F, a steel-cored rope should be used.
IWRC (Independent Wire Rope Core): A wire rope used as the axial member of a larger wire rope. IWRC has a higher strength than fiber core or strand core. It is not as
flexible as fiber core, but more flexible than strand core. Provides better crush resistance than fiber core. Page
Strand Core: Wire rope with a wire strand core used as the core of the wire rope. Page 138
It has higher strength than fiber core and less flexibility than fiber core or IWRC. 3320
3320 CALL MSC TODAY 800-645-7270 FOR ALL YOUR INDUSTRIAL NEEDS
BLOCKS, PULLEYS, SLEEVES & FIBROUS ROPE TECH INFO
Upright-Mount & Side Mount Guidance Pulleys 316 Stainless Steel Snatch Blocks
These light-duty deck pulleys allow a wide Drop Side, Swivel Head
variety of uses with open and closed • Low friction rope pulley systems
housings. The galvanized malleable iron is • Superior corrosion resistance
suitable for most corrosive applications. • Quick release snap shackle head • Swivel head
• Material: Iron • Self-locking, releasable under load swiveling
Never exceed work load limits. Never use Single Open Single Closed snap shackle head
to lift people or suspend items over people. Upright Mount Upright Mount • Impact resistant rubberized cheeks do not
damage surrounding finish
Wire Rope OD Mounting Hole Dia. (In.) Upright Mount Side Mount • Corrosion resistant 316 stainless steel
Desc. Dia. (In.) (In.) Min. Max. Order # Price Ea. Order # Price Ea. • Marine grade 13⁄4w Block 3w Block 31⁄8w Block
Single Sheave-Open 3⁄16 21⁄2 0.144 0.155 67327882 $17.03 67327940 $23.95 Desc. Load Cap. (Lbs.) Order # Price Ea.
1
Single Sheave-Open 1⁄4 31⁄4 0.209 0.220 67327908 23.07 67327965 26.68
Single Sheave-Open 3⁄8 41⁄2 0.235 0.246 67327924 45.23 2
67327981 49.34 13⁄4w Alloy Sheave 3310 A73524977 $182.00
Single Sheave-Closed 1⁄4 2 0.209 0.220 67328005 17.52 67328088 19.17 3w Acetal Sheave 2200 A73524969 151.12
Single Sheave-Closed 3⁄8 3 0.235 0.246 67328021 34.28 67328104 37.25 31⁄8w 316 Stainless Steel Sheave 6610 A73524985 544.14
41⁄4w 316 Stainless Steel Sheave 8270 A73524993 791.06
1 2
0.1875w Mounting Holes 0.216w Mounting Holes
ALUMINUM FIBERGLASS
• Light weight • Non-conductive (when clean and dry)
• Long lasting construction • Strong
• Resists corrosion • Weather resistant
• Ideal for painting, roofing and siding • Ideal for working around electricity
TYPE 1AA: Professional use. TYPE 1A: Professional use. TYPE I: Industrial use. TYPE II: Commercial use. TYPE III: Household use.
Extra heavy duty capable of Extra heavy duty capable Heavy duty capable of Medium duty capable of Light duty capable of
supporting 375 lbs. of supporting 300 lbs. supporting 250 lbs. supporting 225 lbs. supporting 200 lbs.
USES: MRO and industrial USES: Roofing, building USES: Building USES: Light commercial USES: Light cleaning and
construction. maintenance, general maintenance, general and general repair, painting.
contracting and industrial contracting and sheet rock. painting and cleaning.
construction.
* All Load Capacities Include the User Plus the Materials Used on the Ladder
Determine the Height
STEPLADDERS
Maximum Ladder Approx. Highest
Reach* Size Standing Level
7v 5w 4v 1v 11w
8v 4w 5v 2v 10w
9v 3w 6v 3v 9w
11v 2w 8v 5v 8w
13v 1w 10v 7v 7w
15v 6w 12v 9v 6w
EXTENSION LADDERS
Maximum Ladder Approx. Highest
Reach* Size Standing Level
15v 6w 16v 9v 6w
18v 11w 20v 13v 5w
22v 9w 24v 17v 3w
26v 8w 28v 21v 2w
30v 6w 32v 25v
33v 5w 36v 27v 11w
36v 4w 40v 30v 10w
• Select Platform Height, also known as Top Step, based on operations being performed
• Platform Height is where the user generally stands. Make sure you have minimum clearance
of 6 to 7 feet from the ceiling or any object suspended from the ceiling to insure the user has
room to stand safely
• Maximum convenient working height is 5 feet to 6 feet above the platform height
• Bear in mind that for bulkier or larger packages you should consider using a wider ladder
• Consider limitations on ladder dimensions imposed by doorways, isle width and corners the
ladder needs to turn. For tight spaces, select a narrow or directional ladder for maximum
maneuverability
Note: Load capacity (lbs.) is the combined weight of the user and materials
Climbing Position
The typical incline of a rolling ladder is designed for the user to ascend and descend facing the
steps. However, “Stairway Slope” a.k.a. “Walk Down” ladders have a more moderate incline,
approximately 50 degrees enabling the user to ascend and descend facing forward which is
safer and more stable while carrying heavier and bulky objects.
Material Type
Locking Mechanisms
• Spring-loaded Caster: Ideal for shorter ladders 5 steps and below. On this style ladder, the wheels retract under the user’s
weight securing the ladder to the floor.
• Lock Safe Step and Lock Safe Handle: Ideal for ladders over 5 steps. These ladders are raised into the rolling position when
the lock step or handle is actuated. Releasing the lock safe drops the ladder into the climbing position with the feet firmly on
the floor.
• Tilt-N-Roll, Folding and Wheelbarrow Style Ladders: Do not require a locking mechanism just tilt the ladder on its wheels to
move into working position
Tread Selection Guide
Expanded Metal Tread: This aggressive tread is ideal for the shop or retail floor. This design is self-cleaning allowing dirt to fall
through the tread. This helps keep footwear clean improving slip resistance. This is the most popular tread for rolling ladders.
Perforated Tread: Provides excellent slip resistance. This tread design is used extensively in retail and storeroom applications.
Serrated Tread: The most aggressive. This tread design is ideal for the shop floor or any application where maximum slip
resistance is required such as a wet and slippery environments
Abrasive Mat: Provides excellent slip resistance. This tread design is the best for the office, retail or the stock room as well as
areas with less dirt.
Adhesive Type Hot Melt (Synthetic) Acrylic Water Activated Vegetable Based Adhesive
Water-Activated Tapes
Backing Options Polypropylene, Polyester Polypropylene, Polyester Paper
Dispensing Options Hand or Machine Hand or Machine Dispenser & Water Source Required • Requires water to
Popular Colors Clear, Tan Clear, Tan Natural or White activate adhesive
Temperature Range • Instantly bonds to virgin
or recycled corrugate
Application Conditions +45°F to +140°F +32°F to +120°F +33°F to +120°F
resulting in a tamper-
Post Application Conditions -10°F to +140°F -30°F to +200°F 0°F to +120°F evident package
Adhesion to Surfaces
• Reinforced tapes provide extra strength for
Rough or Recycled Corrugated Fair Good Excellent heavier cartons and are designed for
Printed Cartons Good Good Excellent applications where durability, extra strength and
Over- stuffed Cartons Excellent Good Excellent reliability are required.
Under- stuffed Cartons Good Good Excellent • Paper Tapes (non-reinforced) are best suited for
Performance Properties sealing lightweight or standard sized packages or
cartons and are the most environmentally
Resistance to Moisture Fair Poor Excellent
preferred method of sealing a box
Resistance to Aging Good Excellent Excellent
Clarity Good Excellent Not Applicable
Resistance to UV Light Good Excellent Excellent
Filament/Strapping Tape
• Filament tapes are available with Uni- or Bi-directional filament reinforcements Adhesive Type Hot Melt (Synthetic) or Natural Rubber
for added strength. Strapping tapes do not contain filament reinforcements Backing Options Polyester, Polypropylene, Paper
• Used for box closure, splicing and sealing. It’s high strength, excellent quick-stick Filament Options Fiberglass, Nylon, Polyester
and adhesion properties make it ideal for use on a variety of surfaces and perfect
Dispensing Options Hand
for use on difficult long or short-term bundling applications
• Moisture and abrasion resistant Colors Clear, White
Page
Page 142 3367
U-Bent Linear
Circular
Choose the Light Effect Desired: color temperature describes the appearance, atmosphere, ambiance or mood created by the light. It is usually desirable to
maintain a consistent color temperature throughout a space. Color temperature is measured in Kelvins (K). Standard light sources range from 2700K
(incandescent) to 6500K (daylight).
LIGHT EFFECT Warm Soft White Cool White Bright White Arctic White
COLOR TEMPERATURE 3000K 4000K 5000K 6500K
MOOD Comfortable & Relaxing Basic & Efficient Bright & Lively Cool & Refreshing
Color Rendering Index (CRI): the CRI is the ability of a light source to produce natural colors in Shapes
objects. CRI is measured on a scale from 0-100 where 100 is best. The higher the CRI the
more natural people and objects will appear when lighted. Incandescent and Halogen lamps as Fluorescent Lamp Shapes: the letter indicates the shape of
well as natural daylight have a 100 CRI. the lamp and the number designates the diameter in eighths
of an inch.
Example: a T8 Lamp is a tubular shape that is 8 eighths or
one inch in diameter.
Types
Slimline (Instant Start) Lamps Rapid Start Lamps
• Ballast starts these lamps instantly • Most popular type
• Single Pin Base • Smooth, fast starting (1 second) without a starter
• Available with Bipin and Recessed Double Contact Bases
Bases
On fluorescent lamps, the base is cemented to each end of the lamp to connect the bulb to the
electrical circuit.
A green color base indicates the lamp is a low mercury ALTO lamp.
ALTO II™ Fluorescent Lamps: all fluorescent lamps need a small amount of mercury to operate
efficiently, but Philips has developed Fluorescent T8 lamps with only 1.7mg of mercury. There is no
sacrifice in lamp life, light quality or energy. To further reduce environmental impact, Philips only uses
recycled mercury in these lamps.
3390 CALL MSC TODAY 800-645-7270 FOR ALL YOUR INDUSTRIAL NEEDS
Page 143
HALOGEN LAMPS TECHNICAL INFO & INCANDESCENT LAMPS
Halogen Operation
Halogen lamps are technically incandescent lamps, but they have three features that make them superior to standard incandescents: they are brighter,
whiter and last longer. A Halogen lamp has a thin filament. A thin filament produces more light than a thick one. This makes it brighter and whiter. But
how does it last longer despite having a thin filament? The Halogen Cycle: in a Halogen lamp the filament is contained within a glass capsule inside the
lamp itself. The Halogen gas inside the glass capsule transports the broken down tungsten back to the filament before it has a chance to deposit on the
lamp wall, thus replenishing it and keeping the lamp clean and bright. The halogen gas actually regenerates the filament.
Incandescent/Halogen Bases
Screw bases are made of Aluminum,
Brass or Nickel-Plated Brass. Aluminum
is the most economical material. Brass
and Nickel-Plated Brass bases are
corrosion resistant and are used on
lamps designed for outdoor use, very
long life or in corrosive environments
that might cause a lamp to seize in the
socket and make replacement difficult
Incandescent Lamps
A15 A19 A23 A25, PS25 BA9 BA91⁄2 BR30 BR40 C7 ER30, ER40 F10 F15
G161⁄2 G25 G30 G40 PAR38 PAR56 PAR64 PS30 PS40 R14
You can use a 25 or 27 watt Compact Fluorescent and it will produce the same light output as a 100 watt Incandescent, while saving you 75 watts.
The other factor you want to consider is lamp color or color temp. If you are replacing an Incandescent lamp with “Soft White” color then you would want to look
at a Compact Fluorescent with a color temp. of 2700-3500K. See chart below for color temp. guidance
LIGHT EFFECT Warm Soft White Cool White Bright White Arctic White
COLOR TEMPERATURE 3000K 4000K 5000K 6500K
MOOD Comfortable & Relaxing Basic & Efficient Bright & Lively Cool & Refreshing
Twister EL/MDT Twister - El/3- Twister-EL/MDT Twister - Twister - EL/MDT Candle EL/A G25 EL/A PAR38 EL/A R30
Mini Dec. Way Helix GU24 Mini-Dec. EL/DT Dec. Mini-Dec. Dimmable
EL/A R40 EL/A - SWP PL-C 2 Pin PL-C 4 Pin PL-L PL-S PL-T PL-T 4 Pin
Page
SLS
• Save up to 75% on energy costs compared to incandescents • Lasts up to 13 times longerPage 145 incandescents • Stable light output over broad range of temperatures
than standard 3403
• Extensive array of color temperatures, lumen packages and wattages • ALTO technology lamps that are safer for the environment • Coloring rendering index: 82
Base Fluorescent Color Interchange Guide Price
Shape Watts Type Type Mfr’s # L (In.) Life Lumens Temp. GE Sylvania Order # Ea.
Twisters
TWISTER-EL/MDT MINI DEC 5 Medium Mini Dec Twister EL/MDT 5W — 8000 250 2700K — CF7EL/MINITWIST/BL/1 B07917818 $6.65
TWISTER-EL/MDT MINI DEC 9 Medium Mini Dec Twister EL/MDT 9W — 8000 550 2700K — CF7EL/MINITWIST/2700K B07917859 6.65
TWISTER-EL/3 WAY HELIX 11/23/34 Medium 3-Way Screw-in Fluorescent HELIX TWISTER EL/3W 11-23-64 — 10000 700/1500/ 2700K — — B83976647 18.08
Lamp 2200
TWISTER-EL/3 WAY HELIX 11/23/34 E26 Compact Fluorescent Energy 214866 7 10000 1500 2700K — — 1
A62476734 20.80
Saver Three-Way Twister
TWISTER-EL/MDT MINI DEC 11 Medium EL/MDT EL/MDT11 49⁄16 8000 700 2700K — — B04577920 10.58
TWISTER-EL/MDT GU24 MINI DEC 13 GU24 Energy Saver GU24 Twister 222851 43⁄16 10000 900 2700K — — A88453519 5.99
TWISTER EL/MDT MINI DEC 13 Medium Compact Fluorescent Energy 224923 43⁄16 10000 900 3500K — 29052 A91685057 5.49
Saver Twisters
TWISTER-EL/MDT MINI DEC 13 Medium Compact Fluorescent Energy 138057 41⁄4 12000 900 4000K — — A84155670 5.75
Saver Twisters
TWISTER-EL/MDT MINI DEC 13 E26 Compact Fluorescent Energy 217596 5 12000 900 5000K — 29588 A55183198 5.75
Saver Twisters
TWISTER-EL/MDT MINI DEC 13 Medium Compact Fluorescent Energy 224964 43⁄16 10000 900 6500K — — A91685065 5.75
Saver Twisters
TWISTER-EL/MDT MINI DEC 13 Medium Mini Dec Twister EL/MDT 13W — 30000 900 2700K — CF13EL/MINITWIST/2700K B07917875 6.42
TWISTER-EL/DT DEC 14 Medium Compact Fluorescent Energy 210468 33⁄4 10000 825 3000K — — A91685024 6.35
Saver Twisters
TWISTER-EL/MDT MINI DEC-DIMMABLE 15 E26 Energy Saver Dimmable 407379 513⁄32 10000 900 2700K 89619 — A91685131 21.99
Compact Fluorescent Lamps
TWISTER-EL/MDT GU24 MINI DEC 18 GU24 Energy Saver GU24 Twister 222869 41⁄2 10000 1200 2700K — — A89888036 6.99
TWISTER-EL/MDT MINI DEC 18 Medium Screw-in Fluorescent Lamp EL/MDT 18W 51⁄2 10000 1250 2700K — — B07917883 8.73
TWISTER-EL/MDT MINI DEC-DIMMABLE 20 E26 Energy Saver Dimmable 405837 51⁄8 10000 1150 2700K — — A91685115 22.50
Compact Fluorescent Lamps
TWISTER-EL/MDT GU24 MINI DEC 23 GU24 Energy Saver GU24 Twister 222877 43⁄16 10000 1600 2700K — — A91685040 7.49
TWISTER-EL/MDT MINI DEC 23 Medium Mini Dec Twister EL/MDT 23W 5 10000 1600 2700K FLE23HT3/2/XL827 — B82895327 8.99
TWISTER-EL/MDT MINI DEC 27 Medium Compact Fluorescent Lamp EL/MDT 27W 57⁄16 10000 1750 2700K — CF27EL/TWIST B74082579 10.58
TWISTER-EL/MDT MINI DEC 27 Medium Compact Fluorescent Lamp EL/MDT 27W 1850LM 5 ⁄32
23 8000 1850 4100K — — B74082751 10.58
TWISTER-EL/MDT MINI DEC 27 Medium Compact Fluorescent Lamp EL/MDT 27W 1850LM 5K 523⁄32 10000 1800 5000K — CF27EL/TWIST/5000K B74082769 10.58
TWISTER-EL/MDT MINI DEC 32 E26 Compact Fluorescent Energy 156398 51⁄2 10000 2200 2700K 24743 29578 A07917917 17.49
Saver Twisters
TWISTER-EL/MDT MINI DEC-DIMMABLE 32 E26 Energy Saver Dimmable 407155 613⁄32 10000 2000 2700K — — A91685123 25.40
Compact Fluorescent Lamps
Regular Compact Fluorescents
Candle 5 Candelabra Compact Fluorescent Lamp EL/MCAN 5W MIN CAN BASE 419⁄32 6000 200 2700K FLE5/2/CAC/827 CF4EL/DECO/CANDELABRA/1/BL B74082785 10.56
Candle 5 Medium Compact Fluorescent Lamp EL/MCAN 5W CANDLE MED BASE 41⁄2 6000 200 2700K FLE5/2/CAM/827 — B74082777 10.56
1
Blister Card
Continued on next page
Page
3406
Page 146
3406 CALL MSC TODAY 800-645-7270 FOR ALL YOUR INDUSTRIAL NEEDS
ELECTRONIC BALLASTS TECHNICAL INFO & CAN CHART
3412 CALL MSC TODAY 800-645-7270 FOR ALL YOUR INDUSTRIAL NEEDS = Eco Friendly Item
PLUGS & RECEPTACLES TECHNICAL INFORMATION
Page
Page 148 3447
A B C D E F
G H I J K L M N O P
No. of Wall Plate No. of Wall Plate No. of Wall Plate
Key Gangs Service Color Order # Price Ea. Key Gangs Service Color Order # Price Ea. Key Gangs Service Color Order # Price Ea.
A 1 Duplex Brown 01189307 $0.48 C 1 Blank Gray 01189562 $0.48 E 2 Switch Duplex Light Almond 01189794 $0.95
A 1 Duplex Gray 01189315 0.48 C 1 Blank Ivory 01189570 0.48 E 2 Switch Duplex White 01189802 0.95
A 1 Duplex Ivory 01189323 0.48 C 1 Blank Light Almond 01189588 0.48 F 2 Switch Decor Ivory 01189810 1.73
A 1 Duplex Light Almond 01189331 0.48 C 1 Blank White 01189596 0.48 F 2 Switch Decor White 01189828 1.73
A 1 Duplex White 01189349 0.48 C 2 Blank Brown 01189604 0.95 G 1 End Blank White 01189836 2.33
A 2 Duplex Brown 01189356 0.95 C 2 Blank Gray 01189612 0.95 G 1 End Blank Ivory 01189935 2.33
A 2 Duplex Ivory 01189364 0.95 C 2 Blank Ivory 01189620 0.95 H 1 End Toggle White 01189844 2.33
A 2 Duplex Light Almond 01189372 0.95 C 2 Blank White 01189638 0.95 H 1 End Toggle Ivory 01189943 2.33
A 2 Duplex White 01189380 0.95 D 1 Toggle Switch Brown 01189646 0.48 I 1 End Duplex White 01189851 2.33
B 1 Deco Brown 01189398 0.48 D 1 Toggle Switch Gray 01189653 0.48 I 1 End Duplex Ivory 01189950 2.33
B 1 Deco Gray 01189406 0.48 D 1 Toggle Switch Ivory 01189661 0.48 J 1 End Single White 01189869 2.33
B 1 Deco Ivory 01189414 0.48 D 1 Toggle Switch Light Almond 01189679 0.48 J 1 End Single Ivory 01189968 2.33
B 1 Deco Light Almond 01189422 0.48 D 1 Toggle Switch White 01189687 0.48 K 1 End Deco White 01189877 2.33
B 1 Deco White 01189430 0.48 D 2 Toggle Switch Brown 01189695 0.95 K 1 End Deco Ivory 01189976 2.33
B 2 Deco Brown 01189448 0.95 D 2 Toggle Switch Gray 01189703 0.95 L 1 Center Blank White 01189885 2.33
B 2 Deco Gray 01189455 0.95 D 2 Toggle Switch Ivory 01189711 0.95 L 1 Center Blank Ivory 01189984 2.33
B 2 Deco Ivory 01189463 0.95 D 2 Toggle Switch Light Almond 01189729 0.95 M 1 Center Toggle White 01189893 2.33
B 2 Deco Light Almond 01189471 0.95 D 2 Toggle Switch White 01189737 0.95 M 1 Center Toggle Ivory 01189992 2.33
B 2 Deco White 01189489 0.95 D 3 Toggle Switch Brown 01189745 1.41 N 1 Center Duplex White 01189901 2.33
B 3 Deco Ivory 01189497 1.41 D 3 Toggle Switch Ivory 01189752 1.41 N 1 Center Duplex Ivory 01190008 2.33
B 3 Deco Light Almond 01189505 1.41 D 3 Toggle Switch Light Almond 01189760 1.41 O 1 Center Single White 01189919 2.33
B 3 Deco White 01189513 1.41 D 3 Toggle Switch White 01189778 1.41 O 1 Center Single Ivory 01190016 2.33
B 4 Deco Ivory 01189521 2.36 D 4 Toggle Brown 01189273 4.80 P 1 Center Deco White 01189927 2.33
B 4 Deco Light Almond 01189539 2.36 D 4 Toggle Ivory 01189281 4.80 P 1 Center Deco Ivory 01190024 2.33
B 4 Deco White 01189547 2.36 D 4 Toggle White 01189299 4.80
C 1 Blank Brown 01189554 0.48 E 2 Switch Duplex Ivory 01189786 0.95
Non-Metallic Boxes
For Electrical Switches & Receptacles
• Available in two basic types: phenolic or hard box, and thermoplastic or soft style box • Knockouts are easily removed • UL firewall R9140
No. of Dimensions (In.) Volume Cap. • Phenolic boxes are rated for 150°C and feature a plaster seal that
Key Type Shape Gangs W Ht. D. (Cu. In.) Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea. prevents debris from entering receptacle holes
Phenolic • Thermoplastic boxes feature molded threads that assure high torque
C Nail On Bracket Box Rectangle 1 2 ⁄4 3 ⁄16 3 ⁄8
1 11 1 18.0 2000 71461800 $0.52 and prevent the screw hold from stripping
E Bracket Box Rectangle 1 23⁄16 31⁄4 211⁄16 12.5 7010-8 71461875 2.28 • Thermoplastic boxes are heat rated at 80°C and are permissible for
use with 90°C insulated conductors
Thermoplastic
A Nail On Bracket Box Rectangle 1 23⁄32 31⁄2 27⁄8 14.0 E-14-4 71461719 2.82
B Nail On Bracket Box Rectangle 1 25⁄16 321⁄32 215⁄16 18.0 MB18 71461735 1.89
C Nail On Bracket Box Rectangle 1 25⁄16 321⁄32 3 18.0 RN-18 71461685 0.61
C Nail On Bracket Box Rectangle 1 2 ⁄16 3 ⁄32 3 ⁄8
5 21 3 20.5 RN-21 71461693 0.60
D Nail On Bracket Box Round 1 4 4 2 ⁄2
1 22.5 N-423-C-V 71461743 1.78 A B C D E
Type 1: Enclosures constructed for indoor use to provide a degree of protection to personnel against access to hazardous parts and to provide a degree of
protection of the equipment inside the enclosure against ingress of solid foreign objects (falling dirt).
Type 3: Enclosures constructed for either indoor or outdoor use to provide a degree of protection to personnel against access to hazardous parts; to provide a degree
of protection of the equipment inside the enclosure against ingress of solid foreign objects (falling dirt and windblown dust); to provide a degree of protection with
respect to harmful effects on the equipment due to the ingress of water (rain, sleet, snow); and that will be undamaged by the external formation of ice on the
enclosure.
Type 3R: Enclosures constructed for either indoor or outdoor use to provide a degree of protection to personnel against access to hazardous parts; to provide a degree
of protection of the equipment inside the enclosure against ingress of solid foreign objects (falling dirt); to provide a degree of protection with respect to harmful
effects on the equipment due to the ingress of water (rain, sleet, snow); and that will be undamaged by the external formation of ice on the enclosure.
Type 4: Enclosures constructed for either indoor or outdoor use to provide a degree of protection to personnel against access to hazardous parts; to provide a degree
of protection of the equipment inside the enclosure against ingress of solid foreign objects (falling dirt and windblown dust); to provide a degree of protection with
respect to harmful effects on the equipment due to the ingress of water (rain, sleet, snow, splashing water, and hose directed water); and that will be undamaged by
the external formation of ice on the enclosure.
Type 4X: Enclosures constructed for either indoor or outdoor use to provide a degree of protection to personnel against access to hazardous parts; to provide a degree
of protection of the equipment inside the enclosure against ingress of solid foreign objects (windblown dust); to provide a degree of protection with respect to harmful
effects on the equipment due to the ingress of water (rain, sleet, snow, splashing water, and hose directed water); that provides an additional level of protection against
corrosion; and that will be undamaged by the external formation of ice on the enclosure.
Type 6P: Enclosures constructed for either indoor or outdoor use to provide a degree of protection to personnel against access to hazardous parts; to provide a degree
of protection of the equipment inside the enclosure against ingress of solid foreign objects (falling dirt); to provide a degree of protection with respect to harmful
effects on the equipment due to the ingress of water (hose directed water and the entry of water during prolonged submersion at a limited depth); that provides an
additional level of protection against corrosion and that will be undamaged by the external formation of ice on the enclosure.
Type 12: Enclosures constructed (without knockouts) for indoor use to provide a degree of protection to personnel against access to hazardous parts; to provide a
degree of protection of the equipment inside the enclosure against ingress of solid foreign objects (falling dirt and circulating dust, lint, fibers, and flyings); and to
provide a degree of protection with respect to harmful effects on the equipment due to the ingress of water (dripping and light splashing).
Type 13: Enclosures constructed for indoor use to provide a degree of protection to personnel against access to hazardous parts; to provide a degree of protection of
the equipment inside the enclosure against ingress of solid foreign objects (falling dirt and circulating dust, lint, fibers, and flyings); to provide a degree of protection
with respect to harmful effects on the equipment due to the ingress of water (dripping and light splashing); and to provide a degree of protection against the spraying,
splashing, and seepage of oil and non-corrosive coolants.
Note: Additional enclosure types available: 2, 3S, 3X, 3RX, 3SX, 5, 6, 12K. To order call Sales or visit mscdirect.com.
Hazardous Location Conduit Outlet Boxes Outlet Boxes for Rigid Conduit & IMC
For Rigid
Conduit & IMC
OEC
Compact design allows use in OET OELB
areas with limited space. Single-Gang Single-Gang Single-Gang
Provides future access for A B C
maintenance and wiring changes. • Tapered threaded hubs • Ground screw provided • Type FS - shallow / Type FD - deep
Accommodates wiring devices and provides opening to splice, tap or pull conductors.
Gray Iron/Zinc Plated/Aluminum Enamel OELL OELR Trade Image Interchange Guide • Constructed of cast iron
Body Hub Interchange Guide Size (In.) Ref. Crouse-Hinds Order # Price Ea.
Type Size (In.) Crouse-Hinds Appleton Order # Price Ea.
• Precision ground flange 1⁄2 A FSCC1 54119599 $30.40
OEC 1⁄2 OEC1 ERC50 54117783 $58.09 • Blind drilled and tapped 3⁄4 A FSCC2 54119607 40.32
OEC 3⁄4 OEC2 ERC75 54117833 66.08 screw holes 1⁄2 A FDCC1 54119334 37.05
OET 1⁄2 OET1 ERT50 54117825 56.71 • Smooth integral hubs 3⁄4 A FDCC2 54119342 42.28
OET 3⁄4 OET2 ERT75 54117874 69.45 • UL Listed for: 1⁄2
Class I, Groups C, D B FSS1 54119680 24.88
OELB 1⁄2 OELB1 ERLB50 54117791 56.71 Class II, Groups E, F, G 3⁄4 B FSS2 54119698 27.38 Single-Gang
OELB 3⁄4 OELB2 ERLB75 54117841 66.06 • CSA Certified 1⁄2 C FSCT1 54119623 31.54 D
OELL 1⁄2 OELL1 ERLL50 54117809 59.23 3⁄4 C FSCT2 54119631 39.47
OELL 3⁄4 OELL2 ERLL75 54117858 71.13
1 C FSCT3 54119615 45.21
OELR 1⁄2 OELR1 ERLR50 54117817 59.23 1⁄2 C FDCT1 54119367 35.27
OELR 3⁄4 OELR2 ERLR75 54117866 71.13 3⁄4 C FDCT2 54119375 42.42
1 C FDCT3 54119359 47.05
1⁄2 D FSX1 54119706 36.46
3⁄4 D FSX2 54119714 44.67 Two-Gang
1⁄2 D FDX1 54119425 41.09 E
3⁄4 D FDX2 54119433 48.18
1⁄2 E FS12 54119482 31.27
3⁄4 E FS22 54119490 29.73
Outlet Boxes for Rigid Conduit & IMC 1 E FS32 54119474 33.76
1⁄2 E FD12 54119235 36.43
3⁄4 E FD22 54119243 36.16 Two-Gang
1 E FD32 54119227 37.39 F
1⁄2 F FSC12 54119573 33.12
3⁄4 F FSC222 54119581 34.62
1 F FSC32 54119565 38.27
1⁄2 C FDC12 54119318 37.04
Single-Gang Single-Gang Single-Gang Single-Gang Single-Gang
3⁄4 C FDC222 54119326 38.27
Type FS & FD Type FSC & FDC Type FSL & FDL Type FSR & FDR Type FSA & FDA G
1 C FDC32 54119300 46.94
Accommodates wiring devices and provides opening to splice, tap or pull conductors. 3⁄4 G FS27 54119508 50.45 Tandem
• Tapered threaded hubs (NPT) • Type FD - deep
• Type FS - shallow • Ground Screw provided
Cast Iron Outlet Boxes
Trade Interchange Guide
Size (In.) Crouse-Hinds Order # Price Ea.
Trade
Size (In.)
Interchange Guide
Crouse-Hinds Order # Price Ea.
PVC Lay-In Wireways
1⁄2 FS1 54119458 $14.86 1⁄2 FSL1 54119649 $24.29
3⁄4 FS2 54119466 16.95 3⁄4 FSL2 54119656 26.57 These nonconductive, noncorrosive and all-PVC
1 FS3 54119441 19.39 1⁄2 FDL1 54119383 37.53 construction wireway and cover are easy to install.
1⁄2 FD1 54119201 17.37 3⁄4 FDL2 54119391 40.49 • UV stabilized • Lightweight
3⁄4 FD2 54119219 18.89 1⁄2 FSR1 54119664 24.29 • Easy field fabrication • Sold in 10v lengths
1 FD3 54119193 22.93 3⁄4 FSR2 54119672 33.10 • “Clip-on” cover design for easy access
1⁄2 FSC1 54119540 17.81 1⁄2 FDR1 54119409 31.55 Nominal Dimensions Actual Dimensions Wt. per Price per
3⁄4 FSC2 54119557 19.43 3⁄4 FDR2 54119417 34.89 Width (In.) Depth (In.) Width (In.) Depth (In.) 10v (Lbs.) Order # 10v
1 FSC3 54119532 25.56 1⁄2 FSA1 54119516 21.92 2 2 1.97 1.97 5 54091079 $129.71
1⁄2 FDC1 54119284 21.09 3⁄4 FSA2 54119524 25.18 3 3 2.96 2.96 8 54091087 136.43
3⁄4 FDC2 54119292 21.21 1⁄2 FDA1 54119250 28.37 4 4 3.94 3.94 11 54091095 165.29
1 FDC3 54119276 28.66 3⁄4 FDA2 54119268 30.68 6 6 5.91 5.91 21 54091525 247.37
3502 CALL MSC TODAY 800-645-7270 FOR ALL YOUR INDUSTRIAL NEEDS
SURGE SUPPRESSION TECH INFO/OUTLET UNITS/PLUGMOLDS
3520 CALL MSC TODAY 800-645-7270 FOR ALL YOUR INDUSTRIAL NEEDS
CABLE CONNECTOR TECHNICAL INFORMATION
Page
Page 154 3529
3592 CALL MSC TODAY 800-645-7270 FOR ALL YOUR INDUSTRIAL NEEDS
FUSES
Class H Renewable Fuses & Links - 250 & 600 Volts
• Designed for easy replacement • Super-lag renewable fuses with longer time-lag than other Class H fuses of this type can better sustain overloads without needlessly opening
• Uses industrial/commercial structures where maximum short-circuit currents are low level (below 10,000 amperes) and frequent outages dictate the economy of the “renewable” type fuse
• 10 K amperage interupting rating • No multiple links to complicate replacement • Ferraz links are not interchangable between manufacturers
Fuses Renewable Links
Interchange Cooper Bussmann™ Ferraz Interchange Cooper Bussmann™ Ferraz
Guide L Dia. Super-Lag™ Dia. Guide Super-Lag™
Amps Littelfuse (In.) (In.) Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea. (In.) Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea. Amps Littelfuse Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea. Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea.
250V 250V
1 RLN1 2 9⁄16 RF1 54016506 $13.73 1 — RL1 54017207 $3.07
2 RLN002 2 9⁄16 REN-2 75380584 $15.51 9⁄16 RF2 54016514 14.13 2 — RL2 54017215 2.98
3 RLN003 2 9⁄16 REN-3 75380642 14.88 9⁄16 RF3 54016522 13.53 3 LKN003 LKN-3 75270900 $3.35 RL3 54017223 3.06
5 RLN005 2 9⁄16 REN-5 75380733 14.88 9⁄16 RF5 54016530 13.53 5 LKN005 LKN-5 75270991 3.27 RL5 54017231 2.98
6 RLN006 2 9⁄16 REN-6 75380766 13.06 9⁄16 RF6 54016548 11.87 6 LKN006 LKN-6 75271023 3.27 RL6 54017249 2.98
10 RLN010 2 9⁄16 REN-10 75380519 12.02 9⁄16 RF10 54016555 10.94 10 LKN010 LKN-10 75270777 2.97 RL10 54017256 2.71
15 RLN015 2 9⁄16 REN-15 75380550 12.80 9⁄16 RF15 54016563 11.66 15 LKN015 LKN-15 75270819 1.08 RL15 54017264 0.99
20 RLN020 2 9⁄16 REN-20 75380592 12.80 9⁄16 RF20 54016571 11.66 20 LKN020 LKN-20 75270850 0.79 RL20 54017272 0.72
REN-100
25 RLN25 2 9⁄16 RF25 54016589 12.71 25 LKN025 LKN-25 75270884 1.08 RL25 54017280 0.99
30 RLN030 2 9⁄16 REN-30 75380659 8.46 9⁄16 RF30 54016597 7.71 30 LKN030 LKN-30 75270918 0.74 RL30 54017298 0.68
35 RLN035 3 1 REN-35 75380675 28.00 13⁄16 RF35 54016605 25.47 35 LKN035 LKN-35 75270934 2.07 RL35 54017306 1.88
40 RLN040 3 1 REN-40 75380691 26.85 13⁄16 RF40 54016613 24.42 40 — RL40 54017314 1.87
45 RLN45 3 13⁄16 RF45 54016621 24.84 45 — RL45 54017322 1.82
50 RLN050 3 1 REN-50 75380741 26.85 13⁄16 RF50 54016639 24.42 50 LKN050 LKN-50 75271007 2.07 RL50 54017330 1.88
60 RLN060 3 1 REN-60 75380774 18.57 13⁄16 RF60 54016647 17.00 60 LKN060 LKN-60 75271031 1.55 RL60 54017348 1.41
70 RLN70 57⁄8 19⁄64 RF70 54016654 47.77 70 LKN070 LKN-70 75271056 4.10 RL70 54017355 3.74
1
80 RLN080 5 1 REN-80 75380808 63.02 19⁄64 RF80 54016662 57.36 80 LKN080 LKN-80 75271064 4.10 RL80 54017363 3.74
90 RLN90 57⁄8 19⁄64 RF90 54016670 49.91 90 — RL90 54017371 3.57
1
100 RLN100 5 1 REN-100 75380527 41.99 19⁄64 RF100 54016688 38.20 100 LKN100 LKN-100 75270785 2.70 RL100 54017389 2.44
110 RLN110 71⁄8 137⁄64 RF110 54016696 114.54 110 — RL110 54017397 7.17
125 RLN125 71⁄8 137⁄64 RF125 54016704 114.54 125 LKN125 LKN-125 75270801 8.33 RL125 54017405 7.59 RES-60
150 RLN150 71⁄8 137⁄64 REN-150 75380568 126.28 137⁄64 RF150 54016712 114.91 150 LKN150 LKN-150 75270827 8.33 RL150 54017413 7.59
175 RLN175 71⁄8 137⁄64 RF175 54016720 114.54 175 — RL175 54017421 7.17
200 RLN200 71⁄8 137⁄64 REN-200 75380600 108.92 137⁄64 RF200 54016738 99.12 200 LKN200 LKN-200 75270868 5.51 RL200 54017439 5.02
225 RLN225 85⁄8 27⁄64 RF225 54016746 202.53 225 — RL225 54017447 13.11
250 RLN250 85⁄8 27⁄64 RF250 54016753 202.53 250 LKN250 LKN-250 75270892 15.88 RL250 54017454 14.45
300 RLN300 85⁄8 2.1 REN-300 75380667 213.16 27⁄64 RF300 54016761 193.97 300 LKN300 LKN-300 75270926 15.92 RL300 54017462 14.48
350 RLN350 85⁄8 27⁄64 RF350 54016779 202.53 350 LKN350 LKN-350 75270942 15.92 RL350 54017470 14.48
400 RLN400 85⁄8 21⁄10 REN-400 75380709 170.79 27⁄64 RF400 54016787 155.41 400 LKN400 LKN-400 75270967 14.42 RL400 54017488 13.13
450 RLN450 103⁄8 239⁄64 RF450 54016795 309.35 450 — RL450 54017496 21.73
500 RLN500 103⁄8 239⁄64 RF500 54016803 309.35 500 — RL500 54017504 21.73
600 RLN600 103⁄8 239⁄64 RF600 54016811 296.51 600 LKN600 LKN-600 75271049 24.06 RL600 54017512 21.90
600V 600V
1 RLS1 5 13⁄16 RFS1 54016829 31.00 1 — RLS1 54017520 4.81
2 RLS2 5 13⁄16 RFS2 54016837 31.00 2 — RLS2 54017538 4.24
3 RLS3 5 13⁄16 RFS3 54016845 32.21 3 LKS003 LKS-3 75380329 5.38 RLS3 54017546 4.90
5 RLS005 5 13⁄16 RES-5 75381046 39.16 13⁄16 RFS5 54016852 35.63 5 LKS005 LKS-5 75380410 5.38 RLS5 54017553 4.90
6 RLS006 5 13⁄16 RES-6 75381079 36.14 13⁄16 RFS6 54016860 33.50 6 LKS006 LKS-6 75380444 5.27 RLS6 54017561 4.80
10 RLS010 5 13⁄16 RES-10 75380832 34.91 13⁄16 RFS10 54016878 31.76 10 LKS010 LKS-10 75271098 4.29 RLS10 54017579 3.91
15 RLS015 5 13⁄16 RES-15 75380873 28.45 13⁄16 RFS15 54016886 26.06 15 LKS015 LKS-15 75271130 1.44 RLS15 54017587 1.32 LKN-200
20 RLS020 5 13⁄16 RES-20 75380915 27.34 13⁄16 RFS20 54016894 24.88 20 LKS020 LKS-20 75271171 1.44 RLS20 54017595 1.32
25 RLS025 5 13⁄16 RES-25 75380949 33.98 13⁄16 RFS25 54016902 30.93 25 LKS025 LKS-25 75380303 2.14 RLS25 54017603 1.95
30 RLS030 5 13⁄16 RES-30 75380972 21.17 13⁄16 RFS30 54016910 19.27 30 LKS030 LKS-30 75380337 1.33 RLS30 54017611 1.20
35 RLS035 51⁄2 11⁄16 RES-35 75380998 53.38 11⁄16 RFS35 54016928 48.58 35 LKS035 LKS-35 75380352 4.04 RLS35 54017629 3.68
40 RLS040 51⁄2 11⁄16 RES-40 75381012 53.38 11⁄16 RFS40 54016936 48.58 40 LKS040 LKS-40 75380378 4.04 RLS40 54017637 3.68
45 RLS45 51⁄2 11⁄16 RFS45 54016944 45.31 45 LKS045 LKS-45 75380394 4.12 RLS45 54017645 3.74
50 RLS050 51⁄2 11⁄16 RES-50 75381053 53.38 11⁄16 RFS50 54016951 48.58 50 LKS050 LKS-50 75380428 4.12 RLS50 54017652 3.74
60 RLS060 51⁄2 11⁄16 RES-60 75381087 36.24 11⁄16 RFS60 54016969 33.77 60 LKS060 LKS-60 75380451 2.70 RLS60 54017660 2.44
LKS-150
70 RLS70 77⁄8 121⁄64 RFS70 54016977 96.25 70 LKS070 LKS-70 75380477 8.25 RLS70 54017678 7.51
80 RLS080 77⁄8 121⁄64 RES-80 75381111 121.53 121⁄64
RFS80 54016985 110.61 80 LKS080 LKS-80 75380485 8.25 RLS80 54017686 7.51
90 RLS90 77⁄8 121⁄64 RFS90 54016993 100.37 90 — RLS90 54017694 6.66
100 RLS100 77⁄8 121⁄64 RES-100 75380840 84.61 1 ⁄64 RFS100
21 54017009 76.99 100 LKS100 LKS-100 75271106 5.51 RLS100 54017702 5.02
110 RLS110 95⁄8 153⁄64 RFS110 54017017 194.60 110 — RLS110 54017710 11.98
125 RLS125 95⁄8 153⁄64 RFS125 54017025 186.51 125 LKS125 LKS-125 75271122 15.13 RLS125 54017728 13.78
150 RLS150 95⁄8 153⁄64 RES-150 75380881 196.31 153⁄64 RFS150 54017033 178.64 150 LKS150 LKS-150 75271148 15.13 RLS150 54017736 13.78
175 RLS175 95⁄8 153⁄64 RFS175 54017041 194.60 175 — RLS175 54017744 11.98
200 RLS200 95⁄8 153⁄64 RES-200 75380923 164.07 153⁄64 RFS200 54017058 149.32 200 LKS200 LKS-200 75271189 11.67 RLS200 54017751 10.62 RL1
225 RLS225 115⁄8 25⁄8 RFS225 54017066 392.35 225 — RLS225 54017769 23.31
250 RLS250 115⁄8 25⁄8 RFS250 54017074 378.40 250 — RLS250 54017777 22.63
300 RLS300 115⁄8 25⁄8 RFS300 54017082 392.35 300 LKS300 LKS-300 75380345 23.66 RLS300 54017785 21.53
350 RLS350 115⁄8 25⁄8 RFS350 54017090 392.35 350 LKS350 LKS-350 75380360 28.55 RLS350 54017793 25.99
400 RLS400 115⁄8 25⁄8 RES-400 75381020 379.16 25⁄8 RFS400 54017108 346.67 400 LKS400 LKS-400 75380386 27.49 RLS400 54017801 25.02
450 RLS450 133⁄8 31⁄8 RFS450 54017116 576.92 450 — RLS450 54017819 31.23
500 RLS500 133⁄8 31⁄8 RFS500 54017124 560.12 500 — RLS500 54017827 31.23
600 RLS600 133⁄8 31⁄8 RES-600 75381095 601.13 31⁄8 RFS600 54017132 547.04 600 LKS600 LKS-600 75380469 39.44 RLS600 54017835 35.91
1
Length: 57⁄8w
3618 CALL MSC TODAY 800-645-7270 FOR ALL YOUR INDUSTRIAL NEEDS
LIMIT & SNAP ACTION SWITCHES
Heavy-Duty Limit Switches
• Direct drive actuator prevents contact welding • NEMA A600 contact rating (UL/CSA) • Three-conduit switch simplifies wiring • Double sealed diecast construction
• Four-position turret head
1 Form X (1 NO + 1 NC) contact rated 10 A @ 480 VAC, 6 A @ 30 VDC, 0.8 A @ 125 VDC, 0.4 A @ 250 VDC maximum carrying current (non-inductive, resistive load). Single conduit opening body
size: 99.5 x 40 x 43mm (3.92 x 1.58 x 1.69 in.) Triple conduit opening body size: 97.9 x 63 x 38.8mm (3.85 x 2.48 x 1.53 in.)
Max. Min. Interchange Guide
Actuator Operating Release Cutler- MICRO Single-Conduit Triple-Conduit
Type Force (Lbs.) Force (Lbs.) Hammer SWITCH Square D Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea. Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea.
Side Rotary, Nylon Roller Lever 2.12 1.76 E49S-11AP1 31ZS1-C XCK-J10511 D4B-3111N 54046701 $122.00 D4B-7111N 54046776 $127.05
Adjustable Rubber Roller Lever 1.63 1.76 E49S11-UP1 XCK-J10541 D4B-3113N 54046719 133.65
Adjustable Nylon Roller Lever 2.12 1.76 E49S11-UP1 XCK-J10541 D4B-3116N 54046727 132.74 D4B-7116N 54046792 134.43
Adjustable Rod Lever 7.62 0.39 E49S11-DP1 XCK-J10559 D4B-3117N 54046735 132.74 D4B-7117N 54046800 137.59
Plain Plunger 4.19 7.05 E49S11-BP1 32ZS1-C XCK-J161 D4B-3170N 54046743 117.73 D4B-7170N 54046818 120.68
Roller Plunger 4.19 7.05 E49S11-CP1 35ZS1-C XCK-J167 D4B-3171N 54046750 122.00 D4B-7171N 54046826 127.05 Adjustable Rubber
Coil Spring 5.3 D4B-3181N 54046768 117.73 D4B-7181N 54046834 119.96 Roller Level
Short Hinge
Pin Plunger Panel Mount Roller Plunger Hinge Lever Hinge Roller Lever Roller Lever
Actuator Max. Operating Min. Release Actuator Interchange Guide
High-precision, 15-amp breaking capacity. Steady state break Type Force (oz.) Force (oz.) L (In.) MICRO SWITCH Unimax Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea.
current (non-inductive; resistive): 15 A @ 125/250 VAC, Pin Plunger 12.3 4.0 BZ-2R-A2 HBS2K-AAYSPO55C Z15G-B 54045109 $6.50
10 A @ 500 VAC, 0.5 A @ 125 VDC, 0.25 A @ 250 VDC. Panel Mount Roller Plunger 12.3 4.0 BZ-2RQ18-A2 HBS2K-AA45RO55C Z15GQ22-B 54045083 17.68
Body Size: 49.2 x 17.5 x 24.2 mm (1.94 x 0.69 x 0.95 inch). Hinge Lever 2.5 0.5 2.50 BZ-2RW80-A2 HBS2K-AA4STO55C Z15GW-B 54045117 8.29
Screw terminals. Hinge Roller Lever 3.5 0.8 1.91 BZ-2RW82-A2 HBS2K-AA4SAO55C Z15GW2-B 54045125 10.44
Short Hinge Roller Lever 5.6 1.5 1.05 BZ-2RW822-A2 HBS2K-AA4SFO55C Z15GW22-B 54045091 10.02
Basics of...Switches
3626 CALL MSC TODAY 800-645-7270 FOR ALL YOUR INDUSTRIAL NEEDS
Page 158
RELAYS & ENCLOSED RELAYS TECHNICAL INFORMATION
Ice Cube Square-Base General-Purpose Relays
Contact Coil Voltage Power Contact Rating Interchange Guide
Terminal
Form (60Hz) Consumption (Resistive) Type IDEC P&B Aromat Fig. Model # Order # Price Ea.
SPDT 24VAC 1.0 to 1.2VA 15A@ 110VAC Plug-In Solder Terminals HL1-H — — A LY1-AC24 54045828 $8.77
SPDT 120VAC 0.9 to 1.1VA 15A@ 24VDC Standard Case HL1-H — — A LY1-AC110/120 54045836 8.77
SPDT 240VAC 0.9 to 1.1VA 1⁄2HP@ 120VAC HL1-H — — A LY1-AC220/240 54045844 9.61
SPDT 12VDC 0.9W — HL1-H — — A LY1-DC12 54045851 8.52 A B
SPDT 24VDC 0.9W — HL1-H — — A LY1-DC24 54045869 8.53
1
SPDT 24VAC 1.0 to 1.2VA 15A@ 110VAC Plug-In Solder Terminals HL1-HTM — — A LY1F-AC24 54045885 9.18
1
SPDT 120VAC 0.9 to 1.1VA 15A@ 24VDC Upper Mounting Bracket HL1-HTM — — A LY1F-AC110/120 54045877 9.18
1
SPDT 240VAC 0.9 to 1.1VA 1⁄2HP@ 120VAC HL1-HTM — — A LY1F-AC220/240 54045893 9.67
1
SPDT 12VDC 0.9W — HL1-HTM — — LY1F-DC12 54045901 9.07
1
SPDT 24VDC 0.9W — HL1-HTM — — A LY1F-DC24 54045919 9.07
1
DPDT 12VAC 1.0 to 1.2 VA 10A@110VAC/24VDC Plug-In Solder Terminals — — — B LY2AC12 62411392 9.70
DPDT 24VAC 1.0 to 1.2VA 10A@ 110VAC Standard Case HL2-H RH2B-U K10P11 B LY2-AC24 54045927 10.04
DPDT 120VAC 0.9 to 1.1VA 10A@ 24VDC HL2-H RH2B-U K10P11 B LY2-AC110/120 54045935 10.04 D
C
DPDT 240VAC 0.9 to 1.1VA 1⁄2HP@ 120VAC HL2-H RH2B-U K10P11 B LY2-AC220/240 54045943 10.04
DPDT 12VDC 0.9W — HL2-H RH2B-U K10P11 B LY2DC12 54045950 10.04 • Compact cube-style relays
DPDT 24VDC 0.9W — HL2-H RH2B-U K10P11 B LY2-DC24 54045968 10.04 • Plug-in/solder terminals
1
DPDT 24VAC 1.0 to 1.2VA 10A@ 110VAC Plug-In Solder Terminals HL2-HTM RH2B-UT K10L11 B LY2F-AC24 54045976 10.40 • Arc barrier equipped relay with 2,000 VAC,
1
DPDT 120VAC 0.9 to 1.1VA 10A@ 24VDC Upper Mounting Bracket HL2-HTM RH2B-UT K10L11 B LY2F-AC 110/120 54045984 10.27 50/60 Hz dielectric strength
1
DPDT 240VAC 0.9 to 1.1VA 1⁄2HP@ 120VAC HL2-HTM RH2B-UT K10L11 B LY2F-AC 220/240 54045992 11.55 • Long dependable service life: 500,000
1
DPDT 12VDC 0.9W — HL2-HTM RH2B-UT K10L11 B LY2F-DC12 54046008 10.55 operations min. for 2PDT relays; 200,000
1
DPDT 24VDC 0.9W — HL2-HTM RH2B-UT K10L11 B LY2F-DC24 54046016 10.85 operations min. for others
DPDT 24VAC 1.0 to 1.2VA 10A@ 110VAC Plug-In Solder Terminals HL2-L RH2B-UL K10L11 B LY2N-AC24 54046024 13.58 • Order mounting sockets separately below
DPDT 120VAC 0.9 to 1.1VA 10A@ 24VDC Standard Case LED Indicator HL2-L RH2B-UL K10L11 B LY2N-AC 110/120 54046032 13.54 • 36.6 H x W x 27.9 D mm (1.4w x W x 1.10w)
2
3PDT 24VAC 1.6 to 2.0VA 10A@ 110VAC Plug-In Solder Terminals — RH3B-U — C LY3-AC24 54046057 14.23
3PDT 120VAC 1.6 to 2.0VA 10A@ 24VDC Standard Case — RH3B-U — C LY3-AC120 2
54046065 14.23 Contact Ratings
2
3PDT 240VAC 1.6 to 2.0VA 1⁄2HP@ 240VAC — RH3B-U — C LY3-AC240 54046073 14.23 15A @ 110/120 VAC - 1⁄2 HP @ 120 VAC
2
3PDT 12VDC 1.4W — — RH3B-U — C LY3-DC12 54046081 14.23 12A @ 220/277 VAC - 1 HP @ 250 VAC
2
3PDT 24VDC 1.4W — — RH3B-U — C LY3-DC24 54046099 14.23 12A @ 28 VDC - B300 Pilot Duty
4PDT 24VAC 1.95 to 2.5VA 10A@ 110VAC Plug-In Solder Terminals — RH4B-U — D LY4-AC24 54046107 16.47
4PDT 120VAC 1.95 to 2.5VA 10A@ 24VDC Standard Case — RH4B-U — D LY4-AC120 54046115 16.47 LED Indicator
4PDT 240VAC 1.95 to 2.5VA 1⁄2HP@ 240VAC — RH4B-U — D LY4-AC240 54046172 17.70 Relay Width
4PDT 12VDC 1.5W — — RH4B-U — D LY4-DC12 54046123 16.59 SPDT 21.8mm (0.85w)
4PDT 24VDC 1.5W — — RH4B-U — D LY4-DC24 54046131 16.59 DPDT 21.8mm (0.85w)
4PDT 24VAC 1.95 to 2.5VA 10A@ 110VAC Plug-In Solder Terminals — RH4B-UL — D LY4N-AC24 54046149 22.74 3PDT 31.5mm (1.24w)
4PDT 120VAC 1.95 to 2.5VA 10A@ 24VDC Standard Case LED Indicator — RH4B-UL — D LY4N-AC120 54046156 22.76 4PDT 41.4mm (1.63w)
1 2
Figure C Figure B
Track and Surface Mounting Sockets for LY Series Relays
Desc. Pins Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea. Desc. Pins Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea. Desc. Pins Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea.
SPDT/DPDT Power Ice-Cube 8 PTF08A-E 54046164 $6.43 3PDT Power Ice-Cube 11 PTF11A 54045802 $8.81 4PDT Power Ice-Cube 14 PTF14A-E 54045810 $8.62
3634 CALL MSC TODAY 800-645-7270 FOR ALL YOUR INDUSTRIAL NEEDS
TIMERS & PROXIMITY SENSOR TECHNICAL INFORMATION
Spring-Wound Mechanical Timers 24 Hr. or 7 Day Electronic
Time Switches
These energy-saving timers do not use electricity to operate. Replace any standard switch, and
automatically limit the ON time of fans, lights, motors, heaters and other energy consuming • Make upgrading to an electric time switch easy • Automatic daylight saving time adjustment
loads.“Up front” terminal connection and easy “press on” knob design ensures quick and easy • Multi-volt operation from 120 to 277 VAC
installation. Durable plastic time knob. Include metal wallplate. • Program up to 28 set points or events (14 ON/14 OFF
• Automatic shut-off • Mounts in standard single-gang junction boxes per channel)
• ET1100 Series: set points can be preset to
Timing Interchange Guide automatically repeat on a daily basis
Range M.H. Rhodes Paragon Torx Dayton Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea. • ET1700 Series: set points can be distributed
5 Min. 90004 SW5M A505M 6X545 FF5M 54025002 $23.75 throughout the days of the week
15 Min. 90005 SW15M A515M 2E269 FF15M 54025010 22.77 • Programs can be overridden at any time ET1105C ET1705CR
1 Hour 90008 SW60M A560M 6X546 FF60M 54025036 23.22 • Field replaceable “AAA” batteries maintain program
6 Hours 90007 SW6H A506H 4A218 FF6H 54025044 29.75 and accurate time keeping for 3 years
12 Hours 90001 SW12H A512H 2E052 FF12H 54025051 28.84 • 2-Circuit models feature 2-second pulse option for
contactor and bell ringing applications
• Clock voltage: 120/208/240/277 • Amp rating: 30
• HP rating: 1HP/2HP • All models: 50 or 60 Hz.
• Knockouts: combination 1⁄2w - 3⁄4w, one on back and
Heavy-Duty Grounded each side of case and two on bottom ET1125C ET1125CR
Plug-In Timers Switch Type of
Circuit Type Enclosure Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea.
A. Air Conditioner & Appliance Timer
Automatically controls air conditioners, 1 SPST NEMA1 ET1105C 02168326 $189.33
computers, heaters, heavy-duty 1 SPST NEMA3R ET1705CR 02168359 242.57
appliances and lamps. 2 SPST NEMA1 ET1125C 02168334 213.35
2 SPST NEMA3R ET1125CR 02168342 242.03
• 3-prong grounded plug and switch;
2 STST NEMA1 ET1725C 02168367 237.29 ET1725C
plugs into wall
• Manual override On/Off switch
• Order #54024864 switch has 1875W,
120V, 1 HP, 120V max. motor load A. Air Conditioner & B. Random-Pattern C. Programmable
• Order #54024872 switch has Appliance Timer Security Timer Timer
5000W, 250V, 2 HP, 240V max.
motor load C. Programmable Timer 10 Pc. Mini Open End
B. Random-Pattern Security Timer Convenient programmable settings with
Turns lights on and off at slightly nonremovable trippers. Ignition Wrench Set
dfferent times each day. • Manual override • Multi-setting timer Inch Mfr’s Lifetime Warranty
• Manual override • White housing • White housing Set #EW-40NB:
ON Time (Hours) Watts Cap. • Roll-up Pouch
Key Settings Min. Max. Amps Tungsten HP Motor Volts Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea. Set Consists of:
A. 3 On/3 Off per day 1⁄2 231⁄2 15 Resist., 1750 1 120 TN311C 54024864 $19.81 • 10 - Wrenches: 13⁄64x15⁄64w, 7⁄32x1⁄4w, 15⁄64x13⁄64w, 1⁄4x7⁄32w,
17⁄64x19⁄64w, 9⁄32x5⁄16w, 5⁄16x9⁄32w, 11⁄32x3⁄8w, 3⁄8x11⁄32w, 7⁄16x1⁄2w
8 Induct.
A. 2 On/2 Off per day 1⁄2 231⁄2 — — 2 240 HB114C 54024872 21.77
B. 2 On/2 Off per day 3⁄4 23 ⁄4 15 Resist. 1750
1 1⁄3 120 SB711C 54024815 14.19 Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea.
C. Up to 24 On/24 Off 1⁄2 231⁄2 15 Resist. 1750 1⁄3 120 SB811C 54024823 15.42 EW-40NB BU05614565 $33.33
Contact Contact Rating Max. Amperes/ HP@ (VAC) Timer Input Interchange Guide
Form Pole Induct. (I) or Resist. (R) 120 240 Volts (in Hz) EZ Controls Paragon Torx Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea.
Electronic Full Year or Seven-Day Programmable Timers, 1 Circuit
SPDT 15@ 24/120VAC(R), 10@ 240/277VAC(R) 1 2 120 (60 Hz) EZ-731, EC365/C-120 EC71/18S/120, DG-120, DT100 DZS-100 ET70115C 54024567 $341.14
Electronic Full Year or Seven-Day Programmable Timers, 2 Circuit
SPDT 10@24/120/247 (VAC R) 1 2 120/208/240/277(60Hz) EZ-701-P EC72 Series DT200,-2&-3 ET70215CR 54024559 412.42
Electronic Water Heater Timers, 1 Pole
SPST 30@120VAC 120 (50/60 Hz) EH10 EH10 73128159 79.83
Electronic Water Heater Timers, 2 Pole
DPST 30@240VAC 240 (50/60 Hz) EH40 EH40 73128167 115.79
3640 CALL MSC TODAY 800-645-7270 FOR ALL YOUR INDUSTRIAL NEEDS
Page 160
SWITCHES, CONTACTORS & CONTACTOR TECH INFO
Rainproof Pullout Type Disconnects Switched Disconnect Safety Enclosures
for Air Conditioning Application
Non-fused and fused versions available.
Single Phase - 240VAC - with two wire equipment ground to case. NEMA 3R • Nonmetallic enclosure is Type 4X washdown resistant and non-conductive
rainproof, metallic/galvanized steel enclosure. Horsepower ratings apply • Internal frame bonds all grounds automatically
when time delay fuses are used. • Accepts auxiliary contacts to extend the function of the device
Fuse Size (In.) Wt. • Lockable highly visible red handle to meet OSHA lock/tagout regulations
Amps Type HP Width Height Depth (Lbs.) Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea. Amp Voltage Type Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea.
60 Cartridge 10 Max 57⁄16 813⁄16 33⁄16 4.5 DPF222R 00438655 $81.14 30 600V AC (max) Unfused HBLDS3 54034624 $320.91
60 Non-Fusible 10 Max 57⁄16 813⁄16 33⁄16 4.5 DPU222R 00438648 75.31 60 600V AC (max) Unfused HBLDS6 54034632 440.76
100 600V AC (max) Unfused HBLDS10 54034640 578.08
30 600V AC (max) Fused FDS30 54034657 1075.06
60 600V AC (max) Fused FDS60 54034665 1231.74
Basics of...Contactors
A contactor does not provide overload protection. Contactors are used to electrically turn on or off high current, non-motor loads or in motor circuits where overload
protection is separately provided. The contactor operates by applying a control voltage to the contactor coil. When the coil is energized, the movable contacts are
closed against the stationary contacts, thus completing the circuit. The contactor is therefore used to supply and interrupt power to an electrical load.
NEMA Contactors. NEMA (National Electrical Manufacturers’ Association) establishes product design standards and test specifications for these contactors. These
contactors are capable of general jogging and reversing duty. NEMA contactors can be applied with limit application information.
IEC Contactors. IEC (International Electrotechnical Commission) publishes recommendations for certain product design parameters and laboratory test procedures. In
general, IEC standards allow the contactor to have a smaller creepage path and a higher temperature rise than NEMA, which results in a smaller physical size. Also, Page
when sizing an IEC contactor, knowing an application’s duty cycle and jogging and reversing characteristics becomes important. 3665
Page 161
Manual Contactors
Switches Enclosure
• Compact design provides extra wiring room for easy, fast installation • Can be padlocked to conform to OSHA lockout requirements
• Easy-to-read electrical ratings on rugged steel mounting straps ensure accurate identification • Color: Gray
• Highly visible “ON/OFF” markings on large, rugged toggles make the switch easy to operate Switches with Enclosure
and reduce the risk of errors • Totally enclosed body eliminates exposed contacts
• Cam and roll design provides dependable, trouble-free switch action • Enclosures can be padlocked to conform to OSHA lockout requirements
• Distinct wire pockets and thick-wall arc barriers prevent strands from straying • Thick steel 0.060w (1.52mm) construction with gray baked enamel finish
• Switch configuration: two-position switches, maintained contact, single throw • Double-break, silver-alloy, butt-type contacts provide long life
• Single phase • Color: Black • Separate arc-quenching chambers isolate each pole. Front terminals are designed for easy wiring
Switches
NEMA Amperage Horsepower Wiring No. of
Configuration Rating Voltage @ 120 VAC @ 240 VAC @ 480 VAC @ 600 VAC Method Poles Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea.
NEMA 1 20 250, 600 2 3 5 7.5 Back & Side 2 AH6808UDAC A78006764 $35.99
NEMA 1 30 600 2 5 7.5 7.5 Front 2 AH6810U A78006772 64.99
NEMA 1 30 600 3 7.50 15 15 Front 3 AH7810UD 1
A78006780 96.99
NEMA 1 40 600 3 5 15 15 Side Wired 2 AHMC240C 1
A78006707 75.99
NEMA 1 40 600 3 5 15 15 Side Wired 2 AHMC240L 2
A78006715 82.00
NEMA 1 40 600 3 7.50 15 20 Side Wired 3 AHMC340C A78006731 123.00
NEMA 1 40 600 3 7.50 15 20 Side Wired 3 AHMC340L 2
A78006749 136.00
NEMA 1 60 600 3 5 15 15 Side Wired 2 AHMC260L 2
A78006723 134.00 Switches Enclosure Switch w/Enclosure
NEMA 1 60 600 5 10 25 30 Side Wired 3 AHMC360L 2
A78006756 167.00
1
Screw and clamp 2Box lug Switches with Enclosure
NEMA Horsepower No. of Switch
Enclosure Configuration @ 120 VAC @ 240 VAC @ 480 VAC @ 600 VAC Poles Configuration Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea.
NEMA NEMA 1 3 7.50 15 15 3 Three Pole/Single Throw AHN1GD 1
A09143728 $36.00
Configuration Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea. NEMA 1 3 7.50 15 15 3 Three Pole/Single Throw AH7810GD A78006616 113.00
NEMA 3R AHN3WD A78006608 $99.00 NEMA 3R 3 7.50 15 15 3 Three Pole/Single Throw AH7810WD A78006624 169.00
1
Single gang
Basics of...Motors
It is important to select the motor that will help assure optimum performance of the equipment to be driven. To do this, a motor must be selected that is capable of
starting the equipment, bringing it up to operating speed, and driving it at the necessary loading speed as long as required without excessive heating. The following
motor specifications should be considered.
Category/Application
NEMA (National Electrical Manufacturers Association) along with electric motor member companies established a NEMA Premium® energy efficiency motors program
to provide highly energy efficient products that meet the needs and applications of users based on a consensus definition of "premium efficiency" and use of the NEMA
Premium® logo for premium products.
Choosing a motor with the NEMA Premium® logo will identify higher efficient motors that will save money in total energy operating cost and improve system reliability.
For more information about the NEMA Premium® efficiency motor program, go to www.nema.org/premiummotors.com.
Voltage
Voltage is the power rating at which the motor is designed to operate. A motor should operate at plus or minus 10% of nameplate voltage. A 230 volt motor should
operate over a range of 207 volts to 253 volts. A slash (/) between listed voltages indicates there is a different connection for these voltages. A hyphen (-) between
voltages listed usually indicates the same connection is used for these voltages. (No plus or minus 10%.)
Tip: Match to supplied voltage.
Tip: If the supplied voltage is 115, and the replacement motor is 115/230, the motor will work, if connected for 115 volts.
Frequency/Hertz (Hz)
The term hertz or frequency was formally called “cycles” and is nearly always 60 hertz in the USA and Canadian applications. Some foreign countries, especially
Europe use 50 hertz power supplies.
Tip: Match Hz exactly or with a 50/60 capable motor.
3672 CALL MSC TODAY 800-645-7270 FOR ALL YOUR INDUSTRIAL NEEDS
Page 162
MOTORS TECHNICAL INFORMATION
Environment
Select the motor type based on the operating environment.
ENVIRONMENT TYPE TYPICAL DESCRIPTION
Clean, Dry, Indoor, OAO Open Air Over Vent openings in shell and/or end shields must be located in air stream to provide motor cooling.
Non-Hazardous
ODP Open Drip Proof Vent openings that are placed so drops of liquid falling within an angle of 15 degrees from vertical will
not affect performance.
Dirty, Damp, Outdoor, TEFC Totally No vent openings in shell or end shield. Includes an external fan that blows cooling air over the
Non-Hazardous Enclosed Fan Cooled motor frame.
TENV Totally No vent openings in shell or end shield. Depends on convection air for cooling.
Enclosed Non Vented
TEAO Totally No vent openings in shell or end shield. Depends on airflow from driven device for motor cooling. Must
Enclosed Air Over be loaded in air stream.
Hazardous TEFC/TENV No vent openings in shell or end shields. Designed to withstand an internal explosion of specified gases
Explosion-Proof or vapors and not allow the internal flame or explosion to escape.
Tip: A totally enclosed motor can replace an open motor assuming other characteristics meet the application requirements.
RESILIENT or CRADLE BASE RIGID or FOOTED BASE YOKE MOUNT C-FACE WITHOUT BASE
Motor is isolated from base by Motor base is welded or bolted Tabs are welded to bottom of End shield has holes for mounting
rubber rings on the end shield directly to motor shell motor shell for bolting to a fan
column or bracket
Tip: Many times the frame designation helps identify the way the motor is mounted (56C = C-Face)
Thermal Overload/Protector
A temperature-sensing device built into the motor that shuts off the motor if the temperature becomes excessive due to failure-to-start or overloading.
Automatic Reset Thermal Overload Protector (auto) - after motor cools, thermal protector automatically restores power.
Should not be used where unexpected restarting would be hazardous.
Manual Reset Thermal Overload Protector (man) - An external button must be pushed to restore power to motor.
Preferred where unexpected restarting would be hazardous, as on saws, conveyors, compressors, etc.
If the motor does not have thermal protection, then the nameplate will be blank or will show non protected “none”.
Tip: It is important to match the thermal protection to the motor that is being replaced.
Bearing Type
Bearings support the rotating parts of the motor. They are usually either ball or sleeve.
Tip: Sleeve: Used on fractional HP motors with low to moderate loads. Ball: Used where a higher load capacity is required.
Service Factor
A measure of the reserve margin built into a motor. Motors rated over 1.0 SF have more than normal margin, and are used where unusual conditions such as
occasional high or low voltage, momentary overloads, etc., are likely to occur.
Tip: Always match the service factor with the same or higher.
Insulation Class
The insulation class refers to the class of insulation and related components used in the
motor. These are rated by standard NEMA classifications according to the motor’s CLASS TOTAL TEMPERATURE OF SYSTEM
maximum operating temperatures. A 105°C (221°F)
B 130°C (266°F)
F 155°C (311°F)
Tip: Keep in mind, each 10° C rise above the ratings can reduce the life of the motor by half. H 180°C (356°F)
Tip: Under normal conditions a replacement motor should have a class equal to or higher than the
original. If the replacement is a lower rating, it could cause premature failure. (Maximum Allowable Operating Temperature)
3674 CALL MSC TODAY 800-645-7270 FOR ALL YOUR INDUSTRIAL NEEDS
Page 164
MOTORS TECHNICAL INFORMATION
JM Shaft JP Shaft
Keyseat Keyseat
Frame AH U EM EL EN AK R S Frame AH U EM EL EN AK R S
143 41⁄4 7⁄8 1 15⁄32 3⁄8-16 x.75 41⁄2 49⁄64 3⁄16 143 75⁄16 7⁄8 1 15⁄32 3⁄8-16 x.75 41⁄2 49⁄64 3⁄16
145 41⁄4 7⁄8 1 15⁄32 3⁄8-16 x.75 41⁄2 49⁄64 3⁄16 145 75⁄16 7⁄8 1 15⁄32 3⁄8-16 x.75 41⁄2 49⁄64 3⁄16
182 41⁄4 7⁄8 1 11⁄4 3⁄8-16 x.75 41⁄2 49⁄64 3⁄16 182 75⁄16 7⁄8 1 11⁄4 3⁄8-16 x.75 41⁄2 49⁄64 3⁄16
184 41⁄4 7⁄8 1 11⁄4 3⁄8-16 x.75 41⁄2 49⁄64 3⁄16 184 75⁄16 11⁄4 1 11⁄4 3⁄8-16 x.75 41⁄2 49⁄64 3⁄16
213 41⁄4 7⁄8 1 11⁄4 3⁄8-16 x.75 81⁄2 49⁄64 3⁄16 213 81⁄8 11⁄4 13⁄8 13⁄4 3⁄8-16 x.75 81⁄2 17⁄64 1⁄4
215 41⁄4 7⁄8 1 11⁄4 3⁄8-16 x.75 81⁄2 49⁄64 3⁄16 215 81⁄8 11⁄4 13⁄8 13⁄4 3⁄8-16 x.75 81⁄2 17⁄64 1⁄4
254 51⁄4 11⁄4 13⁄8 13⁄4 1⁄2-13 x 1.00 81⁄2 17⁄64 1⁄4 254 81⁄8 11⁄4 13⁄8 13⁄4 1⁄2-13 x 1.00 81⁄2 17⁄64 1⁄4
256 51⁄4 11⁄4 13⁄8 13⁄4 1⁄2-13 x 1.00 81⁄2 17⁄64 1⁄4 256 81⁄8 11⁄4 13⁄8 13⁄4 1⁄2-13 x 1.00 81⁄2 17⁄64 1⁄4
284 51⁄4 11⁄4 13⁄8 13⁄4 1⁄2-13 x 1.00 121⁄2 17⁄64 1⁄4 284 81⁄8 11⁄4 13⁄8 13⁄4 1⁄2-13 x 1.00 121⁄2 17⁄64 1⁄4
286 51⁄4 11⁄4 13⁄8 13⁄4 1⁄2-13 x 1.00 121⁄2 17⁄64 1⁄4 286 81⁄8 11⁄4 13⁄8 13⁄4 1⁄2-13 x 1.00 121⁄2 17⁄64 1⁄4
324 51⁄4 11⁄4 13⁄8 13⁄4 1⁄2-13 x 1.00 121⁄2 17⁄64 1⁄4 324 81⁄8 11⁄4 13⁄8 13⁄4 1⁄2-13 x 1.00 121⁄2 17⁄64 1⁄4
326 51⁄4 11⁄4 13⁄8 13⁄4 1⁄2-13 x 1.00 121⁄2 17⁄64 1⁄4 326 81⁄8 11⁄4 13⁄8 13⁄4 1⁄2-13 x 1.00 121⁄2 17⁄64 1⁄4
364 81⁄8 15⁄8 13⁄4 21⁄8 1⁄2-13 x 1.00 121⁄2 113⁄32 3⁄8
365 81⁄8 15⁄8 13⁄4 21⁄8 1⁄2-13 x 1.00 121⁄2 113⁄32 3⁄8
143TC & 145TC 57⁄8 41⁄2 23⁄4 1⁄8 0.12 61⁄2 4 3⁄8-16 9⁄16 7⁄8 21⁄8 49⁄64 3⁄16
182TC & 184TC 71⁄4 81⁄2 31⁄2 1⁄4 +0.12 9 4 1⁄2-13 3⁄4 11⁄8 25⁄8 63⁄64 1⁄4
182TCH & 184TCH 57⁄8 81⁄2 31⁄2 1⁄8 +0.12 61⁄2 4 3⁄8-16 9⁄16 11⁄8 25⁄8 63⁄64 1⁄4
213TC & 215TC 71⁄4 41⁄2 41⁄4 1⁄4 +0.12 9 4 1⁄2-13 3⁄4 13⁄8 31⁄8 113⁄64 5⁄16
254TC & 256TC 71⁄4 81⁄2 43⁄4 1⁄4 +0.25 10 4 1⁄2-13 3⁄4 15⁄8 33⁄4 113⁄32 3⁄8
284TC & 286TC 9 81⁄2 43⁄4 1⁄4 +0.25 111⁄4 4 1⁄2-13 3⁄4 17⁄8 43⁄8 119⁄32 1⁄2
284TSC & 286TSC 9 101⁄2 43⁄4 1⁄4 +0.25 111⁄4 4 1⁄2-13 3⁄4 15⁄8 3 113⁄32 3⁄8
324TC & 326TC 11 101⁄2 51⁄4 1⁄4 +0.25 14 4 5⁄8-11 15⁄16 21⁄8 5 127⁄32 1⁄2
324TSC & 326TSC 11 121⁄2 51⁄4 1⁄4 +0.25 14 4 5⁄8-11 15⁄16 17⁄8 31⁄2 119⁄32 1⁄2
364TC & 365TC 11 121⁄2 57⁄8 1⁄4 +0.25 14 4 5⁄8-11 15⁄16 23⁄8 55⁄8 21⁄64 5⁄8
364TSC & 365TSC 11 121⁄2 57⁄8 1⁄4 +0.25 14 8 5⁄8-11 15⁄16 17⁄8 31⁄2 119⁄32 1⁄2
404TC & 405TC 11 121⁄2 65⁄8 1⁄4 +0.25 151⁄2 8 5⁄8-11 15⁄16 27⁄8 7 229⁄64 3⁄4
404TSC & 405TSC 11 121⁄2 65⁄8 1⁄4 +0.25 151⁄2 8 5⁄8-11 15⁄16 21⁄8 4 127⁄32 1⁄2
444TC & 445TC 14 16 71⁄2 1⁄4 +0.25 18 8 5⁄8-11 15⁄16 33⁄8 81⁄4 27⁄8 7⁄8
444TSC & 445TSC 14 16 71⁄2 1⁄4 +0.25 18 8 5⁄8-11 15⁄16 23⁄8 41⁄2 21⁄64 5⁄8
447TC & 449TC 14 16 71⁄2 1⁄4 +0.25 18 8 5⁄8-11 15⁄16 33⁄8 81⁄4 27⁄8 7⁄8
447TSC & 449TSC 14 16 71⁄2 1⁄4 +0.25 18 8 5⁄8-11 15⁄16 23⁄8 41⁄2 21⁄64 5⁄8
3676 CALL MSC TODAY 800-645-7270 FOR ALL YOUR INDUSTRIAL NEEDS
Page 166
HAZARDOUS LOCATION MOTORS
HAZARDOUS Location: An area where the possibility of explosion and fire is created by the presence of flammable gases, vapors, dusts, fibers or flying particles
CLASS I: Those areas in which flammable gases or vapors may be present in the air in sufficient quantities to be explosive or ignitable
CLASS II: Those areas made hazardous by the presence of combustible dust
CLASS III: Those areas in which there are easily ignitable fibers or flyings present, due to type of material being handled, stored or processed
DIVISION 1: In the normal situation; the hazard would be expected to be present in everyday production operations or during frequent repair and maintenance activity
DIVISION 2: In the abnormal situation; material is expected to be confined within closed containers or closed systems and will be present only through accidental
rupture, breakage or unusual faulty operation
Operating Temperature Codes
These are simplified definitions - refer to National Electrical Code (NEC), Article 500 for complete definitions.
Maximum Temperature Temperature
Groups °C °F Code
Class Group Hazardous Materials 450 842 T1
Class I 300 572 T2
The gases and vapors of Class I locations are A Acetylene 280 536 T2A
broken into four groups by the codes A, B, C and D. B Hydrogen 260 500 T2B
These materials are grouped according to the C Ethyl-Ether, Ethylene, Cycle Propane 230 446 T2C
ignition temperature of the substance, its D Gasoline, Hexane, Naptha, Benzene, Butane, Propane, Alcohol, 215 419 T2D
explosion pressure and other flammable characteristics. Lacquer Solvent Vapors, Natural Gas 200 392 T3
Class II 180 356 T3A
Class II - dust locations - groups E, F & G. These 165 329 T3B
groups are classified according to the ignition E Metal Dust 160 320 T3C
temperature and the conductivity of the F Carbon Black, Coal, Coke Dust 135 275 T4
hazardous substance. G Flour, Starch, Grain Dust 120 248 T4A
Notes: 100 212 T5
1) We offer Class I and Class II only. We do not offer Group A or B 85 185 T6
2) Group C available on 250 through 400 Frames Notes: 1) T1, T2 & T6 not offered
3) Group E not available on NEMA Frame Motors 2) T1 through T2D not applicable to Class II locations
Tip: When purchasing an Explosionproof Motor you must verify correct Division, Class, Group and Temperature Code 3) T2A through T2D, Class I Group D only
3692 CALL MSC TODAY 800-645-7270 FOR ALL YOUR INDUSTRIAL NEEDS
C-FACE WORM GEAR REDUCERS
Shaft Orientation
3702 CALL MSC TODAY 800-645-7270 FOR ALL YOUR INDUSTRIAL NEEDS
OVERLOAD DEVICES, MECHANICAL CAM CLUTCHES TECH INFO
Torq/Gard® Torque Overload Devices
• Help protect the entire drive train from damage due to excessive torque generated by overloads and jamming • Mfr’s #TGC60 is compatible with type H split taper bushings
• Quickly reacts when torque exceeds preset limits • Mfr’s #TGC200 is compatible with type P1 split taper bushings
• Provide protection far superior to that of torque overload devices employing friction surfaces • Mfr’s #TGC400 and TGC800 are compatible with type Q1 split taper bushings
• Disengage at the torque limit set • Automatically reset by “jogging” the machine For Specific Split Taper Bushing Selection, Refer to Page No. 3715.
Torq/Gard® Precision Cam Follower ±5% Trip Torque Accuracy
Shaft Rge. Max. Shaft Rge. Max.
w/Bushing Bore Hub OAL OD Max. w/Bushing Bore Hub OAL OD Max.
Kits (In.) Dia. (In.) Keyseat (In.) (In.) RPM Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea. Kits (In.) Dia. (In.) Keyseat (In.) (In.) RPM Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea.
1⁄2 - 5⁄8 0.75 — 2.76 3.94 1800 TGC20 84809938 $852.42 11⁄4 - 27⁄16 2.43 5⁄8 x 3⁄16 6.19 10.75 350 TGC400 84809912 $2080.23
3⁄4 - 11⁄4 1.25 1⁄4 x 1⁄8 3.50 5.25 900 TGC60 84809896 944.45 11⁄4 - 27⁄16 2.43 5⁄8 x 3⁄16 6.19 10.75 350 TGC800 84809920 2672.09
3⁄4 - 115⁄16 1.93 1⁄2 x 1⁄8 4.31 7.00 680 TGC200 84809904 1172.09
Torq/Gard® Single Strand Sprockets for Use with ANSI Standard Roller Chain
For Torq/Gard® Model For Roller Chain # Pitch (In.) No. of Teeth Overall Width P (In.) Length Q (In.) Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea.
Torq/Gard 20 40 1⁄2 26 2.88 4.42 20TG40A26K 72479173 $83.68
Torq/Gard 60 40 1⁄2 26 3.5 4.42 TG40A26K 84809979 80.45
Torq/Gard 200 60 3⁄4 26 4.38 6.63 TG60A26K 84809987 144.41
Torq/Gard 400 80 1 28 6.35 9.48 TG80A28K 84809995 211.32 Torq/Gard® Single
Torq/Gard 800 100 11⁄4 28 6.46 11.84 TG100A28K 84810001 274.72 Strand Sprocket
Overrunning Backstopping
Inner or Outer Race Overrunning Prevents reverse rotation of the drive shaft Page
Page 169
Accomplishes intermittent unidirectional motion 3717
Bore Torque Max. Inner Max. Outer Drag Dynamic Static Width Dia. Bore Housing
Dia. (mm) (Nm) Race (RPM) Race (RPM) Torque (Nm) Load Cap. (N) Load Cap. (N) (mm) (mm) Tolerance (mm) Tolerance (mm) Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea.
15 29 3600 2000 0.01 5950 3230 11 35 +0.023/+0.012 -0.012/-0.028 KK15 75674911 $180.48
17 43 3500 1900 0.01 7000 3700 12 40 +0.023/+0.012 -0.012/-0.028 KK17 75674929 197.06
20 61 3000 1600 0.014 8500 4900 14 47 +0.028/+0.015 -0.012/-0.028 KK20 75674937 204.88
25 78 2500 1400 0.017 10700 6300 15 52 +0.028/+0.015 -0.014/-0.033 KK25 75674945 226.34
30 140 2000 1100 0.03 11900 7900 16 62 +0.033/+0.017 -0.014/-0.033 KK30 75674952 245.85
35 173 1800 1000 0.034 13500 9700 17 72 +0.033/+0.017 -0.014/-0.033 KK35 75674960 308.28
40 260 1800 900 0.04 14500 11700 22 80 +0.033/+0.017 -0.014/-0.033 KK40 75674978 332.93
3740 CALL MSC TODAY 800-645-7270 FOR ALL YOUR INDUSTRIAL NEEDS
Page 170
BEARINGS TECHNICAL INFORMATION
Basics of...Bearings
Uses/Selections
The typical functions of a bearing are to allow shaft rotation while minimizing frictional losses and/or supporting the shaft and its associated loads. Bearings are
typically selected based on a required life in hours. Life is directly affected by the load applied to the bearing and the rotational speed of the bearing.
Industries/Applications
HVAC Food and Beverage Unit Material Handling Construction Agricultural Aggregate
• Blowers • Conveyors • Baggage Handling • Off-highway Vehicles • Mowers • Conveyor Pulleys
• Fans • Packaging • Parcel/Package Handling • Pavers • Bailers • Idler Pulleys
• Roof Vents • Mixers • Warehouse Distribution • Highway Stripers • Radial stackers
• Air Curtains • Fillers
Common Terms
Ball: Creates a point contact between the ball and ball path with the rolling element, distributing loads across a small area. Surface contact is minimized and less
friction and heat is generated. This gives ball bearings a higher speed range but lower load capability.
Tapered Roller: Distributes loads across a larger area by creating a line contact between the raceway and rolling element. A double row provides twice as many rolling
elements available to carry bearing loads. This increases bearing radial load capacity but reduces speed capability. Tapered roller bearings can accept heavy loads from
both the radial and thrust directions.
Spherical Roller: Features double row spherical roller bearings that provide modified line contact on the races. This bearing design can accept loads from both the
radial and thrust directions.
Static Misalignment: A fixed misalignment, such as uneven mounting surfaces between two bearings. Both ball and tapered roller bearings have very limited internal
misalignment capabilities. However, some mounted ball and mounted tapered roller bearings have some static self-aligning capability between the housing and bearing
inserts.
Dynamic Misalignment: Occurs due to a constantly changing angle of alignment, such as from a bent shaft. Both ball and tapered roller bearings have very limited
internal misalignment capabilities. However, spherical roller barings have internal misalignment capability and can handle some degree of dynamic misalignment.
Basic Dynamic Rating: The Basic Dynamic Rating as defined by the American Bearing Manufacturers Association (ABMA) is the calculated, constant radial load which
90% of a group of apparently identical bearings with stationary outer ring can theoretically endure for a rating of 1 million revolutions (33 1/3 RPM for 500 hours).
Basic Dynamic Rating is not the maximum load that should be applied to the bearing.
Static Radial Rating: The American Bearing Manufacturers Association (ABMA) defines Static Radial Load Rating as that load which corresponds to a total permanent
deformation of rolling element and raceway.
Radial Load: Load acting on the bearing that is applied perpendicular to the bearing bore.
Axial Load: Load acting on the bearing that is applied parallel to the bearing bore. This is also known as thrust load.
Speed: Affects both the L10 life and operating temperature. Doubling the speed will reduce the L10 life by one-half and can cause a higher operating temperature.
Speed is indicated in Revolutions per Minute (RPM).
Locking Mechanisms
Single Set Screw: Provides two setscrews on a single side of the bearing inner race to secure the bearing to the shaft.
Eccentric: Provides a collar with an eccentric lip that mates with an eccentric lip on the bearing inner ring. Turning the collar while holding the shaft and inner ring
results in a “cam” action that locks the collar and inner ring to the shaft. (Eccentric lock is not recommended for reversing rotation applications.)
Concentric: Concentric locking mechanisms consist of either concentric collars or tapered adaptor sleeves. Concentric locking mechanisms center the shaft in the
bearing bore and virtually eliminate the lock induced bearing out-of-roundness found with eccentric or setscrew designs. This reduces vibration and shaft run-out
during operation, as well as eliminating shaft marring.
Housings
3766 CALL MSC TODAY 800-645-7270 FOR ALL YOUR INDUSTRIAL NEEDS
Page 171
LINEAR RAIL SYSTEMS
Double Horizontal Bases
Dimensions (In.)
Series Size (In.) A B C D E F G H J K L Wt. (Lbs.) Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea.
10 1.0 3.000 2.25 1.50 1.500 2.0 1.0 .257 Thru 1.062 2.125 .50 1.004 0.575 5910-HW 06036321 $75.93
15 1.0 3.000 2.25 1.50 1.500 2.0 1.5 .328 Thru 1.062 2.125 .50 1.004 0.568 5920-HW 06036339 70.18
15 1.5 3.875 3.00 2.25 1.937 2.5 1.5 .328 Thru 1.125 2.500 .75 1.505 1.210 5930-HW 06036347 77.78 5910-HW
Multi-Mount - Four-Way Equal Load Rated Type SHS with Caged Ball™ Technology
NOTE: Block and Rails Sold Separately • Can be mounted in any direction
• Rolling resistance variation is reduced to 1⁄10 of conventional full ball type for smoother motion
• Self-adjusting capability allows for easy installation • High rigidity
• Low noise • High stability • Heavy load capability • Excellent high speed performance
• Long term maintenance free-operation • Long life
• Polyurethane seals provide additional protection from foreign matter
Blocks
Block Dimensions System Information
Hole Spacing Hole Size Assembly Block Load Rating1
Length Width Ht. Transverse Lateral SxL Ht. Overhang Static Dynamic
Mfr’s # L (mm) W (mm) K (mm) C (mm) B (mm) (H) M (mm) (mm) (kN) (kN) Wt. (Lbs.) Order # Price Ea.
Through Hole
SHS15CSS BLOCK 64.4 47 21.0 30 38 M5x4.4 24 16.0 24.2 14.2 0.51 00372417 $143.57
SHS20CSS BLOCK 79.0 63 25.4 40 53 M6x5.4 30 21.5 38.4 22.3 1.01 00372441 158.69
SHS25CSS BLOCK 92.0 70 30.2 45 57 M8x6.8 36 23.5 52.4 31.7 1.58 00372482 188.92
SHS30CSS BLOCK 106.0 90 35.0 52 72 M10x8.5 42 31.0 66.6 44.8 2.95 00372524 211.61
SHS35CSS BLOCK 122.0 100 40.5 62 82 M10x8.5 48 33.0 96.6 62.3 4.18 00372565 226.70
Through Hole Heavy Load
SHS20LCSS BLOCK 98.0 63 25.4 40 53 M6x5.4 30 21.5 50.3 28.1 1.34 00372466 196.49
SHS25LCSS BLOCK 109.0 70 30.2 45 57 M8x6.8 36 23.5 64.7 36.8 1.96 00372508 212.65
SHS30LCSS BLOCK 131.0 90 35.0 52 72 M10x8.5 42 31.0 88.8 54.2 3.65 00372540 261.09
SHS35LCSS BLOCK 152.0 100 40.5 62 82 M10x8.5 48 33.0 127.0 72.9 5.59 00372581 282.62
Blind Hole
SHS20VSS BLOCK 79.0 44 25.4 36 32 M5x5 30 12.0 38.4 22.3 0.80 00372458 158.69
SHS25VSS BLOCK 92.0 48 34.2 35 35 M6x8 40 12.5 52.4 31.7 1.20 00372490 188.92
SHS30VSS BLOCK 106.0 60 38.0 40 40 M8x8 45 16.0 66.6 44.8 2.10 00372532 211.61
SHS35VSS BLOCK 122.0 70 47.5 50 50 M8x12 55 18.0 96.6 62.3 1.40 00372573 226.70
Blind Hole Narrow Width
SHS15RSS BLOCK 64.4 34 25.0 26 26 M4x5 28 9.5 24.2 14.2 0.50 00372425 143.57
1
Load rating per block
Rails
Rail Dimensions Rail Dimensions
Hole Hole Hole Hole
Length Width Ht. Spacing Size (mm) Wt. Length Width Ht. Spacing Size (mm) Wt.
Mfr’s # (mm) W1 (mm) (mm) F (mm) d1-d2-h (Lbs.) Order # Price Ea. Mfr’s # (mm) W1 (mm) (mm) F (mm) d1-d2-h (Lbs.) Order # Price Ea.
SHS15+160L RAIL 160 15 13.0 60 4.5x7.5x5.3 0.46 85296705 $61.81 SHS25+1000L RAIL 1000 23 20.0 60 7.0x11.0x9.0 7.04 85296762 $479.75
SHS15+280L RAIL 280 15 13.0 60 4.5x7.5x5.3 0.80 85296713 108.21 SHS25+1600L RAIL 1600 23 20.0 60 7.0x11.0x9.0 11.28 00372516 759.72
SHS15+460L RAIL 460 15 13.0 60 4.5x7.5x5.3 1.32 85296721 177.75 SHS30+600L RAIL 600 28 23.0 80 9.0x14.0x12.0 5.94 85296812 303.81
SHS15+820L RAIL 820 15 13.0 60 4.5x7.5x5.3 2.35 00372433 329.45 SHS30+1000L RAIL 1000 28 23.0 80 9.0x14.0x12.0 9.90 85296796 506.39
SHS20+280L RAIL 280 20 16.5 60 6.0x9.5x8.5 1.42 85296739 119.40 SHS30+1640L RAIL 1640 28 23.0 80 9.0x14.0x12.0 16.26 00372557 821.32
SHS20+460L RAIL 460 20 16.5 60 6.0x9.5x8.5 2.33 85296747 196.17 SHS30+2520L RAIL 2520 28 23.0 80 9.0x14.0x12.0 24.95 85296804 1276.11
SHS20+820L RAIL 820 20 16.5 60 6.0x9.5x8.5 4.15 85296754 349.64 SHS35+600L RAIL 600 34 26.0 80 9.0x14.0x12.0 8.18 85296846 319.83
SHS20+1240L RAIL 1240 20 16.5 60 6.0x9.5x8.5 6.28 00372474 549.71 SHS35+1000L RAIL 1000 34 26.0 80 9.0x14.0x12.0 13.64 85296820 533.04
SHS25+340L RAIL 340 23 20.0 60 7.0x11.0x9.0 2.39 85296770 163.12 SHS35+1640L RAIL 1640 34 26.0 80 9.0x14.0x12.0 22.40 00372599 865.27
SHS25+640L RAIL 640 23 20.0 60 7.0x11.0x9.0 4.51 85296788 307.03 SHS35+2520L RAIL 2520 34 26.0 80 9.0x14.0x12.0 34.37 85296838 1343.26
3818 CALL MSC TODAY 800-645-7270 FOR ALL YOUR INDUSTRIAL NEEDS
AIR COMPRESSORS TECH INFO/PORTABLE AIR COMPRESSORS
3838 CALL MSC TODAY 800-645-7270 FOR ALL YOUR INDUSTRIAL NEEDS
REGULATORS & AIR SYSTEM COMPONENTS TECHNICAL INFO
Air Pilot Operated Regulators
Pipe Pressure Rating (psig) Ht. W (In.) Ideal for systems requiring pressure
Size (In.) Application Min. Max. (In.) Port to Port Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea. regulation or high flow at an
1⁄2 Quick Response 10 400 3.30 3.38 11-008-130 01724715 $139.71 inaccessible location. A pilot
1⁄4 High Flow or Pressure Regulation 10 400 5.07 4.16 11-042-001 01724723 283.56 regulator (ordered separately)
3⁄8 High Flow or Pressure Regulation 10 400 5.07 4.16 11-042-002 01724731 283.56 controls the outlet pressure of the
1⁄2 High Flow or Pressure Regulation 10 400 5.07 4.16 11-042-003 01724749 283.56 pilot operated regulator. Regulators
3⁄4
are relieving type with NPT Female
High Flow or Pressure Regulation 10 400 5.97 4.16 11-042-007 01724756 296.58 ports. Units designed to provide high
1 High Flow or Pressure Regulation 10 400 5.97 4.16 11-042-008 01724764 296.58 relief flow and quick response.
11⁄4 High Flow or Pressure Regulation 10 400 5.97 4.16 11-042-009 01724772 296.58 Mfr’s #11-008-130 has a constant bleed, providing more rapid response.
1⁄4 High Flow and Relief Flow 10 300 4.40 2.70 R24-201-RNXA 01724780 107.20 For best performance, inlet pressure should be at least 20 psig higher than
3⁄8 High Flow and Relief Flow 10 300 4.40 2.70 R24-301-RNXA 01724798 107.20 desired regulated pressure.
1⁄2 High Flow and Relief Flow 10 300 4.40 2.70 R24-401-RNXA 01724806 107.20
3⁄4 High Flow and Relief Flow 10 300 5.20 2.70 R24-601-RNXA 01724814 226.70 • Maximum temperature: 175°F • Pressure gauge not included
1 High Flow and Relief Flow 10 300 5.20 2.70 R24-801-RNXA 01724822 226.70
11⁄4 High Flow and Relief Flow 10 300 5.20 2.70 R24-A01-RNXA 01724830 250.56
11⁄2 High Flow or Pressure Regulation 10 450 7.24 5.98 R18-B00-RNXA 01724848 457.01
2 High Flow or Pressure Regulation 10 450 7.24 5.98 R18-C00-RNXA 01724855 457.01
Precision/Instrumentation Regulators
Port Size Min. Max. Ht. W Low flow precision air regulators are multi-stage pressure regulators with a
(NPT) psi psi (In.) (In.) Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea. high degree of regulation and repeatability, achieved by reacting to
Low Flow downstream pressure fluctuations as small as 0.01 psig above set pressure.
1⁄4 2 25 4.55 2.12 PR4021-300-M 74700402 $167.88
1⁄4
• Control output pressure with an accuracy of 0.1%
2 60 4.55 2.12 PR4021-200-M 74700394 193.06 • Very low sensitivity to changes in supply pressure and flow
1⁄4 2 120 4.55 2.12 PR4021-100-M 74700386 167.88
3⁄8
• Designed to eliminate need for any readjustment of the regulated pressure after downtime
2 25 4.55 2.12 PR4031-300-M 74700659 167.88 • Unit can be installed in any position, panel mounted or by in-line plumbing
3⁄8 2 60 4.55 2.12 PR4031-200-M 74700642 193.06 • Gauge port size: 1⁄4 NPT • Flow capacity: 14 SCFM Low Flow
3⁄8 2 120 4.55 2.12 PR4031-100-M 74700410 167.88 • Exhaust capacity: up to 10 SCFM • Maximum supply pressure: 150 psig
High Flow • Operating temperature range: 20° to 150°F • Body material: zinc die cast
3⁄8 0 30 7.20 3.62 PR4033-300-M 76821859 397.75
3⁄8
High flow precision regulators are designed for applications that
0 60 7.20 3.62 PR4033-200-M 74700428 397.75 require large flow capability and accurate pressure control.
1⁄2 0 30 7.20 3.62 PR4044-300-M 74700444 419.71
1⁄2 0 60 7.20 3.62 PR4044-200-M 74700436 419.71 • Direct acting, diaphragm-operated
3⁄40 30 7.20 3.62 PR4055-300-M 74700469 397.75 • Once set to a desired output pressure, the regulator maintains the setting permanently
3⁄40 60 7.20 3.62 PR4055-200-M 74700451 419.71 • Flow @ 100 psig supply: 200 SCFM • Gauge ports: 1⁄4 NPT
• Maximum pressure: 400 psig • Temperature range: -20° to 180°F
Wall Mount Bracket 29077-M 74741059 19.92 • Supply pressure variation: less than ±0.35 psig for a supply variation of 100 psig High Flow
4018 CALL MSC TODAY 800-645-7270 FOR ALL YOUR INDUSTRIAL NEEDS
Page 175
SILICONE & TYGON TUBING
Medical Silicone Tubing
ID OD Wall Std. Coil Price/ ID OD Wall Std. Coil Price/ • Meets USP Class VI requirements • Reusable - will withstand repeated sterilization
(In.) (In.) Thick. (In.) L (Ft.) Order # Coil (In.) (In.) Thick. (In.) L (Ft.) Order # Coil • Manufactured under strict Good Manufacturing Practices
1⁄32 5⁄32 1⁄16
• Nonreactive to body tissues and fluids, can be used in peristaltic pumps
50 48461743 $88.50 1⁄4 3⁄8 1⁄16 50 48461867 $152.07 Applications:
1⁄16 1⁄8 1⁄32 50 48461784 75.66 1⁄4 7⁄16 3⁄32 25 48461875 121.46
1⁄16 3⁄16 1⁄16
• Surgical drains • I.V. administration • Blood and fluid handling
50 48461792 109.43 1⁄4 1⁄2 1⁄8 25 48461883 168.15 • Pharmaceuticals • Laboratory • Peristaltic pumps • Dialysis
1⁄8 1⁄4 1⁄16 50 48461826 111.05 5⁄16 7⁄16 1⁄16 25 48461891 91.30 Note: This product is not rated for pressure.
3⁄16 5⁄16 1⁄16 50 48461842 151.25 3⁄8 1⁄2 1⁄16 25 48461917 99.76 Use Braid Reinforced Medical tubing.
3⁄16 3⁄8 3⁄32 50 48461859 228.48 1⁄2 5⁄8 1⁄16 25 48461941 128.31 To avoid product contamination, sold in standard coil lengths only.
Thread Barb (In.) Coilhose Dixon Parker Amflo Aro Dynaquip Foster Hansen Milton Tru-Flate Thread Barb (In.) Coilhose Dixon Parker Amflo Aro Dynaquip Foster Hansen Milton Tru-Flate
1⁄2w Industrial 1⁄4w Lincoln
1⁄2 MPT 122 DC9 16 C9 23104-014 D581 5305 530 1816 13-704 1⁄4 FPT 170 DC28 B73 C28 LNCF22-000 LN3003 790 13-434
3⁄8 FPT 123 DC1023 17E C10-23 23104-003 D560 5005 500 1813 13-710 1⁄4 MPT 172 DC27 B72 C27 LNCM22-000 LN3103 794 13-424
3⁄8 ID Hose 127 DC1044 16-5B C10-44 23104-024 D562 5705 570 1⁄4 MPT 1701 DCP27 L2C CP27 LNPM22-000 LN10 791 12-424
1⁄2 ID Hose 128 DC1045 16-6B C10-45 23104-025 D582 5805 580 13-766 1⁄4 FPT 1702 DCP28 L3C CP28 LNPF22-000 LN11 792 12-434
1⁄2 MPT 1201 DCP17 H2F CP17 23904-410 P581 54-5 54 1857 12-752 1⁄4w Industrial
1⁄2 FPT 1202 DCP18 H3F CP19 23904-400 P580 55-5 55 1858 12-762 1⁄8 MPT 159 DC2101 B22A C21-01 23102-011 D321 2903 900 708
3⁄8 MPT 1203 DCP1703 H0F CP17-03 23904-310 P561 52-5 52 1859 1⁄4 FPT 150A DCB20 B33 C40 23102-200 DM340 FM3003 3000 755 13-755
3⁄8 FPT 1204 DCP1823 H1F CP18-23 23904-003 P560 53-5 53 1860 3⁄8 FPT 151A DCB2023 B33E 23102-003 DM360 FM3203 3200
3⁄8 ID Hose 1207 DCP1744 H4F CP17-44 23904-420 P562 59-5 59 1⁄4 MPT 152A DCB21 B32 C41 23102-212 DM341 FM3103 3100 756 13-756
1⁄2 ID Hose 1208 DCP1745 H5F CP17-45 23904-520 P582 60-5 60 12-760 1⁄4 ID Hose 153A DCB2042 B30-3B 23102-022 DM342 FM3603 3600
1⁄2 FPT 120A DCB10 B37 23104-400 DM580 FM5205 5200 3⁄8 MPT 155A DCB2103 B32E 23102-213 DM361 FM3303 3300
3⁄8 MPT 121A DCB903 B36E 23104-013 DM561 FM5105 5100 3⁄8 ID Hose 156A DCB2044 B30-5B 23102-024 DM362 FM3703 3700
1⁄2 MPT 122A DCB9 B36 23104-014 DM581 FM5305 5300 1⁄8 FPT 158A DCB2021 B33A 23102-001 DM320 FM2803 2800
3⁄8 FPT 123A DCB1023 B39F 23104-003 DM560 FM5005 5000 1⁄8 MPT 159A DCB2101 B33A 23102-011 DM321 FM2903 2900
1⁄2 ID Hose 128A DCB1045 B36-6B 23104-025 DM582 FM5805 5800 1⁄4 MPT 1501 DCP21 H2C CP21 23902-210 P341 10-3 10 727 12-224
1⁄4w Aro 1⁄4 FPT 1502 DCP20 H3C CP20 23902-200 P340 11-3 11 728 12-234
1⁄4 FPT 140 DC38 B53 C38 210 DM240 210-3003 20AS-25F 775 13-334 3⁄8 MPT 1503 DCP2103 H2C-E CP21-03 23902-310 P361 14-3 14 733 12-226
3⁄8 FPT 141 DC3823 B53E C38-23 210-203 210-3203 20AS-37F 1⁄8 MPT 1504 DCP2101 H0C CP21-01 23902-110 P321 12-3 12 726
1⁄4 MPT 142 DC37 B52 C37 210-012 210-3103 20AS-25M 776 13-324 3⁄8 FPT 1505 DCP2023 H3C-E CP20-23 23902-003 P360 15-3 15 732 12-236
1⁄4 ID Hose 143 DC3842 B50-3B C38-42 210-214 210-3606 20AS-25H 776-4 1⁄4 ID Hose 1506 DCP2142 H8C CP21-42 23902-220 P342 16-3 16 736 12-264
1⁄4 MPT 1401 DCP37 A2C CP37 2608 P241 210-10 20AP-25M 777 12-324 3⁄8 ID Hose 1508 DCP2144 H9C CP21-44 23902-420 P362 17-3 17 736-6 12-266
1⁄2 FPT 1402 DCP38 A3C CP38 2609 P240 210-11 20AP-25F 778 12-334 1⁄8 FPT 1509 DCP2021 H1C CP20-21 23902-100 P320 13-3 13 729
3⁄8 MPT 1403 DCP3703 A2C-E CP37-03 22236 20AP-37M
3⁄8 FPT 1405 DCP3823 A3C-E CP38-23 22237 20AP-37F
1⁄4 ID Hose 1406 DCP3742 A8C CP37-42 210-214 210-16 20AP-25H 777-4
1⁄4w Industrial 1⁄4w Automotive Tru-Flate
1⁄4 FPT 150 DC20 B23 C20 23102-200 D340 3003 1000 715 13-234 1⁄4 FPT 160 DC B13 C2 TFCF22-000 TF3003 10AS-25F 785 13-134
3⁄8 FPT 151 DC2023 B23E C20-23 23102-003 D360 3203 1200 718 13-254 3⁄8 FPT 161 DC223 B13E C2-23 TFCF23-000 TF3203 10AS-37F 788
1⁄4 MPT 152 DC21 B22 C21 23102-212 D341 3103 1100 716 13-224 1⁄4 MPT 162 DC1 B12 C1 TFCM22-000 TF3103 10AS-25M 786 13-124
1⁄4 ID Hose 153 DC2042 B20-3B C20-42 23102-022 D342 3603 1600 717 13-264 1⁄4 ID Hose 163 DC242 B10-3B C2-42 TFCH22-000 TF3603 10AS-25H 786-4 13-164
3⁄8 MPT 155 DC2103 B22E C21-03 23102-213 D361 3303 1300 719 13-244 3⁄8 MPT 165 DC103 B12E C1-03 TFCM23-000 TF3303 10AS-37M 789
3⁄8 ID Hose 156 DC2044 B20-5B C20-44 23102-024 D362 3703 1700 717-6 13-266 3⁄8 ID Hose 166 DC244 B10-5B C2-44 TFCH23-000 TF3703 10AS-37H 786-6
1⁄8 FPT 158 DC2021 B23A C20-21 23102-001 D320 2803 800 707 1⁄4 MPT 1601 DCP1 2C CP1 TFPM22-000 TF10 10AP-25M 783 12-124
3⁄8w Industrial 1⁄4 FPT 1602 DCP2 3C CP2 TFPF22-000 TF11 10AP-25F 784 12-134
1⁄2 FPT 584A DCB2624 B35F 23103-004 DM480 FM4404 4400 3⁄8 MPT 1603 DCP103 2C-E CP1-03 TFPM23-000 TF14 10AP-37M
3⁄8 ID Hose 586A DCB2644 B34-5B 23103-024 DM462 FM4804 4600 3⁄8 FPT 1605 DCP223 3C-E CP1-43 TFPF23-000 TF15 10AP-37F
1⁄2 MPT 587A DCB2504 B34F 23103-014 DM481 FM4504 4500 1⁄4 ID Hose 1606 DCP142 8C CP1-42 TFPH22-000 TF16 10AP-25H 783-4 13-164
1⁄2 ID Hose 588A DCB2645 B34-6B 23103-025 DM482 FM4904 4800 3⁄8 ID Hose 1608 DCP144 9C CP1-44 TFPH23-000 TF17 10AP-37H 783-6
3⁄8 MPT 5801 DCP25 H2E CP25 23903-310 P461 42-4 42 1837 13-526
3⁄8 FPT 5802 DCP26 H3E CP26 23903-300 P460 43-4 43 1838 13-536
1⁄4 MPT 5803 DCP2502 H0E CP25-02 23903-210 P441 40-4 40 1839
1⁄4 FPT 5804 DCP2622 H1E CP26-22 23903-200 P440 41-4 41 1840 3⁄8w Industrial
1⁄2 FPT 5805 DCP2624 H3E-F CP26-24 23903-004 P480 45-4 45 3⁄8 FPT 580 DC26 25 C26 23103-300 D460 4204 420 1835 13-536
3⁄8 ID Hose 5806 DCP2544 H5E CP25-44 23903-420 P462 48-4 406 1837-6 3⁄8 MPT 581 DC25 24 C25 23103-313 D461 4304 430 1836 13-526
1⁄2 ID Hose 5808 DCP2545 H6E CP25-45 23903-520 P482 49-4 408 1⁄4 FPT 582 DC2622 25C C26-22 23103-002 D440 4004 400 1833
1⁄2 MPT 5809 DCP2504 H2E-F CP25-04 23903-410 P481 44-4 44 1⁄4 MPT 583 DC2502 24C C25-02 23103-012 D441 4104 410 1839
3⁄8w Automotive/Tru-Flate 1⁄2 FPT 584 DC2624 25F C26-24 23103-004 D480 4404 440
3⁄8 FPT 590 DC6 15 C6 TF4204 1805 13-612 3⁄8 ID Hose 586 DC2644 24-5B C26-44 23103-024 D462 4804 4006 1837-6
3⁄8 MPT 591 DC5 14 C5 TF4304 1806 13-604 1⁄2 MPT 587 DC2504 24F C25-04 23103-014 D481 4504 450
1⁄4 FPT 592 DC8 15C C6-22 TF4004 1803 13-610 1⁄2 ID Hose 588 DC2645 24-6B C26-45 23103-025 D482 4904 4008
1⁄4 MPT 593 DC7 14C C5-02 TF4104 1804 13-602 3⁄8 FPT 580A DCB26 B35 23103-300 DM460 FM4204 4200
3⁄8 ID Hose 598 DC644 14-5B CP5-44 TF4804 1806-6 13-666 3⁄8 MPT 581A DCB25 B34 23103-313 DM461 FM4304 4300
3⁄8 MPT 5901 DCP5 2E CP5 TF42 1807 12-604 1⁄4 FPT 582A DCB2622 B35C 23103-002 DM440 FM4004 4000
3⁄8 FPT 5902 DCP6 3E CP6 TF43 1808 12-612 1⁄4 MPT 583A DCB2502 B34C 23103-012 DM441 FM4104 4100
1⁄4 MPT 5903 DCP7 0E CP5-02 TF40 1809 12-602
1⁄4 FPT 5904 DCP8 1E CP6-22 TF41 1810 12-610 Page
3⁄8 ID Hose 5906 DCP544 5E CP5-44 TF48 1807-6
Page 178 4149
Panel Filters/Cleanroom HEPA – Particle Board HEPA - Galvaneal V-Bank Mini Pleat
• Hospitals • Hospitals • Hospitals • Hospitals
• Pharmaceutical • Pharmaceutical • Pharmaceutical • Pharmaceutical
• Research • Research • Research • Research
Bag Filters Rigid Pleat Filters Grease/Metal Filters Gas Phase Absorbers
• Buildings • Hospitals • Food Processing • Food Processing
• Pharmaceutical • Pharmaceutical • Residential • Hospitals
• Research • Research • Research • Pharmaceutical
Pleated Air Filters - MERV 11 Hi-Efficiency Pleated Pleated Air Filters – MERV 8 Lysol Pleated Filters
• Hospitals • Hospitals • Schools • Office
• Pharmaceutical • Pharmaceutical • Pharmaceutical • Residential
• Research • Research • Research • Research
2 & 3 Ply Links Polyester Air Filter Media Polyester Air Filter Rolls Fiberglass Air filter
• Automotive/Paint Booth • Hospitals • Hospitals • General Purpose
• Hospitals • Pharmaceutical • Pharmaceutical • Office
• Pharmaceutical • Research • Research • Government
4166 CALL MSC TODAY 800-645-7270 FOR ALL YOUR INDUSTRIAL NEEDS
Page 179
AIR FILTERS TECHNICAL INFORMATION
Glossary of Terms
ASHRAE:
American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers
DOP:
Dioctiphthalate (diethylhexylohosphate), an oily liquid used in an aerosol form as a challenge for efficiency and leak testing HEPA filters.
HEPA:
High Efficiency Particulate, Air (filter)
Micron:
One millionth of a meter. A micron is more correctly known as a micrometer.
Pressure Drop:
The resistance of a device to the flow of a fluid through it. The pressure drop of a filter is a measure of its resistance to airflow through it.
Resistance is measured in inches w.g. in the Inch-Pound system of measurement. It is measured in Pascals in the SI system.
Resistance:
See Pressure Drop
ULPA:
Ultra Low Penetration, Air (filters). Filters in this category typically have efficiencies of 99.999% on a 0.3 micron DOP particles.
Compiled and averaged from manufacturer’s data. Efficiency per ASHRAE Standards 52 Test methods. Curves and approximations only for
general guidance. Values from them must not be used to specify air filters, since a generally recognized test standard does not exist. Graphs
from Equipment Handbook, Air Cleaners for Particulate Contaminants. Reprinted by permission of the American Society of Heating,
Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers.
MERV14 - 90-95% Efficiency : V-Bank Mini-Pleat Filters, Synthetic Rigid Pleat, Filters, Steel Rigid Box Filters, Mini Pleat Filters, Bag Filters
MERV13 - 80-85% Efficiency : V-Bank Mini-Pleat Filters, Synthetic Rigid Pleat Filters, Steel Rigid Box Filters, Mini Pleat Filters, Bag Filters
MERV11 - 60-65% Efficiency : V-Bank Mini-Pleat Filters, Synthetic Rigid Pleat Filters, Steel Rigid Box Filters, Mini Pleat Filters, Bag Filters,
High Efficiency Pleated Air Filters
MERV10 - 50-55% Efficiency : Bag Filters
4210 CALL MSC TODAY 800-645-7270 FOR ALL YOUR INDUSTRIAL NEEDS
PLUMBING SPECIALTIES & O-RINGS TECHNICAL INFORMATION
Foam Tape, Cork Tape, Sealing Gum & Sealing Cords
Foam Insulation Tape - Lower cost alternative and is excellent for wrapping pipes
and fittings. It can be used on hot pipes up to 160°F to insulate against heat loss,
or on cold pipes down to -40°F to insulate against heat gain and to stop dripping
caused by condensation forming on the pipes.
• Prevents condensation drip on pipes and tubing
• Black elastomeric nitrile colored cell foam • Convenient 2w X 30v roll Foam Insulation Tape Cork Insulation Tape Permagum Slugs Permagum Cords
Sealing Gum Slugs & Sealing Gum Cords - Nonhardening, water-resistant compound specifically formulated to
Cork Insulation Tape - Synthetic rubber and cork compound designed to exclude moisture, dust and dirt from joints, seams and openings in a wide range of applications. Permagum is
prevent condensation on piping and tubing as well as unit applications such pliable and can be easily manipulated to take on virtually any form. Available in ready to use bulk slugs or
as the outside surfaces of drain pans. extruded cords.
• Prevents condensation on pipes and tubing • Adheres to most clean surfaces allowing for use with a variety of materials • Seals out moisture, dust and dirt
• Soft and pliable enough to wrap around fittings and connections • Resistant to water, water vapor, temperature, alcohol and mild acids or caustics • Off-white color
• Service temperature of -20°F to 158°F • Convenient 2w X 30v roll • Excellent adhesion to wood, metal, plastics, glass as well as many other surfaces • Nonstaining/nondrying
Tapes Sealing Gums
Type W (In.) L (Ft.) Thick. (In.) Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea. Trade Name Type Mfr’s # Order # Price Ea.
Foam Insulation Tape 2 30 1⁄8 K502 80217409 $8.63 Permagum® Sealing Gum Slugs PP22 80217250 $8.54
Cork Insulation Tape 2 30 1⁄8 PT1 84933902 11.97 Presstite®Permagum® Sealing Gum Cords PP33 78640877 9.10
Basics of...O-Rings
• O-rings are used for sealing in applications from high vacuum to high pressure
• Used for sealing flanges, valves, faucets, compressors, engines, and boss tube fittings, O-rings are designated by an AS568A Dash Number
• The AS568A Dash Numbers are assigned as an Aerospace Standard and are determined by the Society of Automotive Engineers
• AS568A Dash Numbers are determined by the ID and OD of the O-ring • Metric O-rings are sized by measuring the cross-section, or width and the ID
The following chart will help determine the AS568A Dash Number and the O-ring material required for your application.
Size Guide
AS568A Dash No. ID x OD AS568A Dash No. ID x OD AS568A Dash No. ID x OD AS568A Dash No. ID x OD AS568A Dash No. ID x OD
1⁄32w Cross Section 1⁄16w Cross Section 3⁄32w Cross Section 1⁄8w Cross Section 1⁄8w Cross Section
001 1⁄32 x 3⁄32 032 17⁄8 x 2w 123 13⁄16 x 13⁄8w 204 3⁄8 x 5⁄8w 239 35⁄8 x 37⁄8w
3⁄64w Cross Section 033 2 x 21⁄8 124 11⁄4 x 17⁄16 206 1⁄2 x 3⁄4 240 33⁄4 x 4
002 3⁄64 x 9⁄64 034 21⁄8 x 21⁄4 125 15⁄16 x 11⁄2 207 9⁄16 x 13⁄16 242 4 x 41⁄4
1⁄16w Cross Section 035 21⁄4 x 23⁄8 126 13⁄8 x 19⁄16 208 5⁄8 x 7⁄8 243 41⁄8 x 43⁄8
003 1⁄16 x 3⁄16 036 23⁄8 x 21⁄2 127 17⁄16 x 15⁄8 210 3⁄4 x1 246 41⁄2 x 43⁄4
004 5⁄64 x 13⁄64 037 21⁄2 x 25⁄8 128 11⁄2 x 111⁄16 211 13⁄16 x 11⁄16 250 5 x 51⁄4
005 7⁄64 x 15⁄64 038 25⁄8 x 23⁄4 129 19⁄16 x 13⁄4 212 7⁄8 x 11⁄8 264 71⁄2 x 73⁄4
006 1⁄8 x 1⁄4 039 23⁄4 x 27⁄8 130 15⁄8 x 113⁄16 213 15⁄16 x 13⁄16 3⁄16w Cross Section
007 5⁄32 x 9⁄32 040 27⁄8 x 3 131 111⁄16 x 17⁄8 214 1 x 11⁄4 312 5⁄8 x 1
008 3⁄16 x 5⁄16 041 3 x 31⁄8 132 13⁄4 x 115⁄16 215 11⁄16 x 15⁄16 320 11⁄8 x 11⁄2
009 7⁄32 x 11⁄32 042 31⁄4 x 33⁄8 133 113⁄16 x 2 216 11⁄8 x 13⁄8 322 1 ⁄4 x 15⁄8
1
010 1⁄4 x 3⁄8 043 31⁄2 x 35⁄8 134 17⁄8 x 21⁄16 217 13⁄16 x 17⁄16 324 13⁄8 x 13⁄4
011 5⁄16 x 7⁄16 044 33⁄4 x 37⁄8 135 115⁄16 x 21⁄8 218 11⁄4 x 11⁄2 325 11⁄2 x 17⁄8
012 3⁄8 x 1⁄2 045 4 x 41⁄8 136 2 x 23⁄16 219 15⁄16 x 19⁄16 326 15⁄8 x 2
013 7⁄16 x 9⁄16 046 41⁄4 x 43⁄8 137 21⁄16 x 21⁄4 220 13⁄8 x 15⁄8 327 13⁄4 x 21⁄8
014 1⁄2 x 5⁄8 3⁄32w Cross Section 138 21⁄8 x 25⁄16 221 17⁄16 x 111⁄16 328 17⁄8 x 21⁄4
015 9⁄16 x 11⁄16 105 5⁄32 x 11⁄32 139 23⁄16 x 23⁄8 222 11⁄2 x 13⁄4 329 2 x 23⁄8
016 5⁄8 x 3⁄4 106 3⁄16 x 3⁄8 140 21⁄4 x 27⁄16 223 15⁄8 x 17⁄8 330 21⁄8 x 21⁄2
017 11⁄16 x 13⁄16 108 1⁄4
x 7⁄16 141 25⁄16 x 21⁄2 224 13⁄4 x 2 331 21⁄4 x 25⁄8
018 3⁄4 x 7⁄8 109 5⁄16
x 1⁄2 142 23⁄8 x 29⁄16 225 17⁄8 x 21⁄8 332 23⁄8 x 23⁄4
019 13⁄16 x 15⁄16 110 3⁄8 x 9⁄16 143 27⁄16 x 25⁄8 226 2 x 21⁄4 333 21⁄2 x 27⁄8
020 7⁄8 x 1 111 7⁄16 x 5⁄8 144 21⁄2 x 211⁄16 227 21⁄8 x 23⁄8 334 25⁄8 x 3
021 15⁄16 x 11⁄16 112 1⁄2 x 11⁄16 145 29⁄16 x 23⁄4 228 21⁄4 x 21⁄2 335 23⁄4 x 31⁄8
022 1 x 11⁄8 113 9⁄16 x 3⁄4 146 25⁄8 x 213⁄16 229 23⁄8 x 25⁄8 336 27⁄8 x 31⁄4
023 11⁄16 x 13⁄16 114 5⁄8 x 13⁄16 147 211⁄16 x 27⁄8 230 21⁄2 x 23⁄4 337 3 x 33⁄8
024 11⁄8 x 11⁄4 115 11⁄16 x 7⁄8 148 23⁄4 x 215⁄16 231 25⁄8 x 27⁄8 338 31⁄8 x 31⁄2
025 13⁄16 x 15⁄16 116 3⁄4 x 15⁄16 149 213⁄16 x 3 232 23⁄4 x 3 339 31⁄4 x 35⁄8
026 11⁄4 x 13⁄8 117 13⁄16 x 1 150 27⁄8 x 31⁄16 233 27⁄8 x 31⁄8 340 33⁄8 x 33⁄4
027 15⁄16 x 17⁄16 118 7⁄8 x 11⁄16 151 3 x 33⁄16 234 3 x 31⁄4 343 33⁄4 x 41⁄8
028 13⁄8 x 11⁄2 119 15⁄16 x 11⁄8 152 31⁄4 x 37⁄16 235 31⁄8 x 33⁄8 345 4 x 43⁄8
029 11⁄2 x 15⁄8 120 1 x 13⁄16 153 31⁄2 x 311⁄16 236 31⁄4 x 31⁄2 346 41⁄8 x 41⁄2
030 15⁄8 x 13⁄4 121 11⁄16 x 11⁄4 155 4 x 43⁄16 237 33⁄8 x 35⁄8
031 13⁄4 x 17⁄8 122 11⁄8 x 15⁄16 168 71⁄4 x 77⁄16 238 31⁄2 x 33⁄4
Application Guide
Buna-N Viton Silicone EPDM Teflon Neoprene Polyurethane Kalrez®
Temperature Range -65 to 275°F -31 to 400°F -65 to 450°F -65 to 300°F -300 to 500°F -40 to 212°F -60 to 200°F 0 to 500°F
Compression Set GD GD GD GD PR GD GD EX
Resistance to:
Tearing GD GD PR FR GD GD EX GD
Abrasion EX GD PR GD PR EX EX GD
Ozone PR EX EX EX EX EX EX EX
Weather PR EX EX EX EX EX EX EX
Cold Water EX FR GD EX EX FR FR GD NR= Not Recommended;
Hot Water GD PR GD EX EX (To 212° F) FR PR NR PR= Poor;
Steam PR PR PR GD EX PR PR NR FR= Fair;
Dilute Acid GD EX GD GD EX GD PR EX GD= Good;
Concentrated Acid GD EX FR GD EX GD PR EX EX= Excellent
Dilute Alkalies GD EX EX EX EX GD PR EX
Concentrated Alkalies GD EX EX EX EX GD PR EX
Synthetic Lubricants (silicone grease) GD EX NR GD EX PR PE EX
High Aniline Lubricants (ASTM oil # 1) EX EX GD NR EX EX GD EX
Low Aniline Lubricants (ASTM oil # 3) EX EX FR NR EX GD FR EX
Vegetable/Animal Oil GD EX EX EX EX FR EX EX
Aliphatic Hydrocarbons (Fuel Oil A) EX EX NR NR EX FR GD EX
Aromatic Hydrocarbons (Fuel Oil C or Toluene) PR EX NR NR EX PR FR EX
4274 CALL MSC TODAY 800-645-7270 FOR ALL YOUR INDUSTRIAL NEEDS
Page 182
MECHANICAL PUMP SEALS TECHNICAL INFORMATION
MSC Pump AMT Pump Std. Seal Optional Viton Seal MSC Pump AMT Pump Std. Seal Optional Viton Seal MSC Pump AMT Pump Std. Seal Optional Viton Seal
Order # Model # Order # Upgrade Order # Order # Model # Order # Upgrade Order # Order # Model # Order # Upgrade Order #
09273087 3161-95 09381294 09381351 09274580 3701-95 09381211 09381229 09275629 4895-97 09381252 09381260
09273186 4222-95 09381294 09381351 09274606 3703-95 09381211 09381229 09275645 4896-97 09381252 09381260
09273202 4223-95 09381294 09381351 09274622 3700-95 09381211 09381229 09275660 4890-97 09381252 09381260
09273228 3824-99 09381306 09381369 09274648 3702-95 09381211 09381229 09275686 4891-97 09381252 09381260
09273244 3825-99 09381306 09381369 09274663 3691-95 09381211 09381229 09275702 4902-97 09381252 09381260
09273285 3160-95 09381294 09381351 09274689 3693-95 09381211 09381229 09275728 4903-97 09381252 09381260
09273301 3162-95 09381294 09381351 09274705 3690-95 09381211 09381229 09275744 4904-97 09381252 09381260
1
09273327 3163-95 09381310 09274721 3692-95 09381211 09381229 09275769 4905-97 09381252 09381260
1
09273343 3930-95 09381310 09274747 3682-95 09381237 09381245 09275785 4900-97 09381252 09381260
09273400 3160-99 09381294 09381351 09274762 3704-95 09381237 09381245 06275801 4901-97 09381252 09381260
09273467 3390-96 09381377 09381393 09274788 3694-95 09381237 09381245 09275827 4897-97 09381252 09381260
2
09273509 3390-99 09381377 09381393 09274804 3680-97 09381229 09275843 4906-97 09381252 09381260
1 2 2
09273525 3941-96 09381385 09274820 3701-97 09381229 09275868 4893-98 09381260
1 2 2
09273541 3100-96 09381385 09274846 3703-97 09381229 09575884 4894-98 09381260
1 2 2
09273582 3100-99 09381385 09274861 3700-97 09381229 09275900 4895-98 09381260
2 2
09273624 4210-96 09381377 09381393 09274887 3702-97 09381229 09275926 4896-98 09381260
1 2 2
09273665 3993-96 09381385 09274903 3691-97 09381229 09275942 4890-98 09381260
2 2
09273806 2851-95 09381211 09381229 09274929 3693-97 09381229 09275967 4891-98 09381260
2 2
09273822 2852-95 09381211 09381229 09274945 3690-97 09381229 09275983 4902-98 09381260
2 2
09273848 2853-95 09381211 09381229 09274960 3692-97 09381229 09276007 4903-98 09381260
2 2
09273863 2855-95 09381211 09381229 09274986 3682-97 09381245 09276023 4904-98 09381260
2 2
09273889 2856-95 09381211 09381229 09275009 3704-97 09381245 09276049 4905-98 09381260
2 2
09273905 2857-95 09381211 09381229 09275025 3694-97 09381245 09276064 4900-98 09381260
2 2
09273921 2850-99 09381211 09381229 09275041 3680-98 09381229 09276080 4901-98 09381260
2 2 2
09273962 4294-98 09381229 09275066 3701-98 09381229 09276106 4897-98 09381260
2 2 2
09273988 4295-98 09381229 09275082 3703-98 09381229 09276122 4906-98 09381260
2 2
09274002 4296-98 09381229 09275108 3700-98 09381229 09276163 3150-95 09381377 09381393
2 2
09274028 4297-98 09381229 09275124 3702-98 09381229 09276205 3151-95 09381377 09381393
2 2
09274044 4298-98 09381229 09275140 3691-98 09381229 09276247 3152-95 09381377 09381393
2
09274101 2827-95 09381211 09381229 09275165 3693-98 09381229 09276262 3152-94 09381377 09381393
2
09274127 2825-95 09381211 09381229 09275181 3690-98 09381229 09276288 4241-95 09381377 09381393
2
09274143 2821-95 09381211 09381229 09275207 3692-98 09381229 09276304 4251-95 09381377 09381393
2
09274168 2828-95 09381211 09381229 09275223 3682-98 09381245 09276320 4252-95 09381377 09381393
2
09274184 2762-95 09381211 09381229 09275249 3704-98 09381245 09276346 4260-95 09381377 09381393
2
09274200 2761-95 09381211 09381229 09275264 3694-98 09381245 09276361 4261-95 09381377 09381393
1
09274226 2822-95 09381211 09381229 09275306 4893-95 09381252 09381260 09277328 4850-97 09381203
1
09274242 2763-95 09381211 09381229 09275622 4894-95 09381252 09381260 09277344 4860-97 09381203
1
09274267 2874-95 09381377 09381393 09275348 4895-95 09381252 09381260 09277369 3670-94 09381237
1
09274283 2875-95 09381377 09381393 09275363 4896-95 09381252 09381260 09277385 3201-96 09381278
09274309 2876-95 09381377 09381393 09275389 4890-95 09381252 09381260 09277401 4292-96 09381211 09381229
2
09274325 2820-99 09381211 09381229 09275405 4891-95 09381252 09381260 09277740 3890-97 09381332
2
09274341 2760-99 09381294 09381351 09275421 4902-95 09381252 09381260 09277765 3891-97 09381332
2
09274382 3790-95 09381211 09381229 09275447 4903-95 09381252 09381260 09277781 3892-97 09381332
2
09274408 3791-95 09381211 09381229 09275462 4904-95 09381252 09381260 09277807 3893-97 09381332
2
09274424 3792-95 09381211 09381229 09275488 4905-95 09381252 09381260 09277823 3894-97 09381332
2
09274440 3793-95 09381211 09381229 09275504 4900-95 09381252 09381260 09277849 3890-98 09381344
1 2
09274465 4780-95 09381328 09275520 4901-95 09381252 09381260 09277864 3891-98 09381344
1 2
09274481 4782-95 09381328 09275546 4897-95 09381252 09381260 09277880 3892-98 09381344
2
09274507 3655-95 09381377 09381393 09275561 4906-95 09381252 09381260 09277906 3893-98 09381344
2
09274523 3656-95 09381377 09381393 09275587 4893-97 09381252 09381260 09277922 3894-98 09381344
09274564 3680-95 09381211 09381229 09275603 4894-97 09381252 09381260
1
Viton upgrade not available 2Viton seal standard; upgrade not required
4330 CALL MSC TODAY 800-645-7270 FOR ALL YOUR INDUSTRIAL NEEDS
DIMENSIONS OF COUNTERBORING/COUNTERSINKING
FOR SOCKET HEAD CAP SCREWS
Counter Bore Counter Sink
Counterbore Socket Head Cap Screw Countersink Socket Head Cap Screw
Nominal Clearance Clearance Nominal Clearance Clearance Clearance Diameter of Clearance Diameter of
Thread For Thread For Head Depth Thread For Thread For Head Depth For Thread Countersink For Thread Countersink
Size ‘C’ ‘D’ ‘H’ Size ‘C’ ‘D’ ‘H’ ‘C’ ‘D’ ‘C’ ‘D’
INCH METRIC INCH METRIC
No. 4 #29 7/32ʺ 0.125ʺ M3 3.4 6.0 3.4 #29 0.255ʺ 3.4 6.7
No. 5 #23 1/4ʺ 0.140ʺ M4 4.5 8.0 4.6 #23 0.281ʺ 4.5 9.0
No. 6 #18 9/32ʺ 0.160ʺ M5 5.5 10.0 5.7 #18 0.307ʺ 5.5 11.2
No. 8 #10 5/16ʺ 0.185ʺ M6 6.6 11.0 6.8 #10 0.359ʺ 6.6 13.4
No. 10 #2 3/8ʺ 0.215ʺ M8 9.0 15.0 9.0 #2 0.411ʺ 9.0 17.9
1/4ʺ 9/32ʺ 7/16ʺ 0.280ʺ M10 11.0 18.0 11.0 9/32ʺ 0.531ʺ 11.0 22.4
5/16ʺ 11/32ʺ 17/32ʺ 0.350ʺ M12 14.0 20.0 13.0 11/32ʺ 0.656ʺ 14.0 26.9
3/8ʺ 13/32ʺ 5/8ʺ 0.415ʺ M14 16.0 23.0 15.2 13/32ʺ 0.781ʺ 16.0 30.3
7/16ʺ 15/32ʺ 23/32ʺ 0.475ʺ M16 18.0 26.0 17.5 15/32ʺ 0.844ʺ 18.0 33.6
1/2ʺ 17/32ʺ 13/16ʺ 0.540ʺ M18 20.0 29.0 19.5 17/32ʺ 0.938ʺ 20.0 37.0
5/8ʺ 21/32ʺ 1ʺ 0.675ʺ M20 22.0 32.0 21.5 21/32ʺ 1.188ʺ 22.0 40.3
3/4ʺ 25/32ʺ 1 3/16ʺ 0.810ʺ M22 24.0 35.0 23.5 25/32ʺ 1.438ʺ — —
7/8ʺ 29/32ʺ 1 3/8ʺ 0.930ʺ M24 26.0 40.0 25.5 — — — —
1ʺ 1 1/32ʺ 1 5/8ʺ 1.050ʺ M27 30.0 43.0 29.0 — — — —
1 1/4ʺ 1 5/16ʺ 2ʺ 1.310ʺ M30 33.0 48.0 32.0 — — — —
Reprinted with permission from the Engineers Black Book—USA Edition. Published by Pat Rapp Enterprises. All rights reserved. Specifications: 168pp. illus. full color, pocket sized 6 1/2ʺ x 4ʺ, every page
laminated (grease proof), lay flat spiral bound. Metal drill point sharpening gage included in every book. For additional technical information, check out the Engineers Black Book, Order# 82714122 located in
section 8. The information on this page is intended as a general guide and is for reference only.
Page 184
SURFACE COATINGS
Physical Vapor Deposition (PVD) Chromium Nitride (CrN)
A low-temperature process that produces very tough coatings with This is a PVD coating and is particularly suitable in non-ferrous
high lubricity for use on gummy materials, high temperature alloys, applications where titanium based coatings are not successful. It has a
low-carbon steels, and stainless steels at low to medium speeds. surface hardness of approximately 80 Rc and has good corrosion and
oxidation resistance. It is mainly used for machining Copper,
Chemical Vapor Deposition (CVD) Die-casting, Brass forgings.
A high-temperature process that produces highly crater resistant
coatings with a good balance of toughness and wear resistance for use Diamond Coating
on a broad range of carbon and stainless steels at medium to high It is an amorphous diamond coating with extremely low coefficient of
speeds. friction and high hardness. This coating is specially recommended for
tapping Aluminum alloys with high Silicon content.
Medium Temperature Chemical Vapor
Deposition (MTCVD) Hard-Chromium Plating
This is a medium-temperature process that produces tougher, slightly The tool is plated with Chromium to improve wear characteristics and
less wear-resistant coatings than the traditional CVD process and is reduce sliding resistance and cutting forces. It is especially suitable
recommended for use on gummy materials, ductile irons and high when tapping Structural grade steels, Copper, Brass, etc.
temperature alloys at medium speeds.
Nitriding
Blackening Nitriding is a process which is used to increase the hardness and wear
Blackening is a finishing operation that chemically coats the surface of resistance of the surface of a tool. It is particularly suitable for taps that
ferrous metals. Besides enhancing the appearance of the components, are used on abrasive materials such as castings, bakelite, etc.
the black deposit holds a sealant, usually oil, into the pores of the
black oxide coating, where it is held in close contact with the metal Steam Tempering
and prevents corrosion. There are three types of blackening: Steam tempering reduces sliding resistance, thus preventing cold
1. Copper/Selenium Blackening—This process uses a room welding, which occurs, for example, during the machining of steels that
temperature acid bath to form a black copper selenium coating in have a low carbon content. Steam tempered tools are mainly used for
approximately 1-3 minutes. machining of ferrous materials.
2. Caustic Black Oxiding—A caustic soda bath operating at
about 140°C produces a black coating on the surface of the ferrous Titanium Aluminum Nitride (TiAIN)
metal. This coating is applied by the PVD process and has a higher hardness
3. Black Dyed Oxylate Coating—It provides a high quality black than TiN and TiCN. A very thin film of Al2O3 (Aluminum Oxide) is formed
corrosion resistant coating on ferrous metals without using heated on the surface of the TiAIN, which greatly increases the service life of
chemicals. A grey ferrous oxylate coating is applied to the steel and it the tool, which can withstand higher temperatures especially when
is then dyed black. This process operates at room temperature. machining Cast Iron and tough steels.
The performance of any black coating is gauged by its porosity and
ability to absorb a subsequent coating of oil which acts as a rust Titanium Carbonitride –TiCNite (TiCN)
barrier. It is extensively used to coat Tungsten Carbide tool holders,
TiCNite coated tools have a very high surface hardness of
Boring bars and Milling cutters to enhance appearance of the tool.
approximately 90 Rc. TiCN is harder than other coating materials,
hence cutting speeds similar to carbide tools can be achieved with the
Blue Finish toughness of high-speed steel. This coating is recommended for use
Blue Finish is a thin layer of Iron Oxide produced by a carefully in all steels, cast iron and aluminum.
controlled steam tempering process. This produces a very thin oxide
layer which acts as a lubricant and anti-weld surface. It also increases Titanium Nitride – TiNite (TiN)
resistance to corrosion and enables the surface of a tool to absorb
A gold colored film of Titanium Nitride with a hardness of approximately
lubricant in machining operations.
85 Rc is deposited on the tool, which extends tool life by reducing
friction and enables the tool to be operated at higher speeds and
Bronze Finish feeds. It is suitable for machining iron-based materials, die-casting and
The Bronze Finish is a thin oxide layer formed on the tool surface and plastic mold tooling. Other applications include wear parts, medical and
is applied on High Speed Cobalt Steels. dental instruments, slitting knives, plastic die molds, carbide tools, and
high performance forming tools.
Chromium Carbide (CrC)
A super hard coating > HRC 80 is applied to the surface using PVD Zirconium Nitride (ZrN)
coating process. The hardness of the coating is the same as TiN but It is a ceramic coating applied by the PVD process. Especially
with an oxidation resistance that is 20 to 30% higher. Recommended recommended for tapping Aluminum and Aluminum alloys.
for machining Titanium and Aluminum alloys.
Reprinted with permission from the Engineers Black Book—USA Edition. Published by Pat Rapp Enterprises. All rights reserved.
Specifications: 168pp. illus. full color, pocket sized 6 1/2ʺ x 4ʺ, every page laminated (grease proof), lay flat spiral bound. Metal drill
point sharpening gage included in every book. For additional technical information, check out the Engineers Black Book, Order#
82714122 located in section 8. The information on this page is intended as 185
Page a general guide and is for reference only.
QUICK VISUAL IDENTIFICATION
OF CARBIDE INSERT SHAPES
This chart contains a list of some
Common–Turning / Milling Inserts of the common basic shapes of
Carbide Inserts that may be found
in most engineering workshops. It
is by no means a comprehensive
list and is provided as a starting
point for insert identification.
NOTE: Chipbreaker shapes and
designs vary considerably between
manufacturers.
Standard 0.1mm
0.2mm
.0039
.0079
41
40
.0960
.0980
15/64
6mm
.2344
.2362
33/64
17/32
.5156
.5313
Thread Form
Tap & Drill 0.3mm
80
.0118
.0135
2.5mm
39
.0984
.0995
B
C
.2380
.2420
13.5mm
35/64
.5315
.5469
Tap & Drill
Approx. 75% Thread Approx. 65% Thread
79 .0145 38 .1015 D .2460 14mm .5512
0-80 3/64 1/64 .0156 37 .1040 1/4 & E .2500 9/16 .5625 0-80 54
1-64 53 0.4mm .0157 36 .1065 6.5mm .2559 14.5mm .5709 1-64 1.65mm
1-72 53 78 .0160 7/64 .1094 F .2570 37/64 .5781 1-72 1.7mm
2-56 50 77 .0180 35 .1100 G .2610 15mm .5906 2-56 5/64
2-64 50 0.5mm .0197 34 .1110 17/64 .2656 19/32 .5938 2-64 2mm
3-48 47 76 .0200 33 .1130 H .2660 39/64 .6094 3-48 43
3-56 46 75 .0210 32 .1160 I .2720 15.5mm .6102 3-56 2.3mm
4-40 43 74 .0225 3mm .1181 7mm .2756 5/8 .6250 4-40 39
4-48 42 0.6mm .0236 31 .1200 J .2770 16mm .6299 4-48 2.6mm
5-40 39 73 .0240 1/8 .1250 K .2810 41/64 .6406 5-40 33
5-44 38 72 .0250 30 .1285 9/32 .2812 16.5mm .6496 5-44 2.9mm
6-32 36 71 .0260 29 .1360 L .2900 21/32 .6562 6-32 1/8
6-40 33 0.7mm .0276 3.5mm .1378 M .2950 17mm .6693 6-40 3.2mm
8-32 29 70 .0280 28 .1405 7.5mm .2953 43/64 .6719 8-32 25
8-36 29 69 .0292 9/64 .1406 19/64 .2969 11/16 .6875 8-36 24
10-24 25 68 .0310 27 .1440 N .3020 17.5mm .6890 10-24 11/64
10-32 21 45/64 .7031 10-32 16
1/32 .0312 26 .1470 5/16 .3125
12-24 17 12-24 5mm
0.8mm .0315 25 .1495 8mm .3150 18mm .7087
12-28 15 12-28 8
1/4-20 7 67 .0320 24 .1520 O .3160 23/32 .7188 1/4-20 1
1/4-28 3 66 .0330 23 .1540 P .3230 18.5mm 7283 1/4-28 A
5/16-18 F 65 .0350 5/32 .1562 21/64 .3281 47/64 .7344 5/16-18 7.3mm
5/16-24 I 0.9mm .0354 22 .1570 Q .3320 19mm .7480 5/16-24 M
3/8-16 5/16 64 .0360 4mm .1575 8.5mm .3346 3/4 .7500 3/8-16 S
3/8-24 Q 63 .0370 21 .1590 R .3390 49/64 .7656 3/8-24 T
7/16-14 U 62 .0380 20 .1610 11/32 .3438 19.5mm .7677 7/16-14 13/32
7/16-20 W 61 .0390 19 .1660 S .3480 25/32 .7812 7/16-20 10.5mm
1/2-12 27/64 1mm .0394 18 .1695 9mm .3543 20mm .7874 1/2-13 15/32
1/2-13 27/64 60 .0400 11/64 .1719 T .3580 51/64 .7969 1/2-20 31/64
1/2-20 29/64 59 .0410 17 .1730 23/64 .3594 20.5mm .8071 9/16-12 17/32
9/16-12 31/64 58 .0420 16 .1770 U .3680 13/16 .8125 9/16-18 13.5mm
9/16-18 33/64 57 .0430 4.5mm .1772 9.5mm .3740 21mm .8268 5/8-11 15mm
5/8-11 17/32 56 .0465 15 .1800 3/8 .3750 53/64 .8281 5/8-18 19/32
5/8-18 37/64 3/64 .0469 14 .1820 V .3770 27/32 8438 3/4-10 45/64
3/4-10 21/32 55 .0520 13 .1850 W .3860 21.5mm .8465 3/4-16 23/32
3/4-16 11/16 54 .0550 3/16 .1875 25/64 .3906 55/64 .8594 7/8-9 .823
7/8-9 49/64 12 .1890 10mm .3937 22mm .8661 7/8-14 27/32
1.5mm .0591
7/8-14 13/16 1-8 15/16
53 .0595 11 .1910 X .3970 7/8 .8750
1-8 7/8 1-12 .963
1-12 59/64 1/16 .0625 10 .1935 Y .4040 22.5mm .8858
1-14 15/16 52 .0635 9 .1960 13/32 .4062 57/64 .8906
51 .0670 5mm .1969 Z .4130 23mm .9055
Taper Pipe
50
49
.0700
.0730
8
7
.1990
.2010
10.5mm
27/64
.4134
.4219
29/32
59/64
.9062
.9219
Straight Pipe
Tap & Drill
48
5/64
.0760
.0781
13/64
6
.2031
.2040
11mm
7/16
.4331
.4375
23.5mm
15/16
.9252
.9375
Tap & Drill
NPS
NPT 47 .0785 5 .2055 11.5mm .4528 24mm .9449
2mm .0787 4 .2090 29/64 .4531 61/64 .9531 1/16-27 1/4
1/16-27 D 46 .0810 3 .2130 15/32 .4688 24.5mm .9646 1/8-27 11/32
1/8-27 R 45 .0820 5.5mm .2165 12mm .4724 31/32 .9688 1/4-18 7/16
1/4-18 7/16 44 .0860 7/32 .2188 31/64 .4844 25mm .9843 3/8-18 37/64
3/8-18 37/64 1/2-14 23/32
43 .0890 2 .2210 12.5mm .4921 63/64 .9844
1/2-14 45/64 3/4-14 59/64
42 .0935 1 .2280 1/2 .5000 1 1.000
3/4-14 59/64 1-11 1/2 1 5/32
1-11 1/2 1 5/32 3/32 .0938 A .2340 13mm .5118 1 1/4-11 1/2 1 1/2
1 1/4-11 1/2 1 1/2 1 1/2-11 1/2 1 3/4
1 1/2-11 1/2 1 47/64 2-11 1/2 2 7/32
2-11 1/2 2 7/32
Screw Thread Insert (STI)
Metric Tap & Drill Metric
Tap & Drill 2-56
3-48
3/32
36
8-32
8-36
17
17
5/16-24
3/8-16
21/64
X Thread Form
Approx. 70-75% Thread
M1.6 x .35 1.25mm
3-56
4-40
37
31
10-24
10-32
13/64
7
3/8-24
7/16-14
25/64
29/64 Tap & Drill
M2.0 x .40 1.6 4-48 3mm 12-24 1 7/16-20 29/64 Approx. 65% Thread
M2.5 x .45 2.05 5-40 3.4mm 1/4-20 H 1/2-13 33/64 M1.6 x .35 1.45mm
M3.0 x .50 2.5 6-32 26 1/4-28 G 1/2-20 33/64 M2.0 x .40 1.85mm
M3.5 x .60 2.9 6-40 26 5/16-18 Q - - M2.5 x .45 2.30mm
M4.0 x .70 3.3 M3.0 x .50 35
M4.5 x .75 3.75 M3.5 x .60 30
M5.0 x .80 4.2 M4.0 x .70 3.7mm
M6.0 x 1.0 5 M5.0 x .80 14
M7.0 x 1.0 6 M6.0 x 1.0 5.5mm
M8 x 1.25 6.75 M8 x 1.25 7.4mm
M10 x 1.50 8.5 M10 x 1.50 9.3mm
M12 x 1.75 Y M12 x 1.75 7/16
M14 x 2.0 12 M14 x 2.0 13mm
M16 x 2.0 14 M16 x 2.0 15mm
M18 x 2.5 15.5 M20 x 2.5 18.75mm
M20 x 2.5 17.5
Page 187
Conversion Charts
Conversion Formula: From Inches to Millimeters - multiply by 25.4
From Millimeters to Inches - multiply by 0.0394
Inch to Millimeter Conversion (Rounded to nearest mm)
In. mm In. mm In. mm In. mm
1/16 2 21 533 65 1651 123 3124
1/8 3 23 584 66 1676 126 3200
1/4 6 24 610 67 1702 130 3302
5/16 8 27 686 68 1727 132 3353
3/8 10 28 711 69 1753 138 3505
2/5 10 30 762 70 1778 144 3658
7/16 11 31 787 72 1829 147 3734
1/2 13 32 813 73 1854 150 3810
5/8 16 34 864 74 1880 156 3962
3/4 19 36 914 75 1905 162 4115
7/8 22 37 940 76 1930 168 4267
15/16 24 38 965 77 1956 174 4420
1 25 39 991 78 1981 180 4572
2 51 40 1016 79 2007 186 4724
3 76 41 1041 80 2032 192 4877
4 102 42 1067 84 2134 198 5029
5 127 43 1092 85 2159 204 5182
6 152 44 1118 87 2210 210 5334
7 178 45 1143 90 2286 216 5486
8 203 47 1194 94 2388 222 5639
9 229 48 1219 96 2438 228 5791
10 254 50 1270 98 2489 234 5944
11 279 51 1295 99 2515 240 6096
12 305 52 1321 102 2591 246 6248
13 330 53 1346 106 2692 252 6401
14 356 54 1372 108 2743 258 6553
15 381 56 1422 110 2794 264 6706
16 406 60 1524 114 2896 270 6858
17 432 62 1575 118 2997 276 7010
18 457 63 1600 120 3048 282 7163
20 508 64 1626 122 3099 288 7315
Metric Conversion Chart for Popular Gauges
U.S. Std. Gauge Metric Conversion
Gauge Nominal Thickness (In.) (millimeters)
7 .179 4.5
10 .134 3.4
11 .120 3.0
12 .105 2.6
13 .090 2.3
14 .075 1.9
16 .060 1.5
18 .048 1.2
20 .036 .9
22 .030 .7
24 .024 .6
Page 188
liquid measure
conversion chart
1/6 fl oz = 1/3 tbsp = 1 tsp
1/16 cup = 1/2 fl oz = 1 tbsp = 3 tsp
1/8 cup = 1 fl oz = 2 tbsp = 6 tsp
1/4 cup = 2 fl oz = 4 tbsp = 12 tsp
1/2 cup = 4 fl oz = 8 tbsp = 24 tsp
1/4 qt = 1/2 pt = 1 cup = 8 fl oz = 16 tbsp = 48 tsp
1/2 qt = 1 pt = 2 cups = 16 fl oz
1/4 gal = 1 qt = 2 pt = 4 cups = 32 fl oz
1/2 gal = 2 qt = 4 pt = 8 cups = 64 fl oz
1 gal = 4 qt = 8 pt = 16 cups = 128 fl oz
to Metric:
When You Know: Multiply By: To Find:
teaspoon (tsp) 5 milliliters (mL)
tablespoon (tbsp) 15 milliliters (mL)
fluid ounces (fl oz) 30 milliliters (mL)
cups (c) 0.24 liters (L)
pints (pt) 0.47 liters (L)
quarts (qt) 0.95 liters (L)
gallons (gal) 3.8 liters (L)
cubic feet (ft3) 0.03 cubic meters (m3)
cubic yards (yd3) 0.76 cubic meters (m3)
Page 189